[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025187302A1 - Ion implantation apparatus and ion extraction apparatus - Google Patents

Ion implantation apparatus and ion extraction apparatus

Info

Publication number
WO2025187302A1
WO2025187302A1 PCT/JP2025/003734 JP2025003734W WO2025187302A1 WO 2025187302 A1 WO2025187302 A1 WO 2025187302A1 JP 2025003734 W JP2025003734 W JP 2025003734W WO 2025187302 A1 WO2025187302 A1 WO 2025187302A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ion
opening
potential
workpiece
ion beam
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2025/003734
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
WO2025187302A8 (en
Inventor
泰成 二口
雅健 平塚
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sumitomo Heavy Industries Ion Technology Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Sumitomo Heavy Industries Ion Technology Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Ion Technology Co Ltd filed Critical Sumitomo Heavy Industries Ion Technology Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025187302A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025187302A1/en
Publication of WO2025187302A8 publication Critical patent/WO2025187302A8/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01JELECTRIC DISCHARGE TUBES OR DISCHARGE LAMPS
    • H01J37/00Discharge tubes with provision for introducing objects or material to be exposed to the discharge, e.g. for the purpose of examination or processing thereof
    • H01J37/02Details
    • H01J37/04Arrangements of electrodes and associated parts for generating or controlling the discharge, e.g. electron-optical arrangement or ion-optical arrangement
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01JELECTRIC DISCHARGE TUBES OR DISCHARGE LAMPS
    • H01J37/00Discharge tubes with provision for introducing objects or material to be exposed to the discharge, e.g. for the purpose of examination or processing thereof
    • H01J37/30Electron-beam or ion-beam tubes for localised treatment of objects
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01JELECTRIC DISCHARGE TUBES OR DISCHARGE LAMPS
    • H01J37/00Discharge tubes with provision for introducing objects or material to be exposed to the discharge, e.g. for the purpose of examination or processing thereof
    • H01J37/30Electron-beam or ion-beam tubes for localised treatment of objects
    • H01J37/317Electron-beam or ion-beam tubes for localised treatment of objects for changing properties of the objects or for applying thin layers thereon, e.g. for ion implantation

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to an ion implantation device and an ion extraction device.
  • a standard process is to implant ions into semiconductor wafers (also known as the ion implantation process) in order to change the conductivity or crystalline structure of the semiconductor.
  • the ion beam irradiated onto the semiconductor wafer is extracted from an ion source that generates plasma.
  • the manner in which the ion beam interacts with the wafer changes, affecting the results of the ion implantation process.
  • One exemplary objective of an embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a technique that can appropriately extract a group of ions from an ion source.
  • one embodiment of the ion implantation apparatus of the present invention comprises an ion source that generates plasma containing desired ions, an extraction unit that extracts a group of ions containing the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam, and an implantation processing chamber that irradiates the ion beam onto a wafer.
  • the extraction unit comprises, from downstream to upstream in the direction of ion beam propagation, a reference electrode that has a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied, a suppression electrode that has a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied, and a movable conductor that has a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes and whose distance from the first opening in the direction of propagation is variable.
  • This device comprises an ion source that generates plasma containing desired ions, and an extraction unit that extracts a group of ions containing the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam.
  • the extraction unit comprises, from downstream to upstream in the direction of ion beam propagation, a reference electrode that has a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied, a suppression electrode that has a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied, and a movable conductor that has a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes and whose distance from the first opening in the direction of propagation is variable.
  • a non-limiting exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure provides a technique for appropriately extracting ions from an ion source.
  • FIG. 1 is a top view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to an embodiment
  • 1 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of a first holding device and a second holding device.
  • 4A and 4B are top views schematically showing the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece held by the first holding device.
  • 5(a) to 5(c) are side views schematically showing the vertical orientation of the first workpiece held by the first holding device.
  • 10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device.
  • 10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device.
  • FIG. 10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device. 10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to an embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to a modified example. FIG. 10 is a top view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to another embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view schematically showing the movable range of the beam profiler.
  • FIG. 16(a) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an entrance surface having an entrance opening
  • FIG. 16(b) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface having an exit opening
  • 10 is a graph showing an example of a scan voltage waveform of a scan beam and a time waveform of a potential difference in an angle measurement device.
  • Figure 18(a) is a graph showing an example of the time waveform of the beam current detected by the angle measurement device
  • Figure 18(b) is a graph showing an example of the angular distribution of the scan beam calculated using the time waveform of the beam current in Figure 18(a).
  • FIG. 16(a) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an entrance surface having an entrance opening
  • FIG. 16(b) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface having an exit opening
  • 10 is a graph showing an example of a scan voltage waveform of a scan beam and a time waveform of a potential difference in an angle measurement device.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an incident surface of an angle measurement device according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface of an angle measurement device according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a current measuring device according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a modified example.
  • FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an incident surface of an angle measurement device according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface of an angle measurement device according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a current measuring device according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a modified example.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 1 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • 10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a top view showing the schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus 10 according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view showing the schematic configuration of the ion implantation apparatus 10 according to an embodiment.
  • the ion implantation apparatus 10 is configured to perform ion implantation processing on the surfaces of workpieces W1 and W2.
  • the workpieces W1 and W2 are, for example, substrates, such as semiconductor wafers.
  • the workpieces may be referred to as "substrates” or "wafers" in this specification, but this is not intended to limit the target of the implantation processing to a specific object.
  • the workpieces may also be large substrates (e.g., glass substrates or resin substrates) used in the manufacture of flat panel displays (FPDs).
  • FPDs flat panel displays
  • the ion implantation device 10 is configured to irradiate the entire processing surface of the workpieces W1 and W2 with a spot-shaped ion beam by scanning the ion beam back and forth in a predetermined scanning direction and moving the workpieces W1 and W2 back and forth in a direction intersecting the scanning direction.
  • the ion implantation device 10 includes a beam generation device 12, an implantation processing chamber 14, a transport device 16, and a control device 18.
  • the beam generator 12 is configured to generate an ion beam and transport the ion beam to the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the implantation processing chamber 14 contains workpieces W1 and W2 to be implanted.
  • the ion beam provided by the beam generator 12 is irradiated onto the workpieces W1 and W2.
  • the transport device 16 is configured to transport the workpieces W1 and W2 before implantation processing into the implantation processing chamber 14 and transport the workpieces W1 and W2 after implantation processing out of the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the control device 18 is configured to control the overall operation of the various devices that make up the ion implantation apparatus 10.
  • the ion implantation apparatus 10 is equipped with a vacuum exhaust system (not shown) for providing the desired vacuum environment for the beam generator 12, implantation processing chamber 14, and transport device 16.
  • the beam generator 12 comprises, in order from the upstream side of beamline A, an ion source 20, an extraction unit 22, a mass analysis unit 24, a beam shaping unit 26, a beam scanning unit 28, a beam collimation unit 30, an acceleration/deceleration unit 32, and an energy analysis unit 34.
  • beamline A is used for convenience of explanation and is synonymous with the ideal beam trajectory designed when the ion beam is not scanned by the beam scanning unit 28.
  • upstream of beamline A refers to the side closer to the ion source 20
  • “downstream” of beamline A refers to the side closer to the implantation processing chamber 14 (or beam stopper 38).
  • the beam generator 12 is configured so that the beamline A bends midway.
  • the direction of travel of the beamline A changes at the mass analysis unit 24 and the energy analysis unit 34.
  • the beamline A is configured to extend in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the vertical direction.
  • the direction of travel of the ion beam traveling along the beamline A is referred to as the z direction, the vertical direction as the y direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z directions as the x direction.
  • the direction of travel of the beamline A from the ion source 20 to the mass analysis unit 24 is referred to as the z1 direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z1 directions as the x1 direction.
  • the direction of travel of the beamline A from the mass analysis unit 24 to the energy analysis unit 34 is referred to as the z2 direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z2 directions as the x2 direction.
  • the direction of travel of the beamline A downstream of the energy analysis unit 34 is referred to as the z3 direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z3 directions as the x3 direction.
  • the ion source 20 is configured to generate ions that constitute an ion beam.
  • the ion source 20 includes an arc chamber 20a.
  • the arc chamber 20a has an internal space 20b in which plasma is generated.
  • the arc chamber 20a has a roughly rectangular box shape that defines the internal space 20b.
  • the arc chamber 20a has a front slit 20c for extracting ions from the plasma generated in the internal space 20b.
  • the front slit 20c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the front slit 20c is larger than the vertical opening width of the front slit 20c.
  • the ion source 20 includes a source magnet device 20d.
  • the source magnet device 20d is configured to apply a horizontal (x1 direction) magnetic field B1 to the internal space 20b of the arc chamber 20a.
  • the source magnet device 20d increases the generation efficiency of plasma generated in the internal space 20b of the arc chamber 20a.
  • the direction in which the source magnet device 20d applies the magnetic field B1 corresponds to the longitudinal direction of the front slit 20c.
  • the extraction unit 22 is provided downstream of the ion source 20.
  • the extraction unit 22 extracts ions from the ion source 20 to generate an ion beam.
  • the extraction unit 22 is configured to extract ions from plasma generated in the internal space 20b of the arc chamber 20a.
  • the extraction unit 22 includes a first extraction electrode 22a and a second extraction electrode 22b.
  • the first extraction electrode 22a is provided downstream of the arc chamber 20a, and the second extraction electrode 22b is provided downstream of the first extraction electrode 22a.
  • a negative suppression voltage is applied to the first extraction electrode 22a.
  • a ground voltage is applied to the second extraction electrode 22b.
  • a positive extraction voltage is applied to the arc chamber 20a.
  • the first extraction electrode 22a has a first extraction opening 22c through which the ion beam passes. Similar to the front slit 20c, the first extraction opening 22c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the first extraction opening 22c is larger than the vertical opening width of the first extraction opening 22c.
  • the second extraction electrode 22b has a second extraction opening 22d through which the ion beam passes. Similar to the front slit 20c, the second extraction opening 22d has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the second extraction opening 22d is larger than the vertical opening width of the second extraction opening 22d.
  • the ion beam extracted by the extraction unit 22 may be a ribbon-shaped beam that spreads in the horizontal direction (x1 direction).
  • the horizontal size of the ribbon-shaped beam can be increased by increasing the horizontal opening widths of the front slit 20c, first extraction opening 22c, and second extraction opening 22d. As a result, it becomes easier to increase the beam current of the ion beam extracted from the ion source 20.
  • the mass analysis unit 24 is located downstream of the extraction unit 22.
  • the mass analysis unit 24 is configured to select the required ion species from the ion beam extracted by the extraction unit 22 through mass analysis.
  • the mass analysis unit 24 includes a mass analysis magnet device 24a, a mass analysis slit 24b, and an injector Faraday cup 24c.
  • the mass analysis magnet device 24a applies a magnetic field B2 in the vertical direction (-y direction) and deflects the ion beam horizontally (x1 direction).
  • the strength of the magnetic field B2 applied by the mass analysis magnet device 24a is adjusted so that ion species with the desired mass-to-charge ratio M pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the ion beam passing through the mass analysis slit 24b is deflected, for example, by 90 degrees by the mass analysis magnet device 24a.
  • the mass analysis slit 24b is located downstream of the mass analysis magnet device 24a.
  • the mass analysis slit 24b has a slit shape with a short opening width in the horizontal direction (x2 direction) and a long opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the vertical opening width of the mass analysis slit 24b is larger than the horizontal opening width of the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the mass analysis slit 24b may be configured so that the opening width (i.e., slit width) in the horizontal direction (x2 direction) is variable in order to adjust the mass resolution.
  • the mass analysis slit 24b may be configured so that it is made up of two beam shields that are movable in the slit width direction, and the slit width is adjustable by changing the distance between the two beam shields.
  • the mass analysis slit 24b may be configured so that the slit width is variable by switching to one of multiple slits with different slit widths.
  • the injector Faraday cup 24c is located downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the injector Faraday cup 24c measures the beam current of the mass-analyzed ion beam that passes through the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the injector Faraday cup 24c can measure the mass analysis spectrum of the ion beam by measuring the beam current while changing the magnetic field strength of the mass analysis magnet device 24a. The measured mass analysis spectrum can be used to calculate the mass resolution of the mass analysis unit 24.
  • the injector Faraday cup 24c is configured so that it can be inserted into and removed from beamline A by the operation of the injector driver 24d.
  • the injector driver 24d moves the injector Faraday cup 24c in a direction (e.g., the x2 direction) perpendicular to the z2 direction in which beamline A extends.
  • the injector Faraday cup 24c is positioned in beamline A as shown by the dashed line in Figure 1, it blocks the ion beam traveling downstream.
  • the injector Faraday cup 24c is retracted from beamline A as shown by the solid line in Figure 1, the blockage of the ion beam traveling downstream is released.
  • a magnetic shield 23 may be provided between the extraction section 22 and the mass analysis section 24.
  • the magnetic shield 23 is configured to suppress magnetic field interference between the magnetic field B1 applied to the ion source 20 and the magnetic field B2 applied to the mass analysis section 24.
  • the magnetic shield 23 is made of a magnetic material such as an electromagnetic steel plate.
  • the magnetic shield 23 has a passage opening 23a that allows the ion beam traveling from the extraction section 22 toward the mass analysis section 24 to pass through. Similar to the front slit 20c, the passage opening 23a may have a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the passage opening 23a may be larger than the vertical opening width of the passage opening 23a.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 is provided downstream of the mass analysis unit 24.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 is configured to shape the ion beam that has passed through the mass analysis unit 24 into a desired cross-sectional shape and convergence/divergence angle.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 includes a lens device that adjusts at least one of the cross-sectional shape and convergence/divergence angle of the ion beam.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 is configured, for example, to focus a ribbon-shaped ion beam that spreads horizontally and shape it into a spot-shaped ion beam.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 includes multiple lens devices, for example, three lens devices 26a, 26b, and 26c.
  • the three lens devices 26a to 26c are configured, for example, as electric field triple quadrupole lenses (also called triplet Q lenses).
  • the beam shaping unit 26 can independently adjust the convergence or divergence of the ion beam in each of the horizontal direction (x2 direction) and vertical direction (y direction).
  • the beam shaping unit 26 may also include a magnetic field lens device.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 may also include a lens device that uses both electric and magnetic fields to shape the ion beam.
  • the beam scanning unit 28 is provided downstream of the beam shaping unit 26.
  • the beam scanning unit 28 is configured to generate a scan beam SB by scanning the ion beam back and forth in a predetermined scan direction.
  • the beam scanning unit 28 can also be considered a beam deflection device that deflects the ion beam shaped by the beam shaping unit 26 in the predetermined scan direction.
  • the beam scanning unit 28 is configured so that the scan direction is a direction different from the horizontal direction, for example, so that the scan direction is the vertical direction (y direction).
  • the beam scanning unit 28 includes a pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b facing each other in the vertical direction (y direction).
  • the pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b are connected to a variable voltage power supply (not shown).
  • a variable voltage power supply not shown.
  • the electric field generated between the pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b is changed, thereby deflecting the ion beam at various angles.
  • the ion beam is scanned across the entire scanning range in the vertical direction (y direction).
  • the arrow Y illustrates the scanning direction and scanning range of the ion beam
  • the dashed lines indicate multiple trajectories of the ion beam within the scanning range.
  • the beam scanning unit 28 may be a magnetic field type instead of an electric field type.
  • the beam scanning unit 28 may also be equipped with a magnet device for deflecting the ion beam.
  • the beam collimator 30 is provided downstream of the beam scanning unit 28.
  • the beam collimator 30 is configured to make the direction of travel of the ion beam scanned back and forth by the beam scanning unit 28 parallel to the direction of beamline A.
  • the beam collimator 30 has multiple arc-shaped collimator lens electrodes 30a, 30b, each with an ion beam passage slit located in the center in the horizontal direction (x2 direction).
  • the collimator lens electrodes 30a, 30b are connected to a high-voltage power supply (not shown), and an electric field generated by applying a voltage acts on the ion beam to collimate the direction of travel of the ion beam.
  • the beam collimator 30 may be a magnetic field type instead of an electric field type.
  • the beam collimator 30 may also be equipped with a magnet device for deflecting the ion beam.
  • the acceleration/deceleration unit 32 is provided downstream of the beam collimator 30.
  • the acceleration/deceleration unit 32 is configured to accelerate or decelerate the scan beam collimated by the beam collimator 30.
  • the acceleration/deceleration unit 32 is an electrostatic acceleration/deceleration device, and accelerates or decelerates the ion beam by utilizing the potential difference between a first potential applied to the upstream side of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32 and a second potential applied to the downstream side of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 is provided downstream of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 is configured to analyze the energy of the ion beam and pass ions having the desired energy toward the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 is an angular energy filter (AEF) that deflects the ion beam horizontally and selects the desired energy based on the deflection angle ⁇ .
  • the deflection angle ⁇ is, for example, between 10 degrees and 20 degrees, and is approximately 15 degrees.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 includes an AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b and an energy analysis slit 34c.
  • the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b are arranged to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the scan direction.
  • the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b are arranged to face each other in the horizontal direction (x2 direction or x3 direction).
  • the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b are connected to a high-voltage power supply (not shown) and apply an electric field to the ion beam to deflect it.
  • the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b is a deflection device that deflects the scan beam in the horizontal direction.
  • the energy analysis slit 34c is provided downstream of the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b.
  • the energy analysis slit 34c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the vertical direction (y direction) and a short opening width in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). In other words, the vertical opening width of the energy analysis slit 34c is larger than the horizontal opening width of the energy analysis slit 34c.
  • the energy analysis slit 34c allows ion beams of the desired energy value or energy range to pass toward the workpieces W1 and W2, and blocks other ion beams.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 may be a magnetic field type instead of an electric field type.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 may be equipped with a magnet device for magnetic field deflection.
  • the energy analysis unit 34 may use both an electric field and a magnetic field, and may be equipped with an AEF electrode pair for electric field deflection and a magnet device for magnetic field deflection.
  • the beam generator 12 supplies the ion beam to be irradiated onto the workpieces W1 and W2 to the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the beam generator 12 may also be called a beamline device.
  • the beam generator 12 is configured to generate an ion beam to achieve the desired implantation conditions by adjusting the operating parameters of the various devices that make up the beam generator 12.
  • the implantation processing chamber 14 is equipped with a plasma shower device 36, a beam stopper 38, a first holding device 40, and a second holding device 42.
  • the plasma shower device 36 is located downstream of the energy analysis section 34.
  • the plasma shower device 36 supplies low-energy electrons to the ion beam and the surfaces (processed surfaces) of the workpieces W1 and W2 according to the beam current of the ion beam, suppressing charge-up caused by the accumulation of positive charge on the processed surfaces due to ion implantation.
  • the plasma shower device 36 includes, for example, a shower tube 36a through which the ion beam passes, and a plasma generation section 36b that supplies electrons into the shower tube 36a.
  • the shower tube 36a has a shape with a long opening width in the vertical direction (y direction) and a short opening width in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • Beam stopper 38 is provided at the most downstream position of beam line A and is attached, for example, to the side wall of implantation processing chamber 14. When no workpieces W1, W2 are present in beam line A, the ion beam is incident on beam stopper 38.
  • Beam stopper 38 is provided with multiple tuning cups 38a, 38b, 38c, and 38d.
  • the multiple tuning cups 38a-38d are Faraday cups configured to measure the beam current of the ion beam incident on beam stopper 38.
  • the multiple tuning cups 38a-38d are arranged, for example, at intervals in the vertical direction (y direction).
  • the first holding device 40 is configured to be able to hold the first workpiece W1 to be subjected to the injection process.
  • the first holding device 40 is configured to move the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 back and forth in a direction crossing the scan beam.
  • the first holding device 40 is configured to move the first workpiece W1 back and forth in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the first holding device 40 is movable along a guide rail 44 extending in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the first holding device 40 includes a first chuck mechanism 50, a first twist mechanism 52, a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54, a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56, and a first reciprocating mechanism 58.
  • the first chuck mechanism 50 is configured to contact the back surface of the first workpiece W1 and hold the first workpiece W1.
  • the first chuck mechanism 50 includes, for example, an electrostatic chuck for holding the first workpiece W1.
  • the first chuck mechanism 50 may also include a temperature adjustment mechanism for cooling or heating the first workpiece W1.
  • the first chuck mechanism 50 includes a first lift mechanism for lifting the first workpiece W1 so as to separate it from the first chuck mechanism 50.
  • the first twist mechanism 52 rotatably supports the first chuck mechanism 50.
  • the first twist mechanism 52 rotates the first chuck mechanism 50 around a rotation axis (also called the twist axis) extending normal to the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 held by the first chuck mechanism 50, thereby adjusting the twist angle ⁇ a1 of the first workpiece W1.
  • the first twist mechanism 52 adjusts the twist angle ⁇ a1 between, for example, an alignment mark provided on the outer periphery of the first workpiece W1 and a reference position.
  • the alignment mark of the first workpiece W1 refers to, for example, a notch or orientation flat provided on the outer periphery of the wafer, and is a mark that serves as a reference for the crystal axis direction and angular position in the circumferential direction of the wafer.
  • the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 rotatably supports the first twist mechanism 52.
  • the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 rotates the first twist mechanism 52 around a horizontally extending rotation axis (also called the transport tilt axis) to adjust the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1.
  • the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1 can be defined by the vertical rotation angle ⁇ b1 around the horizontal rotation axis.
  • the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 rotatably supports the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54.
  • the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 rotates the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 around a rotation axis (also called the injection tilt axis) extending in the vertical direction, adjusting the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1.
  • the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1 can be defined by the horizontal rotation angle ⁇ c1 around the vertical rotation axis.
  • the first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 is configured to move the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 moves the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 along the guide rail 44.
  • the first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 includes, for example, a first ball screw 58a that extends in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) along the guide rail 44.
  • the first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 moves the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 linearly in the horizontal direction by rotating the first ball screw 58a.
  • the second holding device 42 is configured to be able to hold the second workpiece W2 to be subjected to the injection process.
  • the second holding device 42 is configured to move the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 back and forth in a direction crossing the scan beam.
  • the second holding device 42 is configured to move the second workpiece W2 back and forth in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the second holding device 42 is movable along a guide rail 44 extending in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the second holding device 42 can be configured similarly to the first holding device 40.
  • the second holding device 42 is movable in the same direction as the first holding device 40.
  • the second holding device 42 is movable along a guide rail 44 shared with the first holding device 40.
  • the second holding device 42 may also be configured to be movable along a guide rail different from that of the first holding device 40.
  • the injection processing chamber 14 may be provided with a first guide rail along which the first holding device 40 moves, and a second guide rail along which the second holding device 42 moves.
  • the second holding device 42 is movable simultaneously with the first holding device 40.
  • the second holding device 42 is movable independently of the first holding device 40.
  • the second holding device 42 includes a second chuck mechanism 60, a second twist mechanism 62, a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64, a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66, and a second reciprocating mechanism 68.
  • the second chuck mechanism 60 is configured to contact the back surface of the second workpiece W2 and hold the second workpiece W2.
  • the second chuck mechanism 60 includes, for example, an electrostatic chuck for holding the second workpiece W2.
  • the second chuck mechanism 60 may also include a temperature adjustment mechanism for cooling or heating the second workpiece W2.
  • the second chuck mechanism 60 includes a second lift mechanism for lifting the second workpiece W2 so as to separate it from the second chuck mechanism 60.
  • the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 rotatably supports the second twist mechanism 62.
  • the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 rotates the second twist mechanism 62 around a horizontally extending rotation axis (also called the transport tilt axis) to adjust the vertical orientation of the second workpiece W2.
  • the vertical orientation of the second workpiece W2 can be defined by the vertical rotation angle ⁇ b2 around the horizontal rotation axis.
  • the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 rotatably supports the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64.
  • the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 rotates the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 around a rotation axis (also called the injection tilt axis) extending in the vertical direction, adjusting the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece W2.
  • the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece W2 can be defined by the horizontal rotation angle ⁇ c2 around the vertical rotation axis.
  • the second reciprocating motion mechanism 68 is configured to move the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the second reciprocating motion mechanism 68 moves the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 along the guide rail 44.
  • the second reciprocating motion mechanism 68 for example, includes a second ball screw 68a extending in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) along the guide rail 44, and by rotating the second ball screw 68a, the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 is moved linearly in the horizontal direction.
  • the control device 18 includes a processor 18a such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and a memory 18b such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) or RAM (Random Access Memory).
  • the control device 18 controls the overall operation of the ion implantation device 10 in accordance with a program stored in the memory 18b, for example, by the processor 18a executing the program.
  • the processor 18a may execute a program stored in an arbitrary storage device other than the memory 18b, or may execute a program obtained from an arbitrary recording medium by a reading device, or may execute a program obtained via a network.
  • the memory 18b in which the program is stored may be a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), or may be a non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory), flash memory, magnetoresistive memory, resistance change memory, or ferroelectric memory.
  • EEPROM Electrical Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
  • flash memory magnetoresistive memory
  • resistance change memory or ferroelectric memory.
  • Non-volatile memory, magnetic recording media such as magnetic tape and magnetic disks, and optical recording media such as optical disks are examples of non-transitory, tangible, computer-readable storage media.
  • control device 18 may be realized by a single device equipped with a processor 18a and memory 18b, or may be realized by the cooperation of multiple devices, each equipped with a processor 18a and memory 18b.
  • Figure 3 is a front view showing the schematic configuration of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42, and shows the configuration when viewed in the beam propagation direction (z3 direction) in the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the first holding device 40 is positioned at the first transfer position 80
  • the second holding device 42 is positioned at the second transfer position 82.
  • the first transfer position 80 is a position for loading or unloading the first workpiece W1 into or from the first holding device 40 through the first transfer port 74.
  • the first transfer position 80 corresponds to the position of the first transfer port 74.
  • the second transfer position 82 is a position for loading or unloading the second workpiece W2 into or from the second holding device 42 through the second transfer port 76.
  • the second transfer position 82 corresponds to the position of the second transfer port 76.
  • the first transfer position 80 and the second transfer position 82 are separated in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) from the implantation position 84 for irradiating the workpieces W1 and W2 with the ion beam.
  • the injection position 84 is located in the center of the injection processing chamber 14 in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the injection position 84 is located between the first transport position 80 and the second transport position 82.
  • the injection position 84 includes an injection center position 84C, an injection left end position 84L, and an injection right end position 84R.
  • the workpieces WC, WL, and WR located at the injection center position 84C, the injection left end position 84L, and the injection right end position 84R are indicated by dashed double-dashed lines.
  • the injection center position 84C corresponds to the position where the scan beam SB generated by the beam generating device 12 is irradiated.
  • the injection left end position 84L is shifted to the left (+x3 direction in Figure 3) from the injection center position 84C and is set so that the entire processing surface of the workpiece WL placed at the injection left end position 84L does not overlap with the scan beam SB.
  • the right end implantation position 84R is a position shifted to the right (in the -x3 direction in Figure 3) from the central implantation position 84C, and is set so that the entire surface to be processed of the workpiece WR placed at the right end implantation position 84R does not overlap with the scan beam SB.
  • the size hB of the irradiation range of the scan beam SB in the vertical direction (y direction) is larger than the size hW of the treatment surfaces of the workpieces W1 and W2 in the vertical direction (y direction).
  • the size hB of the scan beam SB in the vertical direction is, for example, 1.1 to 3 times, and preferably 1.2 to 2 times, the size hW of the treatment surfaces of the workpieces W1 and W2 in the vertical direction.
  • the first holding device 40 reciprocates in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) at the injection position 84, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the first workpiece W1 with the scan beam SB.
  • the first holding device 40 reciprocates within a movement range C from the injection left end position 84L to the injection right end position 84R, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the first workpiece W1 with the scan beam SB.
  • the first holding device 40 moves to the first transport position 80, making it possible to load or unload the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 is movable between the injection position 84 and the first transport position 80.
  • the first holding device 40 is movable over a first movable range E1 from the first transport position 80 to the injection left end position 84L.
  • the first holding device 40 cannot move to the second transport position 82.
  • the second holding device 42 reciprocates in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) at the injection position 84, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the second workpiece W2 with the scan beam SB.
  • the second holding device 42 reciprocates within a movement range C from the injection left end position 84L to the injection right end position 84R, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the second workpiece W2 with the scan beam SB.
  • the second holding device 42 moves to the second transport position 82, making it possible to load or unload the second workpiece W2.
  • the second holding device 42 is movable between the injection position 84 and the second transport position 82.
  • the second holding device 42 is movable over a second movable range E2 from the second transport position 82 to the injection right end position 84R.
  • the second holding device 42 cannot move to the first transport position 80.
  • the first implantation position for irradiating the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 with an ion beam is common to the second implantation position for irradiating the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 with an ion beam. That is, the first implantation position and the second implantation position coincide with the common implantation position 84. Furthermore, the first movement range in which the first holding device 40 reciprocates the first workpiece W1 at the first implantation position is common to the second movement range in which the second holding device 42 reciprocates the second workpiece W2 at the second implantation position. That is, the first movement range and the second movement range coincide with the common movement range C. The first movement range and the second movement range overlap when viewed in the direction of beam propagation.
  • the vertical position of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 at the first implantation position is common to the vertical position of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 at the second implantation position.
  • the position in the beam propagation direction of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 at the first implantation position is the same as the position in the beam propagation direction of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 at the second implantation position. Therefore, the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 are configured to allow the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 to move back and forth in the same manner relative to the scan beam SB. Therefore, the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 are irradiated with the scan beam SB in a common implantation environment.
  • Figures 4(a) and (b) are top views schematically showing the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40.
  • Figures 4(a) and (b) show the change in the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1 caused by the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56. The same applies to the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.
  • Figures 4(a) and (b) show the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the implantation process in which the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the first workpiece W1.
  • Figure 4(a) shows the case where the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is perpendicular to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z3 direction).
  • Figure 4(b) shows the case where the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 intersects the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z3 direction) obliquely.
  • the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 has a horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 with respect to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z3 direction).
  • the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 indicates the horizontal inclination of the incident direction of the scan beam SB with respect to the normal to the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 can adjust the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 of the first workpiece W1 by driving the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 to adjust the horizontal rotation angle ⁇ c1.
  • the first holding device 40 is configured to be able to adjust the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 within a range of, for example, ⁇ 30 degrees or ⁇ 60 degrees during ion implantation.
  • Figures 5(a) to 5(c) are side views that schematically show the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40.
  • Figures 5(a) to 5(c) show changes in the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1 caused by the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54. The same applies to the vertical orientation of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.
  • Figure 5(a) shows an example of the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the injection process in which the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is oriented perpendicular to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (direction z3).
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is oriented not along the horizontal direction.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is oriented along the vertical direction.
  • Figure 5(b) shows another example of the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the injection process in which the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is inclined relative to the vertical direction.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is not aligned with the horizontal direction.
  • the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 has a vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 with respect to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (direction z3).
  • the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 indicates the vertical inclination of the incident direction of the scan beam SB with respect to the normal to the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 can adjust the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 by driving the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 to adjust the vertical rotation angle ⁇ b1.
  • the first holding device 40 is configured to be able to adjust the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 within a range of ⁇ 30 degrees or ⁇ 60 degrees, for example, during ion implantation.
  • Figure 5(c) shows the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the transport process in which the first workpiece W1 is loaded into or unloaded from the first holding device 40.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 with the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 oriented horizontally.
  • the first holding device 40 lifts the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a so that the first workpiece W1 moves away from the first chuck mechanism 50. This allows the arm of the first transport robot for loading or unloading the first workpiece W1 to be inserted into the gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1.
  • the arm of the first transport robot may be inserted into the gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1.
  • the arm of the first transport robot may be configured to support the outer periphery of the first workpiece W1 rather than the back surface of the first workpiece W1. In this case, the gap 50b may be very small.
  • FIGS. 6 to 9 are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42.
  • FIG. 6 shows a situation in which the first injection process is being performed on the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 is positioned at the injection position 84
  • the second holding device 42 is positioned at the second transfer position 82.
  • the first holding device 40 reciprocates horizontally at the injection position 84 as indicated by the arrow X to perform the injection process on the first workpiece W1.
  • the second holding device 42 lifts up the second workpiece W2 using the second lift mechanism 60a at the second transfer position 82 in order to transport the second workpiece W2 after the injection process through the second transfer port 76.
  • the second holding device 42 receives the second workpiece W2 using the second lift mechanism 60a at the second transfer position 82 in order to transport the second workpiece W2 before the injection process through the second transfer port 76.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the processing surface of the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 is 0, as shown in FIG. 4(a), for example.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 is 0, as shown in FIG. 5(a), for example.
  • the first holding device 40 may hold the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 is not 0, as shown in FIG. 4(b).
  • the first holding device 40 may hold the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 is not 0, as shown in FIG. 5(b).
  • the first holding device 40 may hold the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where both the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 1 and the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 1 are not 0.
  • the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 in an orientation that allows the second workpiece W2 to be loaded or unloaded through the second transport port 76.
  • the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 with the processing surface of the second workpiece W2 oriented horizontally.
  • the second holding device 42 lifts up the second workpiece W2 using the second lift mechanism 60a, forming a gap 60b between the second chuck mechanism 60 and the second workpiece W2.
  • the second transport device 72 loads the second workpiece W2 after the injection process by inserting the arm of the second transport robot into the gap 60b between the second chuck mechanism 60 and the second workpiece W2.
  • the second holding device 42 When the second workpiece W2 before injection processing is placed on the second lift mechanism 60a by the arm of the second transport robot, the second holding device 42 releases the lift-up of the second workpiece W2 and holds the second workpiece W2 in the second chuck mechanism 60. After holding the second workpiece W2 before injection processing, the second holding device 42 drives the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 to change the vertical rotation angle ⁇ b2 and hold the second workpiece W2 with the processing surface of the second workpiece W2 oriented not along the horizontal direction.
  • Figure 7 shows the situation when switching from the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 to the second injection process into the second workpiece W2. That is, it shows the situation when the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 ends and the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 begins.
  • the first holding device 40 moves from the injection position 84 toward the first transfer position 80 as indicated by arrow F1
  • the second holding device 42 moves from the second transfer position 82 toward the injection position 84 as indicated by arrow F2.
  • the time required to switch from the first injection process to the second injection process can be shortened.
  • the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can be moved so as to maintain the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 and the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.
  • the relative distance d can be maintained constant by making the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 the same.
  • the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can also be adjusted to move the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 so that the relative distance d is maintained within a range from a predetermined upper limit to a predetermined lower limit. In this case, the movement speed of the first holding device 40 may be faster or slower than the movement speed of the second holding device 42.
  • the relative distance d be as small as possible.
  • the relative distance d be larger than the size of the scan beam SB in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).
  • the movement speed of the first holding device 40 holding the first workpiece W1 at the end of the injection process may be the maximum speed possible for the first holding device 40.
  • the movement speed of the second holding device 42 holding the second workpiece W2 at the start of the injection process may be determined according to the injection conditions for the second workpiece W2.
  • the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 can be started at the same movement speed after the second workpiece W2 has moved to the injection position 84. This allows the second injection process to be started earlier, improving productivity.
  • Figure 8 shows the situation when the second injection process is being performed on the second workpiece W2.
  • the second holding device 42 is positioned at the injection position 84, and the first holding device 40 is positioned at the first transfer position 80.
  • the second holding device 42 reciprocates horizontally at the injection position 84 as indicated by the arrow X to inject the second workpiece W2.
  • the first holding device 40 lifts up the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a at the first transfer position 80 in order to transport the first workpiece W1 after the injection process through the first transfer opening 74.
  • the first holding device 40 receives the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a at the first transfer position 80 in order to transport the first workpiece W1 before the injection process through the first transfer opening 74.
  • the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 so that the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the processing surface of the second workpiece W2.
  • the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 2 is 0, as in FIG. 4(a), for example.
  • the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 2 is 0, as in FIG. 5(a), for example.
  • the second holding device 42 may hold the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 2 is not 0, as in FIG. 4(b).
  • the second holding device 42 may hold the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 2 is not 0, as in FIG. 5(b).
  • the second holding device 42 may hold the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where both the horizontal tilt angle ⁇ 2 and the vertical tilt angle ⁇ 2 are not 0.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that it is oriented in a way that allows the first workpiece W1 to be loaded or unloaded through the first transport port 74.
  • the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 is oriented horizontally.
  • the first holding device 40 lifts up the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a, forming a gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1.
  • the first transport device 70 loads the first workpiece W1 after the injection process by inserting the arm of the first transport robot into the gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1.
  • the first holding device 40 When the first workpiece W1 before injection processing is placed on the first lift mechanism 50a by the arm of the first transport robot, the first holding device 40 releases the lift-up of the first workpiece W1 and holds the first workpiece W1 in the first chuck mechanism 50. After holding the first workpiece W1 before injection processing, the first holding device 40 drives the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 to change the vertical rotation angle ⁇ b1 and holds the first workpiece W1 with the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 oriented not along the horizontal direction.
  • Figure 9 shows the situation when switching from the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 to the first injection process into the first workpiece W1. That is, it shows the situation when the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 ends and the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 begins.
  • the first holding device 40 moves from the first transfer position 80 toward the injection position 84 as shown by arrow F3
  • the second holding device 42 moves from the injection position 84 toward the second transfer position 82 as shown by arrow F4.
  • the time required to switch from the second injection process to the first injection process can be shortened.
  • the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can be moved so as to maintain the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 and the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.
  • the relative distance d can be maintained constant by making the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 the same.
  • the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can also be adjusted to move the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 so that the relative distance d is maintained within a range from a predetermined upper limit to a predetermined lower limit.
  • the movement speed of the first holding device 40 may be faster or slower than the movement speed of the second holding device 42.
  • the relative distance d be greater than the horizontal size (x3 direction) of the scan beam SB.
  • the movement speed of the second holding device 42 holding the second workpiece W2 at the end of the injection process may be the maximum speed that the second holding device 42 can achieve.
  • the movement speed of the first holding device 40 holding the first workpiece W1 at the start of the injection process may be determined according to the injection conditions of the first workpiece W1.
  • the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 can be started at the same movement speed after the first workpiece W1 has moved to the injection position 84. This allows the start of the first injection process to be accelerated, improving productivity.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to an embodiment.
  • a first workpiece W1 before implantation is loaded into the first holding device 40 (S10).
  • the first workpiece W1 held in the first holding device 40 and having been implanted may be unloaded, and then the first workpiece W1 before implantation may be loaded into the first holding device 40.
  • the second holding device 42 is moved to the second transfer position 82 (S12), and the first holding device 40 is moved to the first implantation position (e.g., implantation position 84) (S14).
  • S12 and S14 can be performed simultaneously, and can be performed so that the execution periods of S12 and S14 at least partially overlap.
  • the first holding device 40 is moved back and forth at the first implantation position, and the reciprocating first workpiece W1 is irradiated with an ion beam (S16).
  • the second workpiece W2 before the implantation process is loaded into the second holding device 42 (S18).
  • the implanted second workpiece W2 held in the second holding device 42 may be unloaded, and then the second workpiece W2 before the implantation process may be loaded into the second holding device 42.
  • the first holding device 40 is moved to the first transfer position 80 (S20), and the second holding device 42 is moved to a second implantation position (e.g., implantation position 84) (S22).
  • S20 and S22 can be performed simultaneously, and can be performed so that the respective execution periods of S20 and S22 at least partially overlap.
  • the second holding device 42 is moved back and forth at the second implantation position, and the reciprocating second workpiece W2 is irradiated with an ion beam (S24).
  • the flow shown in FIG. 10 can be executed repeatedly.
  • the processing of S10 after the repetition can be executed before, during, or after the execution of S24.
  • the first workpiece W1 held in the first holding device 40 that has been injected can be removed, and the first workpiece W1 before the injection can be carried into the first holding device 40.
  • the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 held in the first holding device 40 and the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 held in the second holding device 42 can be executed alternately and repeatedly.
  • the flow shown in FIG. 10 can be executed repeatedly until the injection processes for the multiple workpieces to be processed consecutively are completed.
  • the injection process and transport process for the workpieces can be carried out in parallel.
  • the transport process for the second workpiece W2 can be carried out by the second holding device 42 simultaneously with the first injection process for the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40.
  • the transport process for the first workpiece W1 can be carried out by the first holding device 40 simultaneously with the second injection process for the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.
  • the configuration of the implantation processing chamber 14 and the transfer device 16 can be made less complex than in a configuration in which multiple holding devices reciprocate vertically. Furthermore, by configuring multiple holding devices to reciprocate horizontally, the vertical size of the implantation processing chamber 14 and the transfer device 16 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide an ion implantation device 10 having an external size that falls within the height restrictions on the floor of a typical semiconductor process factory.
  • the entire surface of the workpiece can be efficiently irradiated with the scan beam. Furthermore, by deflecting the ion beam horizontally in the mass analysis unit 24 and the energy analysis unit 34, a beamline A can be formed that travels along a horizontal plane, thereby reducing the vertical size of the beam generation device 12.
  • the front slit 20c of the ion source 20 by making the front slit 20c of the ion source 20 a slit-like shape that is long in the horizontal direction, an ion beam that spreads in the horizontal direction can be generated through the extraction section 22. As a result, it is easier to generate an ion beam with a larger beam current than when a spot-shaped ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20. Furthermore, because the vertical size of the ion beam extracted from the ion source 20 is small, the distance between the opposing magnetic poles of the mass analysis magnet device 24a through which the ion beam passes can be made smaller. As a result, the size of the mass analysis magnet device 24a can be reduced.
  • an ion beam with a larger beam current can be generated while keeping the size of the mass analysis magnet device 24a smaller.
  • a spot beam suitable for vertical beam scanning by the beam scanning unit 28 can be formed.
  • ion implantation into workpieces with large vertical dimensions becomes possible.
  • a scan beam with a larger beam current can be irradiated onto workpieces with large vertical dimensions, thereby improving the productivity of the implantation process.
  • the direction of application of magnetic field B1 in the ion source 20 and the direction of application of magnetic field B2 in the mass analysis unit 24 are perpendicular to each other, which increases the possibility of interference between the two adversely affecting beam quality and magnetic field control.
  • the direction of application of the magnetic field in the ion source is vertical
  • the direction of application of the magnetic field in the ion source and the direction of application of the magnetic field in the mass analysis unit are parallel, so even if the two magnetic fields interfere to some extent, it does not pose a major problem.
  • This embodiment can be applied to ion implantation processing of workpieces that are large in size in the vertical direction.
  • a workpiece that is large in size in the vertical direction is a large substrate used in the manufacture of flat panel displays (FPDs).
  • the vertical and horizontal dimensions of such a large substrate are, for example, 1 m x 2 m or more. It is not realistic to move such a large workpiece back and forth in the vertical direction.
  • the workpiece is moved back and forth in the horizontal direction, which makes it easier to move the large substrate back and forth compared to moving the workpiece back and forth in the vertical direction.
  • Ion implantation processing can be performed on the large substrate by irradiating a scan beam that is scanned vertically onto the large substrate that is moving back and forth in the horizontal direction.
  • the ion implantation apparatus 10 does not need to include at least one of the beam collimator 30, the acceleration/deceleration unit 32, and the energy analyzer 34.
  • the implantation chamber 14 may be loaded and unloaded by moving the workpiece horizontally. For example, the large substrate before implantation may be loaded into the right (or left) side of the implantation chamber 14, moved left (or right) within the implantation chamber 14 to perform ion implantation, and the large substrate after implantation may be unloaded from the left (or right) side of the implantation chamber 14. In this way, the ion implantation apparatus 10 may continuously process large substrates in-line.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to a modified example. In the flow of FIG. 11, a first implantation process for a first workpiece W1 and a second implantation process for a second workpiece W2 are carried out in parallel.
  • the first workpiece W1 before injection processing is carried into the first holding device 40 (S30).
  • the first workpiece W1 after injection processing held in the first holding device 40 may be carried out, and then the first workpiece W1 before injection processing may be carried into the first holding device 40.
  • the second workpiece W2 before injection processing is carried into the second holding device 42 (S32).
  • the second workpiece W2 after injection processing held in the second holding device 42 may be carried out, and then the second workpiece W2 before injection processing may be carried into the second holding device 42.
  • the order of steps S30 and S32 does not matter; S32 may be started after S30 starts, or S30 may be started after S32 starts. Steps S30 and S32 may be performed simultaneously.
  • the first holding device 40 is moved to a first injection position (e.g., injection position 84) (S34).
  • the first holding device 40 is moved back and forth at the first injection position, thereby irradiating the reciprocating first workpiece W1 with an ion beam (S36).
  • the number of reciprocating movements of the first workpiece W1 in S36 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, only one reciprocation.
  • the first holding device 40 is retracted from the first injection position (S38), and the second holding device 42 is moved to a second injection position (e.g., injection position 84) (S40).
  • the first retraction position to which the first holding device 40 is retracted is, for example, located between the first transfer position 80 and the first injection position.
  • the first retraction position to which the first holding device 40 is retracted may be the same as the first transfer position 80.
  • the second holding device 42 is moved back and forth at the second implantation position, thereby irradiating the reciprocating second workpiece W2 with an ion beam (S42).
  • the number of reciprocating movements of the second workpiece W2 in S42 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, only one reciprocation.
  • the second holding device 42 is retracted from the second implantation position (S44).
  • the second retraction position to which the second holding device 42 is retracted is, for example, located between the second transfer position 82 and the second implantation position.
  • the second retraction position to which the second holding device 42 is retracted may be the same as the second transfer position 82.
  • steps S34 to S44 are repeated until the implantation process is complete. For example, if the number of reciprocating movements required to complete the implantation process for the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 is three (i.e., three round trips), steps S34 to S44 are repeated three times. In this case, the process of irradiating the ion beam by making one round trip of the first workpiece W1 and the process of irradiating the ion beam by making one round trip of the second workpiece W2 are alternately performed three times each.
  • S38 and S40 can be performed simultaneously by minimizing the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2, and S44 and S34 can be performed simultaneously by minimizing the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2.
  • the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 can be kept as small as possible, and the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 can be moved back and forth in the same direction in synchronization. This improves the efficiency of ion beam utilization.
  • step S48 may be started after S48, or S48 may be started after S50.
  • steps S48 and S50 may be executed simultaneously.
  • step S48 may be omitted because the first holding device 40 is already positioned at the first transfer position 80 in step S38.
  • step S50 may be omitted because the second holding device 42 is already positioned at the second transfer position 82 in step S44.
  • the flow shown in FIG. 11 can be repeatedly executed until the implantation process for multiple workpieces to be processed consecutively is completed.
  • the first transport process of loading and unloading the first workpiece W1 using the first holding device 40 and the second transport process of loading and unloading the second workpiece W2 using the second holding device 42 can be executed simultaneously, thereby improving productivity.
  • the flow shown in FIG. 11 is preferably applied when the implantation time during which the workpiece is irradiated with an ion beam is sufficiently short (e.g., less than half) compared to the transport time required for loading and unloading the workpiece.
  • the flow shown in FIG. 11 is also preferably applied when the implantation time during which the workpiece is irradiated with an ion beam is sufficiently long (e.g., more than twice) compared to the transport time required for loading and unloading the workpiece.
  • the flow shown in FIG. 11 can also be applied when the implantation time during which the workpiece is irradiated with an ion beam is approximately the same as the transport time required for loading and unloading the workpiece; in this case, the flow shown in FIG. 10 may be more productive.
  • the beam generating device 12 generates a scanned beam using the beam scanning unit 28 and the beam collimating unit 30.
  • the beam generating device may generate a ribbon beam.
  • the beam generating device may include a ribbon beam generating unit instead of the beam scanning unit 28.
  • the ribbon beam generating unit generates a ribbon beam by diverging a spot-shaped ion beam in the vertical direction.
  • the ribbon beam generating unit may be configured with an electric field type or magnetic field type beam diverging device.
  • the ion beam extracted from the ion source 20 is a ribbon-shaped beam that expands in the horizontal direction.
  • the ion beam extracted from the ion source may be a ribbon beam that expands in the vertical direction.
  • the front slit of the ion source has a slit shape with a long vertical opening width and a short horizontal opening width.
  • the extraction electrode of the extraction unit has a slit shape with a long vertical opening width and a short horizontal opening width.
  • the mass analysis unit is configured to deflect the vertically expanded ribbon beam in the horizontal direction.
  • the beam generation device does not need to include the beam scanning unit 28 and the beam collimator 30.
  • the ion source and extraction unit can be said to be a ribbon beam generation unit for generating a vertically expanded ribbon beam.
  • the beam generating device that generates the ribbon beam is configured to irradiate the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in the vertical direction is larger than the size of the workpiece's surface to be processed.
  • the beam generating device 12 that generates the scan beam is configured to irradiate the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in the vertical direction is larger than the size of the workpiece's surface to be processed.
  • the implantation processing chamber 14 is provided with multiple holding devices 40, 42.
  • the implantation processing chamber 14 may be provided with only a single holding device.
  • the single holding device may be configured similarly to either the first holding device 40 or the second holding device 42 described above.
  • the scanning direction of the scan beam SB is vertical.
  • the scanning direction of the scan beam SB may be configured to be inclined relative to the vertical.
  • the beam scanning unit 28, beam collimation unit 30, acceleration/deceleration unit 32, and energy analysis unit 34 are arranged at a position rotated (i.e., in an inclined orientation) around the beam line A extending in the z2 direction as the axis of rotation (for example, at a position downstream of the mass analysis unit 24 and upstream of the beam scanning unit 28).
  • the scanning direction of the scan beam SB is within 45 degrees of the vertical.
  • the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 move horizontally.
  • the movement direction of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 does not have to be horizontal, and may be inclined relative to the horizontal.
  • the movement direction of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 may be a direction other than the horizontal direction and may be any direction that crosses the scan beam.
  • An ion implantation apparatus comprising: a holding device configured to be able to hold a workpiece, the holding device configured to reciprocate the workpiece held by the holding device in a direction crossing the scan beam.
  • a holding device configured to be able to hold a workpiece, the holding device configured to reciprocate the workpiece held by the holding device in a direction crossing the scan beam.
  • the ion source includes a front slit through which the ions extracted by the extraction unit pass, 5.
  • the ion source is an arc chamber having an internal space and a front slit for extracting the ions from plasma generated in the internal space; Item 6.
  • the ion implantation apparatus further comprising: a magnet device that applies the horizontal magnetic field to the internal space.
  • the extraction section includes an extraction electrode having an extraction opening through which the ion beam passes, Item 7.
  • the ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 1 to 7, further comprising a mass analysis unit provided between the extraction unit and the beam scanning unit, for deflecting the ion beam in the horizontal direction.
  • (Item 12) The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 1 to 11, further comprising a beam collimator provided downstream of the beam scanning unit to collimate the scan beam.
  • the deflection device comprises a pair of electrodes facing each other across the scan beam, and a power supply that applies a DC voltage to the pair of electrodes.
  • (Item 15) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 14, wherein the electrode pair of the deflection device is arranged to face each other in the horizontal direction.
  • (Item 16) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 14, wherein the electrode pair of the deflection device is arranged to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the scanning direction.
  • (Item 17) generating ions using an ion source; extracting the ions from the ion source to form an ion beam; generating a scanned beam by scanning the ion beam back and forth in a scan direction different from a horizontal direction; and moving the workpiece back and forth in a direction crossing the scan beam.
  • a beam generating device configured to generate an ion beam to be irradiated onto a workpiece, and to irradiate the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in the vertical direction is larger than the size of the surface to be processed of the workpiece; a first holding device configured to be able to hold a first workpiece, the first holding device configured to reciprocate the first workpiece held by the first holding device in a horizontal direction so that the first workpiece crosses the irradiation range;
  • An ion implantation apparatus comprising: a second holding device configured to be able to hold a second object to be processed, the second holding device configured to move the second object to and fro in the horizontal direction so that the second object to be processed held by the second holding device crosses the irradiation range.
  • the first holding device is configured to be movable between a first implantation position for irradiating the first workpiece with the ion beam and a first transport position for carrying the first workpiece into or out of the first holding device, Item 19.
  • the first holding device is configured to be unable to move to the second conveying position, 25.
  • the first holding device includes a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the vertical orientation of the first workpiece, and a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece, 29.
  • the ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 28, wherein the second holding device comprises a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the vertical orientation of the second workpiece, and a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece.
  • the first holding device includes a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the horizontal rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the first workpiece, and a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the vertical rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the first workpiece, 29.
  • the ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 28, wherein the second holding device comprises a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the horizontal rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the second workpiece, and a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the vertical rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the second workpiece.
  • the first holding device includes a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the orientation of the first workpiece, and the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism is configured to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the first workpiece to be along the horizontal direction when the first workpiece is carried in or out, and to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the first workpiece to be not along the horizontal direction when the first workpiece is irradiated with the ion beam, 29.
  • the ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 28, wherein the second holding device is provided with a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the orientation of the second workpiece, and the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism is configured to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the second workpiece to be along the horizontal direction when the second workpiece is loaded or unloaded, and to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the second workpiece to be not along the horizontal direction when the ion beam is irradiated onto the second workpiece.
  • the first holding device includes a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece, and a first twist mechanism that adjusts the twist angle of the first workpiece, Item 32.
  • An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 31, wherein the second holding device comprises a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece, and a second twist mechanism that adjusts the twist angle of the second workpiece.
  • the beam generating device includes a beam scanning unit that scans the ion beam back and forth across the irradiation range.
  • the beam generating device includes a ribbon beam generating unit that generates a ribbon beam having a beam size corresponding to the size of the irradiation range.
  • (Item 35) generating an ion beam to be irradiated onto a workpiece; irradiating the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in a vertical direction is larger than the size of the surface to be processed of the workpiece; holding the first workpiece in a first holding device; Using the first holding device, reciprocating the first workpiece in a horizontal direction so that the first workpiece crosses the irradiation range; holding the second object to be processed in a second holding device; and using the second holding device, reciprocating the second object in the horizontal direction so that the second object crosses the irradiation range.
  • FIG. 12 is a top view showing the schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus 10A according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a side view showing the schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus 10A according to another embodiment.
  • the ion implantation apparatus 10A shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 differs from the ion implantation apparatus 10 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 in that it further includes a beam profiler 46 provided in the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the following description of the ion implantation apparatus 10A will focus on the differences from the above-mentioned embodiments, and will omit a description of the commonalities as appropriate.
  • the beam profiler 46 is provided inside the implantation processing chamber 14.
  • the beam profiler 46 is a beam measurement device for measuring the scan beam SB at the surface position of the workpieces W1 and W2.
  • the beam profiler 46 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction (y direction) by the operation of the profiler drive device 47.
  • the beam profiler 46 is retracted from the implantation position where the workpieces W1 and W2 are located during ion implantation, and is inserted into the implantation position when the workpieces W1 and W2 are not at the implantation position.
  • FIG. 14 is a front view schematically illustrating the movable range of the beam profiler 46, and is obtained by adding the beam profiler 46 to FIG. 3 described above.
  • FIG. 14 shows the beam profiler 46 inserted at the implantation position.
  • the beam profiler 46 is movable in the vertical direction (y direction) as indicated by the arrow H by operation of the profiler driver 47.
  • the beam profiler 46 is configured to be movable, for example, over the size hB of the vertical irradiation range of the scan beam SB, and is configured to be movable between an upper end position 46a vertically above the scan beam SB and a lower end position 46b vertically below the scan beam SB.
  • the beam profiler 46 is disposed, for example, at the upper end position 46a.
  • the beam profiler 46 is equipped with a profiler cup, which is a Faraday cup for measuring the beam current of the scan beam SB.
  • the beam profiler 46 measures the beam current while moving in the vertical direction (y direction), thereby measuring the beam current throughout the entire beam scanning range of the scan beam SB.
  • the beam profiler 46 may also be a measurement device that measures the beam current density distribution in the vertical direction (y direction) of the scan beam SB.
  • Beam profiler 46 may be equipped with an angle measurement device for measuring angular information of scan beam SB.
  • the angle measurement device may be equipped with a first angle measurement device capable of measuring angular information in the horizontal direction (x direction) of scan beam SB, and a second angle measurement device capable of measuring angular information in the vertical direction (y direction) of scan beam SB.
  • Beam profiler 46 may be a measurement device that measures angular information in the x direction and angular information in the y direction, and may measure angular center of gravity, convergence/divergence angles, etc. as angular information.
  • Fig. 15 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an angle measurement device 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • the angle measurement device 100 is configured to measure angular information of the scan beam SB in a first direction.
  • Fig. 15 shows a case where the first direction is parallel to the scan direction (y direction), but the direction of the angular information measured by the angle measurement device 100 (i.e., the first direction) is not particularly limited, and the first direction may be oblique to the scan direction.
  • the angle measurement device 100 includes an entrance surface 104 having an entrance opening 102, an exit surface 108 having an exit opening 106, an electrode assembly 110, a power supply 112, and a current measuring device 114.
  • the angle measurement device 100 may include a front plate 116 having an incident surface 104.
  • the incident aperture 102 is formed to penetrate the front plate 116.
  • the incident aperture 102 passes a portion of the scan beam SB that is incident on the incident surface 104.
  • the incident aperture 102 has an aperture shape in which the opening width in at least the first direction is short.
  • the angle measurement device 100 may include a rear plate 118 having an exit surface 108.
  • the rear plate 118 is positioned away from the front plate 116 in the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (i.e., the z direction).
  • the exit aperture 106 is formed to penetrate the rear plate 118.
  • the exit aperture 106 passes a portion of the ion beam that has passed through the entrance aperture 102.
  • the exit aperture 106 Similar to the entrance aperture 102, the exit aperture 106 has an opening shape with a short opening width in at least the first direction.
  • the exit aperture 106 is positioned, for example, so that its position in the x and y directions perpendicular to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z direction) coincides with that of the entrance aperture 102.
  • Figure 16(a) is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of an incident surface 104 having an incident aperture 102
  • Figure 16(b) is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of an exit surface 108 having an exit aperture 106.
  • the incident aperture 102 can have a slit shape with a short opening width w1 in a first direction (e.g., the y direction) and a long opening width w2 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction (e.g., the x direction).
  • the incident aperture 102 is, for example, a slit with a slit width direction parallel to the scanning direction of the scan beam SB.
  • the opening width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit width direction is, for example, 10 mm or less, 5 mm or less, or 3 mm or less.
  • the opening width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit width direction is, for example, 0.1 mm or more, 0.5 mm or more, or 1 mm or more.
  • the opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction perpendicular to the first direction is longer than, for example, the beam width of the scan beam SB in the x direction.
  • the opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction is, for example, 10 mm or more, 20 mm or more, or 30 mm or more.
  • the opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction is, for example, 200 mm or less, 150 mm or less, or 100 mm or less.
  • the exit aperture 106 can have the same shape and size as the entrance aperture 102.
  • the exit aperture 106 is, for example, a slit having a slit width direction parallel to the scanning direction of the scan beam SB.
  • the opening width w3 of the exit aperture 106 in the slit width direction may be the same as the opening width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit width direction.
  • the opening width w4 of the exit aperture 106 in the slit length direction may be the same as the opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction.
  • the aperture width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be shorter than the beam width of the scan beam SB.
  • the aperture width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be approximately the same as the aperture width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the first direction.
  • the aperture shape of the entrance aperture 102 may be rectangular or circular rather than slit-shaped.
  • the aperture width w4 of the exit aperture 106 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be shorter than the beam width of the scan beam SB in the direction perpendicular to the first direction.
  • the aperture width w4 of the exit aperture 106 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be approximately the same as the aperture width w3 of the exit aperture 106 in the first direction.
  • the aperture shape of the exit aperture 106 may be rectangular or circular rather than slit-shaped.
  • the electrode assembly 110 is disposed between the incident surface 104 and the exit surface 108.
  • the electrode assembly 110 has a first electrode surface 122 and a second electrode surface 124 that face each other in a first direction across the ion beam traveling from the incident aperture 102 to the exit aperture 106.
  • the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 face each other so as to be parallel to each other.
  • the facing distance d between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 in the first direction is sufficiently larger than the opening widths w1 and w3 in the first direction of the incident aperture 102 and the incident surface 104.
  • "sufficiently large” means large enough not to impede the transport of the ion beam from the incident aperture 102 to the exit aperture 106.
  • the facing distance d between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 in the first direction is, for example, 5 mm or more, 10 mm or more, or 15 mm or more.
  • the opposing distance d in the first direction between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 is, for example, 50 mm or less, 30 mm or less, or 20 mm or less.
  • the electrode assembly 110 may include a first electrode body 126 having a first electrode surface 122 and a second electrode body 128 having a second electrode surface 124.
  • a side plate 120 may be provided around the electrode assembly 110 to surround the first electrode body 126 and the second electrode body 128.
  • the side plate 120 may be configured to extend cylindrically from the front plate 116 toward the back plate 118.
  • the front plate 116, back plate 118, and side plate 120 may form a housing that houses the electrode assembly 110.
  • the front plate 116, back plate 118, and side plate 120 may be grounded and have a ground potential.
  • the power source 112 applies a voltage to the electrode assembly 110, generating a potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124.
  • the power source 112 is a variable voltage source, allowing the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 to be variable.
  • the power source 112 may include a first power source 130 coupled to the first electrode surface 122 or the first electrode body 126, and a second power source 132 coupled to the second electrode surface 124 or the second electrode body 128.
  • the power source 112 may include only one of the first power source 130 or the second power source 132. In this case, the electrode surface or electrode body to which the first power source 130 or the second power source 132 is not coupled may be grounded and have ground potential.
  • the power supply 112 applies a voltage such that the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 is, for example, at most 500 V or more, 1000 V or more, or 2000 V or more.
  • the first power supply 130 and the second power supply 132 are each configured to be able to apply a voltage with an absolute value of, for example, up to 1000 V. For example, by setting the applied voltage of the first power supply 130 to -1000 V and the applied voltage of the second power supply 132 to +1000 V, the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 can be 2000 V.
  • the power supply 112 changes the applied voltage based on, for example, a command value from the control device 18.
  • the electrode assembly 110 and power supply 112 function as a deflection device that deflects the ion beam from the entrance aperture 102 toward the exit aperture 106.
  • Figure 15 shows trajectories 151, 152, and 153 of an ion beam deflected by the electric field E caused by the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124.
  • the trajectory 151 shown by the thick line represents an ion beam that can pass through both the entrance aperture 102 and the exit aperture 106.
  • the trajectories 152 and 153 shown by the thin lines represent ion beams that cannot pass through the exit aperture 106 and are blocked by the exit surface 108 or the back plate 118.
  • the ion beam along trajectory 152 cannot pass through the exit aperture 106 because the angle ⁇ y in the first direction is slightly larger than that of the ion beam along trajectory 151.
  • the ion beam along trajectory 153 cannot pass through the exit aperture 106 because the angle ⁇ y in the first direction is slightly smaller than that of the ion beam along trajectory 151. Therefore, the ion beams that are extracted from the exit aperture 106 are limited to those whose angle ⁇ y in the first direction at the entrance aperture 102 is within a specific range.
  • the angle ⁇ y of the first direction that the ion beam emitted from the exit aperture 106 has at the entrance aperture 102 varies depending on the electric field E, i.e., the potential difference ⁇ V, between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124. Therefore, by changing the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124, it is possible to change the angle ⁇ y of the first direction that the ion beam emitted from the exit aperture 106 has at the entrance aperture 102.
  • the current measuring device 114 detects the ion beam that has passed through the exit aperture 106 and measures the beam current value.
  • the current measuring device 114 includes a Faraday cup 134 for detecting the ion beam and an ammeter 136 coupled to the Faraday cup 134.
  • the current measuring device 114 may further include a suppression electrode 138 disposed between the exit surface 108 and the Faraday cup 134.
  • the suppression electrode 138 is coupled to a suppression power supply 140 for applying a predetermined suppression voltage.
  • the suppression electrode 138 has a passage opening 142 that allows the ion beam to pass from the exit aperture 106 toward the Faraday cup 134.
  • the passage opening 142 has an opening shape that is sufficiently larger than the exit aperture 106 so as not to obstruct the ion beam traveling from the exit aperture 106 toward the Faraday cup 134. Note that instead of a configuration in which a suppression electric field is applied to suppress the movement of electrons, a configuration in which a suppression magnetic field is applied to suppress the movement of electrons may be employed.
  • the angle measurement device 100 may further include a measurement control device 144.
  • the measurement control device 144 includes a processor 144a and a memory 144b.
  • the measurement control device 144 controls the overall operation of the angle measurement device 100 in accordance with a predetermined program, for example, by having the processor 144a execute the predetermined program stored in the memory 144b.
  • the measurement control device 144 may be configured, for example, in the same manner as the control device 18 described above.
  • the operation of the angle measurement device 100 may be controlled by the control device 18 in addition to or instead of the measurement control device 144.
  • the measurement control device 144 outputs a command value for setting the applied voltage of the power supply 112.
  • the measurement control device 144 for example, outputs a command value for applying a variable voltage to the electrode assembly 110, thereby changing the value of the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 over time.
  • the measurement control device 144 may, for example, output a command value for periodically changing the value of the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124.
  • the measurement control device 144 may output a command value that indicates the time series value of the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124.
  • the measurement control device 144 acquires the beam current value I measured by the current measuring device 114.
  • the measurement control device 144 calculates angular information of the first direction of the scan beam SB using the value of the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 based on the command value and the acquired beam current value I.
  • the measurement control device 144 calculates the angle ⁇ y in the first direction that the ion beam detected by the current measuring device 114 has at the entrance aperture 102, for example, using the beam energy of the scan beam SB and the value of the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124.
  • the measurement control device 144 calculates the intensity of the angular component of the first direction of the scan beam SB by correlating the calculated angle ⁇ y with the acquired beam current value.
  • the measurement control device 144 may change the value of the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 in accordance with the scan period Ts of the scan beam SB.
  • the measurement control device 144 may fix the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 at the timing when the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100 (specifically, the incident surface 104).
  • the measurement control device 144 may change the potential difference ⁇ V between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 at the timing when the scan beam SB is not incident on the angle measurement device 100 (specifically, the incident surface 104).
  • Figure 17 is a graph showing an example of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) of the scan beam SB and the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference in the angle measurement device 100.
  • the vertical axis of the graph is the voltage value V, and the maximum absolute values of the scan voltage Vs and the potential difference ⁇ V are normalized to Vmax.
  • An example of the scan frequency fs is 1 kHz.
  • the position of the angle measurement device 100 is not particularly limited, and the angle measurement device 100 may be positioned so that the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100 at the timing when the scan voltage Vs becomes a specific value other than 0.
  • the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference in the angle measurement device 100 changes in stages corresponding to the scan period Ts.
  • the value of the potential difference ⁇ V(t) is fixed at the measurement timing tj when the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100, and is changed at a timing different from the measurement timing tj.
  • the value of the potential difference ⁇ V is changed every scan period Ts, with 15 voltage levels set from -Vmax to +Vmax. While the example of Figure 17 only shows the process of the potential difference ⁇ V changing from -Vmax to +Vmax, it may also change conversely from Vmax to -Vmax, or from -Vmax to +Vmax and then from +Vmax to -Vmax. Alternatively, the potential difference ⁇ V may be repeatedly changed between -Vmax and +Vmax. The time it takes for the potential difference ⁇ V to change from -Vmax to +Vmax corresponds to half (Td/2) of the deflection period Td over which the potential difference ⁇ V is changed.
  • the number of voltage value steps set in the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 10 or more, 15 or more, or 20 or more, or, for example, 100 or less, 50 or less, or 30 or less.
  • Increasing the number of steps can improve measurement accuracy (e.g., angular resolution), but increases the time required for measurement. Therefore, the number of steps in the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference can be set appropriately depending on the required balance between angular resolution and measurement time.
  • the value of the potential difference ⁇ V may be changed every half of the scan period Ts. In this case, the time required for measurement can be shortened.
  • the value of the potential difference ⁇ V may be changed every integer multiple of the scan period Ts (e.g., k ⁇ Ts). In this case, the number of measurements of the scan beam SB in one period increases, thereby improving measurement accuracy.
  • the deflection frequency fd can be set, for example, to 1/1000 or more, 1/500 or more, or 1/200 or more of the scan frequency fs, or to 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, or 1/50 or less of the scan frequency fs.
  • An example of the deflection frequency fd is about 1/100 of the scan frequency fs, for example, about 10 Hz. It is preferable that the deflection frequency fd be set differently from the scan frequency fs.
  • FIG. 18(a) is a graph showing an example of the time waveform I(t) of the beam current detected by the angle measurement device 100.
  • FIG. 18(a) corresponds to the time waveform I(t) of the beam current when the time waveform of the potential difference ⁇ V shown in FIG. 17 is applied.
  • the time waveform I(t) of the beam current is composed of time series values of the pulsed beam current Ij measured at each of multiple measurement timings tj. In the example of FIG.
  • the beam current value Ii corresponding to a specific value of the potential difference ⁇ Vi can be obtained.
  • the beam current value Ii corresponding to the angle ⁇ yi can be obtained.
  • Figure 18(b) is a graph showing an example of the angular distribution of the scan beam calculated using the time waveform I(t) of the beam current in Figure 18(a); for example, an angular distribution such as that shown by the dashed line 156 can be calculated.
  • angular information in the first direction of the scan beam SB can be obtained with high precision in a short time.
  • the scan beam SB incident on the angle measurement device 100 is scanned back and forth by the beam scanning unit 28 (also called a beam scanning device) located upstream of the angle measurement device 100, so the entire beam can be measured without moving the angle measurement device 100.
  • the deflection period Td required to obtain the angular distribution can be set to 1 second or less or 0.1 seconds or less, so the angular distribution in the first direction of the scan beam SB can be measured in an extremely short time.
  • the angular resolution can be improved by increasing the number of stages of the potential difference ⁇ Vi, measurement accuracy can be improved compared to conventional configurations in which multiple electrode bodies are arranged to measure the angular distribution.
  • the deflection frequency fd is smaller than the scan frequency fs, i.e., the deflection period Td is greater than the scan period Ts.
  • the deflection frequency fd may be greater than the scan frequency fs, or the deflection period Td may be smaller than the scan period Ts.
  • the scan frequency fs may be a small value such as 10 Hz or less, and the deflection frequency fd may be, for example, 10 times or more, 20 times or more, or 50 times or more of the scan frequency fs, or, for example, 1000 times or less, 500 times or less, or 200 times or less.
  • the deflection frequency fd may be, for example, 100 Hz or more, 500 Hz or more, or 1 kHz or more, or, for example, 100 kHz or less, 50 kHz or less, or 10 kHz or less.
  • multiple beam current values Ii corresponding to multiple potential differences ⁇ Vi can be obtained while the scan beam SB is scanned back and forth or one way. Therefore, even in this case, the angular distribution of the scan beam SB in the first direction can be measured during a scan period Ts of 1 second or less or 0.1 seconds or less.
  • the deflection frequency fd may be set so as not to be an integer multiple of the scan frequency fs.
  • the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) is a triangular wave, but the shape of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) is not particularly limited and may be a sine wave, a modulated triangular wave or sine wave, or a waveform that changes in a stepwise manner.
  • the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference is shown to change in a stepwise manner, but the shape of the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference is not particularly limited and may be a triangular wave, a sine wave, or a modulated triangular wave or sine wave.
  • the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) and the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference may each be any periodically changing waveform, such as a stepwise waveform, a triangular wave, a sine wave, or a modulated triangular wave or sine wave.
  • the deflection frequency fd of the time waveform ⁇ V(t) of the potential difference may be set so that it is not an integer multiple of the scan frequency fs of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t), and the scan frequency fs may not be an integer multiple of the deflection frequency fd.
  • the angle measurement device 100 may also measure an ion beam that is not scanned by a beam scanning device.
  • the measurement of the ion beam may be performed in combination with moving the angle measurement device 100 in the scan direction (y direction).
  • the measurement of the scanned beam SB may be performed in combination with moving the angle measurement device 100 in the scan direction (y direction).
  • the angle measurement device like the first embodiment, includes an incident surface, an exit surface, an electrode assembly, a power supply, and a current measuring device.
  • the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that multiple incident openings are provided on the incident surface and multiple exit openings are provided on the exit surface.
  • the angle measurement device according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, and a description of the commonalities will be omitted as appropriate.
  • Figures 19 and 20 are plan views showing the schematic configuration of an angle measurement device 200 according to the second embodiment.
  • Figure 19 shows an incident surface 204 having multiple incident apertures 202a, 202b, and 202c, viewed from the upstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction).
  • the multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c are arranged side by side in the direction (x direction) perpendicular to the scanning direction of the scan beam SB in the measurement range D.
  • the x-direction aperture ranges D1, D2, and D3 in which the multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c are provided are set to be continuous with no gaps in the x direction and not overlap in the x direction.
  • the multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c are formed to penetrate a front panel 216 having the incident surface 204.
  • the multiple incident apertures 202a-202c have a slit shape with short aperture widths w1a, w1b, and w1c in the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction), and long aperture widths w2a, w2b, and w2c in the q direction, which is perpendicular to the p direction.
  • the multiple incident apertures 202a-202c have the same aperture widths w1a-w1c in the slit width direction (i.e., p direction).
  • the multiple incident apertures 202a-202c have the same aperture widths w2a, w2b, and w2c in the slit length direction (q direction) as the multiple incident apertures 202a-202c.
  • the aperture width w2b in the slit length direction of the second incident aperture 202b located in the center is longer than the aperture widths w2a and w2c in the slit length direction of the first and third incident apertures 202a and 202c located on either side of them.
  • Figure 20 shows an exit surface 208 having multiple exit apertures 206a, 206b, and 206c, viewed from the downstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction).
  • the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c can have the same shape and size as the corresponding entrance apertures 202a-202c.
  • the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c are arranged so that their positions in the x and y directions perpendicular to the propagation direction of the scan beam SB coincide with the corresponding entrance apertures 202a-202c.
  • the opening widths w3a, w3b, and w3c in the slit width direction of the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c may be the same as the opening widths w1a-w1c in the slit width direction of the corresponding entrance apertures 202a-202c.
  • the opening widths w4a, w4b, and w4c in the slit length direction of the multiple exit openings 206a to 206c may be the same as the opening widths w2a to w2c in the slit length direction of the corresponding entrance openings 202a to 202c.
  • the angle measurement device 200 has three entrance openings 202a-202c and three exit openings 206a-206c. That is, the angle measurement device 200 has a first entrance opening 202a, a second entrance opening 202b, and a third entrance opening 202c provided on the entrance surface 204, and a first exit opening 206a, a second exit opening 206b, and a third exit opening 206c provided on the exit surface 208. Note that the number of each of the multiple entrance openings and multiple exit openings provided in the angle measurement device 200 is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.
  • the angle ⁇ 1 between the slit width direction (p direction) and the scanning direction (y direction) of the multiple entrance apertures 202a-202c and the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c is 45 degrees.
  • the angle ⁇ 1 between the slit width direction (p direction) and the scanning direction (y direction) is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 5 degrees or more, 15 degrees or more, or 30 degrees or more, or may be, for example, 85 degrees or less, 75 degrees or less, or 60 degrees or less.
  • Figure 21 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 210 according to the second embodiment.
  • the electrode assembly 210 is disposed between the incident surface 204 and the exit surface 208.
  • Figure 21 shows a cross-sectional view perpendicular to the direction of travel (z direction) of the scan beam SB.
  • the positions of multiple entrance apertures 202a-202c are indicated by dashed lines.
  • the electrode assembly 210 has a first electrode surface 222a, a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, a fourth electrode surface 222b, a fifth electrode surface 222c, and a sixth electrode surface 224c.
  • the first electrode surface 222a and the second electrode surface 224a face each other at a first distance d1 in a first direction across the ion beam traveling from the first entrance aperture 202a to the first exit aperture 206a.
  • the first direction is parallel to the slit width direction (p direction) of the first entrance aperture 202a.
  • the third electrode surface 224b and the fourth electrode surface 222b face each other at a second distance d2 in a second direction across the ion beam traveling from the second entrance aperture 202b to the second exit aperture 206b.
  • the second direction is parallel to the slit width direction (p direction) of the second entrance aperture 202b.
  • the fifth electrode surface 222c and the sixth electrode surface 224c face each other at a third distance d3 in the third direction, across the ion beam traveling from the third entrance aperture 202c to the third exit aperture 206c.
  • the third direction is parallel to the slit width direction (direction p) of the third entrance aperture 202c. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 21 , the first direction, second direction, and third direction are parallel to one another. Furthermore, the first distance d1, second distance d2, and third distance d3 are the same.
  • a power supply 112 is connected to the electrode assembly 210.
  • the power supply 112 is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
  • the power supply 112 generates a potential difference between two opposing electrode surfaces.
  • the power supply 112 generates a first potential difference between the first electrode surface 222a and the second electrode surface 224a, a second potential difference between the third electrode surface 224b and the fourth electrode surface 222b, and a third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 222c and the sixth electrode surface 224c.
  • the electrode assembly 210 comprises a first electrode body 226 and a second electrode body 228.
  • the first electrode body 226 has a first electrode surface 222a, a fourth electrode surface 222b, and a fifth electrode surface 222c.
  • the second electrode body 228 has a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, and a sixth electrode surface 224c.
  • a first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 226, and a second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 228.
  • the magnitudes of the first potential difference, the second potential difference, and the third potential difference are the same. However, the direction of the electric field generated between the two opposing electrode surfaces may be different.
  • the direction of the first electric field Ea based on the first potential difference between the first electrode surface 222a and the second electrode surface 224a is the same as the direction of the third electric field Ec based on the third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 222c and the sixth electrode surface 224c, but is opposite (or antiparallel to) the direction of the second electric field Eb based on the second potential difference between the third electrode surface 224b and the fourth electrode surface 222b.
  • a side plate 220 may be provided around the electrode assembly 210 to enclose the first electrode body 226 and the second electrode body 228.
  • the side plate 220 may be configured to extend cylindrically from the front plate 216 toward the rear plate 218.
  • the front plate 216, rear plate 218, and side plate 220 may form a housing that houses the electrode assembly 210.
  • the front plate 216, rear plate 218, and side plate 220 may be grounded and have a ground potential.
  • Figure 22 is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of the current measuring device 214 according to the second embodiment.
  • the current measuring device 214 comprises multiple current measuring devices 214a, 214b, and 214c.
  • the multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c are configured to detect ion beams that have passed through the corresponding exit apertures 206a-206c and measure the beam current values.
  • the positions of the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c are indicated by dashed lines.
  • the current measuring device 214 may include a first current measuring device 214a, a second current measuring device 214b, and a third current measuring device 214c.
  • the first current measuring device 214a detects the ion beam emitted from the first exit aperture 206a and measures the first beam current value.
  • the second current measuring device 214b detects the ion beam emitted from the second exit aperture 206b and measures the second beam current value.
  • the third current measuring device 214c detects the ion beam emitted from the third exit aperture 206c and measures the third beam current value.
  • Each of the multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c can be configured similarly to the current measuring device 114 according to the first embodiment described above.
  • Each of the multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c can include a Faraday cup, an ammeter 236a-236c coupled to the Faraday cup, a suppression electrode having passage openings 242a, 242b, 242c, and a suppression power supply coupled to the suppression electrode.
  • the angle measurement device 200 may further include a measurement control device 244 (see FIG. 21).
  • the measurement control device 244 includes a processor 244a and a memory 244b.
  • the measurement control device 244 may be configured similarly to the measurement control device 144 according to the first embodiment described above.
  • the measurement control device 244 outputs a command value for applying a variable voltage to the electrode assembly 210, thereby varying the potential difference ⁇ V between the two opposing electrode surfaces over time.
  • the measurement control device 244 converts the potential difference ⁇ Vi into an angle ⁇ pi in the p direction, thereby obtaining the beam current value Ii corresponding to the angle ⁇ pi. This makes it possible to obtain angular information in the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction).
  • the current measuring device 214 may be configured with only a single current measuring device instead of multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c.
  • the current measuring device 214 may be configured with a single Faraday cup that detects the total of multiple ion beams emitted from each of the multiple emission apertures 206a-206c.
  • the single Faraday cup is configured to detect the combined ion beam group including the ion beam emitted from the first emission aperture 206a, the ion beam emitted from the second emission aperture 206b, and the ion beam emitted from the third emission aperture 206c.
  • the configuration of the electrode assembly can be simplified by using an electrode body that integrates multiple electrode surfaces to which a common applied voltage is applied.
  • Figure 23 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 210A according to a modified example. Similar to the electrode assembly 210 shown in Figure 21 above, the electrode assembly 210A has a first electrode surface 222a, a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, a fourth electrode surface 222b, a fifth electrode surface 222c, and a sixth electrode surface 224c.
  • the electrode assembly 210A comprises a first electrode body 226A, a second electrode body 228, and a third electrode body 230.
  • the first electrode body 226A has a first electrode surface 222a.
  • the second electrode body 228 has a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, and a sixth electrode surface 224c.
  • the third electrode body 230 has a fourth electrode surface 222b and a fifth electrode surface 222c.
  • the first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 226A and the third electrode body 230.
  • the second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 228.
  • (Third embodiment) 24 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an incident surface 304 of an angle measurement device 300 according to the third embodiment.
  • the angle measurement device 300 according to the third embodiment is configured to be able to measure angle information in the scan direction (y direction) of the scan beam SB and angle information in a direction (x direction) perpendicular to the scan direction of the scan beam SB.
  • the angle measurement device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on differences from the above-mentioned embodiments, and description of commonalities will be omitted as appropriate.
  • Figure 24 shows an incident surface 304 having multiple incident apertures 302a to 302d viewed from the upstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction). Multiple incident apertures 302a, 302b, 302c, and 302d are formed on the incident surface 304.
  • the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c can be configured in the same manner as the multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c in the second embodiment described above.
  • the slit width direction of the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c is the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction).
  • the fourth incident aperture 302d is positioned in measurement range D, where the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c are formed, and is positioned away from the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c in the scanning direction (y direction).
  • the slit width direction of the fourth incident aperture 302d is parallel to the scanning direction (y direction).
  • the opening width w2d in the slit length direction of the fourth incident aperture 302d for example, coincides with the measurement range D.
  • the opening widths w1a, w1b, w1c, and w1d in the slit width direction of the multiple incident apertures 302a, 302b, 302c, and 302d are common to each other.
  • the multiple incident apertures 302a-302d are formed to penetrate a front plate 316 having an incident surface 304.
  • Figure 25 is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of the exit surface 308 of the angle measurement device 300 relating to the third embodiment.
  • Figure 25 shows the entrance surface 204 having multiple exit openings 306a to 306d as viewed from the downstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction). Multiple exit openings 306a to 306d are formed in the exit surface 308.
  • the multiple exit openings 306a to 306d can have the same shape and size as the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d.
  • the multiple exit openings 306a to 306d are positioned so that their positions in the x and y directions perpendicular to the propagation direction of the scan beam SB coincide with the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d.
  • the opening widths w3a, w3b, w3c, and w3d in the slit width direction of the multiple exit openings 306a to 306d may be the same as the opening widths w1a to w1d in the slit width direction of the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d.
  • the opening widths w4a, w4b, and w4c in the slit length direction of the multiple exit openings 306a to 306d may be the same as the opening widths w2a to w2d in the slit length direction of the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d.
  • Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 310 according to the third embodiment.
  • the electrode assembly 310 is disposed between the incident surface 304 and the exit surface 308.
  • the positions of multiple incident openings 302a-302d are indicated by dashed lines.
  • the electrode assembly 310 has a first electrode surface 322a, a second electrode surface 324a, a third electrode surface 324b, a fourth electrode surface 322b, a fifth electrode surface 322c, a sixth electrode surface 324c, a seventh electrode surface 324d, and an eighth electrode surface 322d.
  • the first electrode surface 322a to the sixth electrode surface 324c can be configured similarly to the first electrode surface 222a to the sixth electrode surface 224c shown in FIG. 21 above.
  • the seventh electrode surface 324d and the eighth electrode surface 322d face each other at a fourth distance d4 in the fourth direction across the ion beam traveling from the fourth entrance aperture 302d to the fourth exit aperture 306d.
  • the fourth direction is parallel to the slit width direction (y direction) of the fourth entrance aperture 302d.
  • the fourth direction is oblique to the first, second, and third directions.
  • the fourth distance d4 is the same as the first distance d1, the second distance d2, and the third distance d3.
  • a power supply 112 is connected to the electrode assembly 310.
  • the power supply 112 is configured in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.
  • the power supply 112 generates a potential difference between two opposing electrode surfaces.
  • the power supply 112 generates a first potential difference between the first electrode surface 322a and the second electrode surface 324a, a second potential difference between the third electrode surface 324b and the fourth electrode surface 322b, a third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 322c and the sixth electrode surface 324c, and a fourth potential difference between the seventh electrode surface 324d and the eighth electrode surface 322d.
  • the electrode assembly 310 comprises a first electrode body 326, a second electrode body 328, and a third electrode body 330.
  • the first electrode body 326 has a first electrode surface 322a, a fourth electrode surface 322b, and a fifth electrode surface 322c.
  • the second electrode body 328 has a second electrode surface 324a, a third electrode surface 324b, a sixth electrode surface 324c, and a seventh electrode surface 324d.
  • the third electrode body 330 has an eighth electrode surface 322d.
  • a first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 326 and the third electrode body 330, and a second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 328.
  • the magnitudes of the first potential difference, the second potential difference, the third potential difference, and the fourth potential difference are the same.
  • the direction of the electric field generated between the two opposing electrode surfaces may be different.
  • the direction of the first electric field Ea based on the first potential difference between the first electrode surface 322a and the second electrode surface 324a is the same as the direction of the third electric field Ec based on the third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 322c and the sixth electrode surface 324c, but is opposite (or antiparallel to) the direction of the second electric field Eb based on the second potential difference between the third electrode surface 324b and the fourth electrode surface 322b.
  • the direction of the fourth electric field Ed based on the fourth potential difference between the seventh electrode surface 324d and the eighth electrode surface 322d is oblique to the directions of the first electric field Ea, the second electric field Eb, and the third electric field Ec.
  • a side plate 320 may be provided around the electrode assembly 310 to enclose the first electrode body 326, the second electrode body 328, and the third electrode body 330.
  • the side plate 320 may be configured to extend cylindrically from the front plate 316 toward the rear plate 318.
  • the front plate 316, the rear plate 318, and the side plate 320 may form a housing that houses the electrode assembly 310.
  • the front plate 316, the rear plate 318, and the side plate 320 may be grounded and have a ground potential.
  • Figure 27 is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of the current measuring device 314 according to the third embodiment.
  • the current measuring device 314 comprises multiple current measuring devices 314a, 314b, 314c, and 314d.
  • the multiple current measuring devices 314a to 314d are configured to detect ion beams that have passed through the corresponding exit apertures 306a to 306d and measure the beam current values.
  • the positions of the multiple exit apertures 306a to 306d are indicated by dashed lines.
  • the current measuring device 314 may include a first current measuring device 314a, a second current measuring device 314b, a third current measuring device 314c, and a fourth current measuring device 314d.
  • the first current measuring device 314a detects the ion beam emitted from the first exit aperture 306a and measures the first beam current value.
  • the second current measuring device 314b detects the ion beam emitted from the second exit aperture 306b and measures the second beam current value.
  • the third current measuring device 314c detects the ion beam emitted from the third exit aperture 306c and measures the third beam current value.
  • the fourth current measuring device 314d detects the ion beam emitted from the fourth exit aperture 306d and measures the fourth beam current value.
  • Each of the multiple current measuring devices 314a-314d can be configured similarly to the current measuring device 114 according to the first embodiment described above.
  • Each of the multiple current measuring devices 314a-314d can include a Faraday cup, an ammeter coupled to the Faraday cup, a suppression electrode having passage openings 342a, 342b, 342c, and 342d, and a suppression power supply coupled to the suppression electrode.
  • the angle measurement device 300 may further include a measurement control device 344 (see FIG. 26).
  • the measurement control device 344 includes a processor 344a and a memory 344b.
  • the measurement control device 344 may be configured similarly to the measurement control device 144 according to the first embodiment described above.
  • the measurement control device 344 outputs a command value for applying a variable voltage to the electrode assembly 310, thereby varying the potential difference ⁇ V between the two opposing electrode surfaces over time.
  • the measurement control device 344 acquires the fourth beam current value Ii4 measured for a specific potential difference ⁇ Vi, and calculates the intensity of the angular component in the y direction using the fourth beam current value Ii4.
  • the measurement control device 344 converts the potential difference ⁇ Vi into an angle ⁇ yi to obtain the beam current value Ii4 at the angle ⁇ yi. This makes it possible to obtain angle information in the scan direction (y direction).
  • the measurement control device 344 calculates angle information in the direction perpendicular to the scanning direction (x direction) using angle information in the scanning direction (y direction) and angle information in the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction).
  • a known method for calculating angle information in the direction perpendicular to the scanning direction (x direction), for example, can be used, such as the method described in JP 2019-169407 A.
  • the current measuring device 314 may be a single current measuring device instead of the first to third current measuring devices 314a to 314c.
  • the current measuring device 314 may include a first current measuring device that detects the sum of multiple ion beams extracted from each of the first to third extraction apertures 306a to 306c to measure a first beam current value, and a second current measuring device that detects the ion beam extracted from the fourth extraction aperture 306d to measure a second beam current value.
  • the first current measuring device is configured to detect a group of ion beams that is a combination of all of the ion beams extracted from the first extraction aperture 306a, the second extraction aperture 306b, and the third extraction aperture 306c.
  • Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 310A according to a modified example. Similar to the electrode assembly 310 shown in Figure 26 above, the electrode assembly 310A has a first electrode surface 322a, a second electrode surface 324a, a third electrode surface 324b, a fourth electrode surface 322b, a fifth electrode surface 322c, a sixth electrode surface 324c, a seventh electrode surface 324d, and an eighth electrode surface 322d.
  • the electrode assembly 310A comprises a first electrode body 326A having a first electrode surface 322a, a second electrode body 328A having a second electrode surface 324a and a third electrode surface 324b, a third electrode body 330A having a fourth electrode surface 322b and a fifth electrode surface 322c, a fourth electrode body 332 having a sixth electrode surface 324c, a fifth electrode body 334 having a seventh electrode surface 324d, and a sixth electrode body 336 having an eighth electrode surface 322d.
  • a first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 326A, the third electrode body 330A, and the sixth electrode body 336.
  • a second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 328A, the fourth electrode body 332, and the fifth electrode body 334.
  • the power supplies coupled to the fifth electrode body 334 and the sixth electrode body 336 may be reversed, with the first power supply 130 coupled to the fifth electrode body 334 and the second power supply 132 coupled to the sixth electrode body 336.
  • the electrode assembly 310A further includes a seventh electrode body 338.
  • the seventh electrode body 338 is disposed between the electrode group including the first electrode body 326A, the second electrode body 328A, the third electrode body 330A, and the fourth electrode body 332, and the fifth electrode body 334.
  • the seventh electrode body 338 is grounded and has a ground potential.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the ion extraction device according to the first embodiment.
  • the ion extraction device includes an ion source 20 that generates plasma containing desired ions, and an extraction unit 22 that extracts a group of ions containing the desired ions from the ion source 20 or the arc chamber 20a to generate an ion beam IB.
  • the extraction section 22 provided downstream of the ion source 20 extracts a group of ions from the internal space 20b of the ion source 20 through the front slit 20c to generate an ion beam IB.
  • the opening of the front slit 20c from which a group of ions including the desired ions that make up the ion beam IB is extracted will be referred to as the first opening OP1.
  • the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the opening width of the first opening OP1 in the horizontal direction is larger than the opening width of the first opening OP1 in the vertical direction.
  • the extraction section 22 comprises, from downstream to upstream in the direction of travel of the ion beam IB (from right to left in Figure 29), a reference electrode 22b, a suppression electrode 22a, and a movable conductor 22e.
  • the reference electrode 22b represented as the second extraction electrode 22b in FIG. 1 and other figures, has a second opening OP2 through which the ion beam IB passes, and a reference potential such as ground potential V gnd is applied to it.
  • a reference potential such as ground potential V gnd or reference potential is assumed to be zero (0).
  • the opening width of the second opening OP2 in the horizontal direction is larger than the opening width of the second opening OP2 in the vertical direction.
  • the suppression electrode 22a represented as the first extraction electrode 22a in FIG. 1 and other figures, has a third opening OP3 through which the ion beam IB passes, and is applied with a negative suppression potential Vsup lower than the reference potential Vgnd .
  • the suppression electrode 22a is disposed between a movable conductor 22e (described later) on the upstream side and a reference electrode 22b on the downstream side.
  • a positive extraction potential V ext higher than the reference potential V gnd is applied to the front slit 20 c and/or the arc chamber 20 a of the ion source 20 .
  • the movable conductor 22e is sandwiched between the upstream front slit 20c and the downstream suppression electrode 22a.
  • the movable conductor 22e has a fourth opening OP4 through which the ion beam IB passes. Similar to the front slit 20c, the fourth opening OP4 has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the fourth opening OP4 is larger than the vertical opening width of the fourth opening OP4. It is preferable that the size of the fourth opening OP4 be larger than the size of the first opening OP1.
  • a control potential Vctl which is a positive potential between a positive extraction potential Vext and a zero reference potential Vgnd , is applied to the movable conductor 22e.
  • the control potential Vctl may be realized by an additional potential Vadd connected in series in the opposite direction to the extraction potential Vext .
  • the absolute value of the additional potential Vadd is smaller than the absolute value of the extraction potential Vext , and the control potential Vctl is expressed as " Vext - Vadd "(>0).
  • the movable conductor 22e may be configured to be insulated from specific potentials such as the reference potential Vgnd , the extraction potential Vext , the additional potential Vadd , the suppression potential Vsup , and a constant potential (not shown).
  • the same positive extraction potential V ext as that of the front slit 20 c (ion source 20) may be applied to the movable conductor 22 e by electrically connecting the movable conductor 22 e to the front slit 20 c via a conductor (for example, in FIG. 29 , the additional potential V add is set to zero).
  • the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c, the second opening OP2 of the reference electrode 22b, the third opening OP3 of the suppression electrode 22a, and the fourth opening OP4 of the movable conductor 22e are all similar slits that are long in the x1 direction (in Figure 29, each slit is shown schematically in the y direction, which is the short direction).
  • the ion beam IB extracted from the ion source 20 by this extraction section 22 passes through the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c, the fourth opening OP4 of the movable conductor 22e, the third opening OP3 of the suppression electrode 22a, and the second opening OP2 of the reference electrode 22b, in that order.
  • the two downstream electrodes in the extraction section 22, i.e., the suppression electrode 22a and the reference electrode 22b, may be configured as an integrated electrode unit.
  • the distance between the suppression electrode 22a and the reference electrode 22b in the direction of travel of the ion beam IB (the z1 direction in Figure 29) is constant or unchanging.
  • the center-to-center distance along the direction of travel between the third opening OP3 of the suppression electrode 22a and the second opening OP2 of the reference electrode 22b is constant or unchanging.
  • the entire electrode unit integrally formed by the suppression electrode 22a and the reference electrode 22b may be provided so as to be movable along the traveling direction of the ion beam IB relative to the ion source 20.
  • the distance along the traveling direction between the ion source 20 (strictly, the front slit 20c) and the electrode unit (strictly, the suppression electrode 22a) is expressed as the sum of a first distance Gap 1 and a second distance Gap 2, which will be described later.
  • the first distance Gap 1 in the traveling direction between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e is variable, and by moving the electrode unit along the traveling direction, the second distance Gap 2 in the traveling direction between the movable conductor 22e and the suppression electrode 22a is also variable.
  • the movable conductor 22e (and/or its fourth opening OP4) has a variable first distance Gap1 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB between it and the front slit 20c (and/or its first opening OP1).
  • the movable conductor 22e may be connected to the ion source 20 and/or the front slit 20c by an extension/contraction mechanism 22f that is extendable and contractible along the traveling direction.
  • the first distance Gap1 between the front slit 20c (first opening OP1) and the movable conductor 22e (fourth opening OP4) increases and decreases depending on the extension and contraction of the extension/contraction mechanism 22f .
  • the extension mechanism 22f is preferably made of an insulating material and has insulating properties.
  • a control potential V ctl i.e., V ext ⁇ V add
  • V ext a control potential different from the extraction potential V ext of the ion source 20 (front slit 20c) can be applied to the movable conductor 22e.
  • a diode D connected in series in the same direction as the additional potential V add and a feedback resistor R connected in parallel to the additional potential V add are provided.
  • the extension mechanism 22f may be made of a conductive material and have conductivity. In this case, the same extraction potential V ext as that of the ion source 20 (front slit 20c) is applied to the movable conductor 22e (the additional potential V add , diode D, and feedback resistor R are not provided).
  • the ion extraction device configured as described above can use various parameters to appropriately control how ions constituting the ion beam IB are extracted from the ion source 20.
  • parameters that can be controlled by the ion extraction device include a group of potential parameters such as a reference potential V gnd (typically constant), a suppression potential V sup , an extraction potential V ext , and a control potential V ctl (or an additional potential V add ), and a group of distance parameters such as a first distance Gap 1 between the front slit 20 c and the movable conductor 22 e, a second distance Gap 2 between the movable conductor 22 e and the suppression electrode 22 a, and a distance Gap 2 ′ between the front slit 20 c and the suppression electrode 22 a.
  • V gnd typically constant
  • V sup suppression potential
  • V ext extraction potential
  • V ctl or an additional potential V add
  • each potential parameter such as the reference potential V gnd , the suppression potential V sup , the extraction potential V ext , and the control potential V ctl may be variably or adaptively controlled, but in the following example, each potential parameter is substantially fixed, and mainly two distance parameters Gap 1 and Gap 2 are variably or adaptively controlled.
  • the values of each potential parameter can be set arbitrarily, but for example, the reference potential V gnd is "0 V,” the suppression potential V sup is "-2 kV,” the extraction potential V ext is "+40 kV,” and the control potential V ctl is "+30 kV.”
  • FIG. 31 a comparative example involving variable control of one distance parameter, Gap 2 ′, will be described with reference to FIG. 31 .
  • This comparative example is substantially the same as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 except that it does not include a movable conductor 22e. That is, while the embodiments shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 include four electrodes or conductors 20c, 22e, 22a, and 22b, the comparative example shown in FIG. 31 includes three electrodes 20c, 22a, and 22b. As with the embodiment shown in FIGS.
  • FIG. 31(a) shows the slit-shaped first opening OP1, third opening OP3, and second opening OP2 of each electrode 20c, 22a, and 22b in the short direction (y direction), and the left diagram of Fig. 31(b) shows the slit-shaped first opening OP1, third opening OP3, and second opening OP2 of each electrode 20c, 22a, and 22b in the long direction (x1 direction).
  • the distance Gap 2 ' between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a along the traveling direction of the ion beam IB (z1 direction) is substantially variable.
  • the diagram on the right side of Figure 31(a) shows a two-dimensional plot of the position y in the short direction (y direction) of the ion beam IB and the tilt angle y' with respect to the propagation direction (z1 direction) at the observation position shown in the diagram on the left side (a predetermined z1 direction position between the reference electrode 22b and the defining aperture 24g located at the entrance of the mass analysis magnet device 24a).
  • the diagram on the right side of Figure 31(b) shows a two-dimensional plot of the position x1 in the long direction (x1 direction) of the ion beam IB and the tilt angle x1' with respect to the propagation direction at the observation position shown in the diagram on the left side.Such a two-dimensional distribution of the position (y or x1) and tilt angle (y' or x1') of the ion beam IB is expressed as the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB.
  • the diagram on the right side of Figure 31(a) shows the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB in the y direction (short direction)
  • the diagram on the right side of Figure 31(b) shows the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB in the x1 direction (longitudinal direction).
  • the plots with black circles represent data measured at the observation position, and the plots with white circles represent ideal data.
  • the measured phase space distribution is spread in the y and y′ directions relative to the ideal phase space distribution.
  • the measured phase space distribution is distorted in an S-shape relative to the ideal phase space distribution, which is approximately linear along the x1′ axis (horizontal axis). The undesirable spread of the phase space distribution in FIG. 31( a) and the S-shape distortion of the phase space distribution in FIG.
  • the distance Gap 2 ′ can be reduced by increasing the distance Gap 2 ′ (i.e., by moving the suppression electrode 22 a away from the front slit 20 c).
  • the distance Gap 2 ′ due to the device configuration, and the measured data in FIG. 31 were actually obtained at the maximum distance Gap 2 ′ of the current device.
  • the undesirable phase space distribution as shown in Fig. 31 is likely to occur particularly when the extraction current Iext of the ion beam IB is small.
  • one of the causes of the undesirable phase space distribution is thought to be that the equipotential lines are significantly distorted immediately after the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c in Fig. 31(a), causing the ion beam IB to be in a locally over-focused state.
  • the movable conductor 22e can mitigate the overfocusing and subsequent divergence of the ion beam IB under low-current conditions where the extraction current Iext is small, thereby achieving a desirable phase space distribution as shown by the white circles in FIG. 31 .
  • FIG. 32(a) shows the overfocusing and divergence of the ion beam IB in a comparative example in which the movable conductor 22e is not provided, similar to FIG. 31(a).
  • the extraction current Iext in this figure is relatively low at 1 mA.
  • FIG. 32(b) shows how the movable conductor 22e mitigate the overfocusing and divergence of the ion beam IB when the extraction current Iext is the same at 1 mA.
  • the extension mechanism 22f is made of a conductor (e.g., graphite, tungsten, or molybdenum), so the movable conductor 22e is at the same potential (extraction potential Vext ) as the front slit 20c.
  • a conductor e.g., graphite, tungsten, or molybdenum
  • the ion beam IB also converges downstream of the first opening OP1 in the front slit 20c, but the position is near the fourth opening OP4 in the movable conductor 22e, which is further downstream from the first opening OP1 than in Figure 32(a). Furthermore, the degree of convergence of the ion beam IB is significantly reduced in Figure 32(b) than in Figure 32(a). As a result, in Figure 32(b), an ion beam IB with a desirable phase spatial distribution can be achieved even under low current conditions such as 1 mA. Note that the distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a is substantially the same in Figures 32(a) and 32(b).
  • an ion beam IB with a desirable phase spatial distribution can be achieved without increasing the distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a compared to the comparative example of Figure 32(a) (i.e., without increasing the size of the device).
  • the effect of adjusting the phase space distribution and divergence of the ion beam IB can be achieved.
  • This effect can be optimized by adjusting the distance (Gap 1 ) between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e in accordance with conditions such as the extraction current I ext .
  • an ion beam IB having an optimal phase space distribution and divergence can be achieved by adjusting the control potential V ctl and/or the first distance Gap 1 in accordance with conditions such as the extraction current I ext .
  • a control potential Vctl which is a potential between the extraction potential Vext and the reference potential Vgnd, may be applied to the movable conductor 22e in order to control the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB extracted from the second opening OP2.
  • Fig. 33 shows a state where the extraction current Iext is larger than that shown in Fig. 32(b). Specifically, Fig. 33(a) shows a state where the extraction current Iext is 2 mA, and Fig. 33(b) shows a state where the extraction current Iext is 4 mA. As can be seen from Fig. 32(b) where the extraction current Iext is 1 mA, Fig. 33(a) where the extraction current Iext is 2 mA, and Fig.
  • the phase space distribution and divergence of the ion beam IB can be optimized for a given extraction current Iext by reducing the first distance Gap1 between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e as the extraction current Iext increases.
  • the first distance Gap 1 is zero, and the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e are in close contact with each other, essentially forming one electrode or conductor.
  • the first distance Gap1 between the first opening OP1 and the fourth opening OP4 is controlled so that the ion beam IB has a desired phase space distribution when it is irradiated onto the wafer.
  • Fig. 34 shows a first control example of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 in accordance with the extract current I ext .
  • Fig. 34(a) shows a control mode of the total distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a in accordance with the extract current I ext (as shown in Figs. 29 and 30, strictly speaking, the thickness of the movable conductor 22e must also be taken into consideration, but for convenience, this is expressed as the sum of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 , "Gap 1 + Gap 2 ").
  • Fig. 34(b) shows a control mode of the first distance Gap 1 between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e in accordance with the extract current I ext .
  • the first distance Gap 1 is controlled to increase as the extraction current I ext decreases. Therefore, the first distance Gap 1 is controlled to reach a maximum value G 0 when the extraction current I ext is at its minimum value of "0.” Thereafter, until the extraction current I ext reaches a threshold current I th (described below), the total distance "Gap 1 + Gap 2 " is maintained at a constant value G c . This means that the suppression electrode 22 a is fixed with respect to the front slit 20 c. Until the extraction current I ext increases from "0" to the threshold current I th , the first distance Gap 1 is controlled to gradually decrease, as described above with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 , thereby achieving an optimal ion beam IB.
  • the threshold current Ith is the extract current Iext at which the optimal first distance Gap1 becomes “0” under a constant total distance Gc .
  • the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e are in close contact with each other.
  • the first distance Gap1 cannot be made smaller than "0”
  • the second distance Gap2 is controlled to gradually decrease while the first distance Gap1 is "0”.
  • the first distance Gap 1 is adaptively controlled for the extraction current I ext that is equal to or less than the threshold current I th
  • the second distance Gap 2 is adaptively controlled for the extraction current I ext that is equal to or greater than the threshold current I th . Therefore, an ion beam IB having an appropriate phase space distribution and divergence is realized for a wide range of extraction current I ext .
  • Fig. 35 shows a second control example of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 in accordance with the extract current I ext .
  • Fig. 35(a) shows a control mode of the total distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a in accordance with the extract current I ext (as shown in Figs. 29 and 30, strictly speaking, the thickness of the movable conductor 22e must also be taken into consideration, but for convenience, this is expressed as the sum of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 , "Gap 1 + Gap 2 ").
  • Fig. 35(b) shows a control mode of the first distance Gap 1 between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e in accordance with the extract current I ext .
  • the first distance Gap 1 is controlled in a stepwise or discontinuous manner.
  • the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to a first value G1
  • the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to a second value G2 that is smaller than the first value G1
  • the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to a third value G3 that is smaller than the second value G2 .
  • the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to “0”.
  • the first distance Gap1 is reduced to the second value G2 .
  • the second distance Gap2 is increased to a maximum or local maximum value.
  • the total distance " Gap1 + Gap2 " again reaches the maximum value Gmax .
  • the first distance Gap1 is reduced to the third value G3 .
  • the second distance Gap2 is increased to the maximum value or local maximum value.
  • the total distance " Gap1 + Gap2 " again reaches the maximum value Gmax .
  • the first distance Gap 1 is adaptively controlled in a stepwise manner, and the second distance Gap 2 is adaptively controlled continuously, while for an extraction current I ext equal to or greater than the threshold current I th, the second distance Gap 2 is adaptively controlled continuously. Therefore, an ion beam IB having an appropriate phase space distribution and divergence is realized for a wide range of extraction current I ext .
  • the extraction potential V ext (+40 kV in the previous example) and the suppression potential V sup ( ⁇ 2 kV in the previous example) are set so as to obtain an ion beam IB with a desired energy.
  • various apparatus parameters reflecting the state of the ion source 20 are set so as to obtain a desired extraction current Iext .
  • the apparatus parameters include at least one of the following: the gas species, gas flow rate, vaporizer temperature, arc current Iarc , arc voltage, source magnet current, an effective extraction current which is the total amount of charge carried per unit time by an ion group including desired ions extracted from the ion source 20; and the beam current of the ion beam IB irradiated onto the wafer, all of which are set as parameters of the ion source 20.
  • At least one of the various apparatus parameters set in this way in the second step can be acquired by the ion source state acquisition unit 401.
  • the effective extraction current and the additional potential Vadd which is the potential difference between the extraction potential Vext applied to the ion source 20 and the control potential Vctl applied to the movable conductor 22e can be acquired by the electrical information acquisition unit 402.
  • the additional potential V add (i.e., the control potential V ctl ) is adjusted so as to obtain a desired extraction current I ext under the apparatus parameters set in the second step.
  • the control potential V ctl applied to the movable conductor 22 e may be controlled in accordance with the apparatus parameters acquired by the ion source status acquisition unit 401.
  • the control potential V ctl applied to the movable conductor 22 e may be controlled in accordance with the additional potential V add and the effective extraction current acquired by the electrical information acquisition unit 402.
  • the second distance Gap 2 is adjusted so that the tilt angle x1′ in the phase space distribution in the x1 direction (see FIG. 31(b)) falls within the design range of the beamline A.
  • the relational expression that the extraction current I ext is approximately proportional to m ⁇ 1/2 ⁇ V ext 3/2 ⁇ Gap 2 ⁇ 2 is utilized.
  • the orbital axis of the ion beam IB is adjusted by adjusting the position, attitude, aperture shape, etc. of the suppression electrode 22a, etc. This adjustment changes the center of gravity of the phase space distribution, but does not change its shape.
  • the first distance Gap1 is adjusted.
  • the first distance Gap1 between the first opening OP1 and the fourth opening OP4 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB may be controlled in accordance with the state of the ion source 20 obtainable by the ion source state obtaining unit 401 so that the ion beam IB has a desired phase space distribution when irradiated onto a wafer.
  • the first distance Gap1 between the first opening OP1 and the fourth opening OP4 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB may be controlled in accordance with the additional potential V add and the effective extraction current obtained by the electrical information obtaining unit 402.
  • a desired ion beam IB may be obtained without adjusting the first distance Gap 1.
  • the first distance Gap 1 may be fixed to zero (see FIG. 33(b)), for example, to substantially disable the movable conductor 22e. In this way, whether or not to use the movable conductor 22e may be selected depending on the density of the plasma generated by the ion source 20.
  • the ion extraction system may adaptively control the various parameters described above by utilizing an angle measurement device provided in the beam profiler 46.
  • the angle measurement device constitutes a phase space distribution measurement device that measures the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB downstream of the reference electrode 22 b.
  • At least one of the first distance Gap 1 between the first aperture OP1 and the fourth aperture OP4 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB and the control potential V ctl (i.e., additional potential V add ) applied to the movable conductor 22 e may be controlled according to the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB measured by such a phase space distribution measurement device.
  • the ion extraction device includes an ion source 20 that generates plasma containing desired ions DI, an extraction unit 22 that extracts ions containing the desired ions DI from the ion source 20 or the arc chamber 20a to generate a first ion beam IB1, a mass analysis magnet 24a serving as a first beam deflection device that deflects the first ion beam IB1 by applying a magnetic field or magnetic field, a mass analysis slit 24b (see FIG.
  • first separation opening serving as a first separation opening that passes the desired ions DI contained in the first ion beam IB1 deflected by the mass analysis magnet 24a
  • a potential difference setting unit 403 that sets a potential difference between a first region R1, which is at least a portion of the region between the outlet of the extraction unit 22 and the entrance of the mass analysis magnet 24a, and a second region R2, which is at least a portion of the region between the entrance and exit of the mass analysis magnet 24a.
  • the first ion beam IB1 extracted from the ion source 20 by the extraction unit 22 may include undesired ions OI in addition to desired ions DI.
  • desired ions DI are divalent ions
  • the undesired ions OI are singly charged dimer ions.
  • a divalent ion serving as a desired ion DI is conveniently represented as X 2+ .
  • X represents a unit atom or unit molecule having a mass M
  • “2+” represents the charge of the ion (positive divalent), and indicates that the total charge is 2e, where e is the unit charge.
  • a dimer ion serving as an undesired ion OI is conveniently represented as X 2+ .
  • X 2 represents two unit atoms or unit molecules having a mass M (hence, the total mass is 2M), "+” represents the charge of the ion (positive monovalent), and indicates that the total charge is e, where e is the unit charge.
  • the desired ions DI may be positive or negative monovalent ions, negative divalent ions, or positive or negative trivalent or higher polyvalent ions.
  • the desired ions DI and undesired ions OI have energies of 2 eV ext and eV ext , respectively, due to the extraction potential V ext in the extraction section 22.
  • the Larmor radius of the undesired ion OI is twice the Larmor radius of the desired ion DI, and both ions DI and OI are appropriately separated through the mass analysis magnet device 24a.
  • the potential difference provided by the potential difference setting unit 403 is set to zero for convenience.
  • some of the undesired ions OI may be transformed into modified ions MI by undergoing at least one of decomposition and charge conversion when passing through the first region R1. If the undesired ions OI are dimer ions X2 + , X + with mass M and charge e may be generated as modified ions MI. For example, suppose modified ions MI are generated near the boundary between the first region R1 and the second region R2. In this case, the energy of the undesired ions OI before being decomposed into modified ions MI is eVext , as described above. Because the undesired ions OI are split into modified ions MI and neutral atoms or molecules N, the energy of the modified ions MI is eVext /2.
  • the modified ions MI cannot be separated from the desired ions DI using only the mass analysis magnet device 24a and mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the modified ions MI are not limited to this example, and may be any ions that have a central orbit or Larmor radius substantially equivalent to that of the desired ions DI (i.e., ions that cannot be substantially separated from the desired ions DI using only the mass analysis magnet device 24a and mass analysis slit 24b). It is undesirable to irradiate a wafer in the implantation processing chamber 14 with a second ion beam that contains modified ions MI in this way.
  • a potential difference setting unit 403 is provided.
  • the potential difference set by the potential difference setting unit 403 is set so that the modified ions MI and desired ions DI, which are generated when some of the ions in the first ion beam IB1 passing through the first region R1 (for example, undesired ions OI) undergo at least one of decomposition and charge conversion, have different central orbits in the second region R2, and at least some of the modified ions MI cannot pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a first reference potential Vr1 to the first region R1, and applies a first bias potential Vb1 , which is different from the first reference potential Vr1 , to the second region R2.
  • the first reference potential Vr1 may be equal to the ground potential Vgnd , which serves as a third reference potential applied to the reference electrode 22b, and will be assumed to be zero (0) below for convenience.
  • a fifth opening OP5 through which the first ion beam IB1 passes may be provided at at least one of the entrance and exit of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, and second suppression electrodes 24e (entrance side) and/or 24f (exit side) to which a second suppression potential Vsup2 lower than the potential Vb1 of the second region R2 is applied may be provided.
  • the fifth opening OP5 may have a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction and a short opening width in the vertical direction, similar to the front slit 20c ( FIG. 29 , etc.). Note that the fifth opening OP5 may be provided as a separate member from the second suppression electrodes 24e and/or 24f.
  • the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero first reference potential Vr1 (not shown) to the first region R1 and applies a negative first bias potential Vb1 to the second region R2.
  • the first bias potential Vb1 may be applied to the housing of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, for example.
  • the potential at the front slit 20c provided at the start position of the first region R1 is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., +40 kV).
  • the potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided).
  • the potential at the suppression electrode 22a is the aforementioned suppression potential V sup (e.g., ⁇ 2 kV).
  • V sup e.g., ⁇ 2 kV
  • the potential is locally lowered to a second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24e at the upstream stage.
  • the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the first suppression potential Vsup and the first reference potential Vr1 .
  • a negative first bias potential Vb1 is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet 24a. This first bias potential Vb1 is higher than the second suppression potential Vsup2 and lower than the first reference potential Vr1 .
  • the potential is locally lowered to the second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24f at the downstream stage.
  • the central orbit or Larmor radius of the deformed ions MI in the mass analysis magnet 24a or the second region R2 deviates from the central orbit or Larmor radius of the desired ions DI.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI is deviated outward from the central orbit (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the negative first bias potential Vb1 applied to the second region R2.
  • the deformed ion MI deviated outward in this manner is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.
  • Figure 38 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB.
  • "++" represents the central trajectory of the positively doubly charged desired ion DI
  • "Dimer” represents the central trajectory of the undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion
  • "P1” represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 36 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • P2 represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 36 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • “P3” represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 36 (even later than position P2).
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI varies depending on the generation position P1, P2, or P3.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P2 approaches but does not coincide with the central orbit of the desired ion DI.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P3 moves away from the central orbit of the desired ion DI.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI can be effectively prevented from interfering with the central orbit of the desired ion DI, regardless of the generation position of the deformed ion MI. Therefore, it is preferable that the first bias potential V b1 applied to the second region R2 and/or the mass analysis magnet device 24 a be negative.
  • the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero first reference potential Vr1 (not shown) to the first region R1 and a positive first bias potential Vb1 to the second region R2.
  • the first bias potential Vb1 may be applied to the housing of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, for example.
  • the potential at the front slit 20c is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., +40 kV).
  • the potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided).
  • the potential at the suppression electrode 22a is the aforementioned suppression potential V sup (e.g., ⁇ 2 kV).
  • V r1 the first reference potential
  • the potential is locally lowered to a second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24e at the upstream stage.
  • the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the first suppression potential Vsup and the first reference potential Vr1 .
  • a positive first bias potential Vb1 is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet 24a. This first bias potential Vb1 is higher than the first reference potential Vr1 .
  • the potential is locally lowered to the second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24f at the downstream stage.
  • the central orbit of the modified ion MI is deviated inward from the central orbit (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the first positive bias potential Vb1 applied to the second region R2.
  • the modified ion MI deviated inward in this manner is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.
  • Figure 41 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB.
  • "++" represents the central trajectory of a positively doubly charged desired ion DI
  • "Dimer” represents the central trajectory of an undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion
  • "P1” represents the central trajectory of a modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 39 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • P2 represents the central trajectory of a modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 39 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • “P3” represents the central trajectory of a modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 39 (even later than position P2).
  • the central orbit of the modified ion MI varies depending on the generation positions P1, P2, and P3.
  • the central orbit of the modified ion MI generated at the upstream position P1 is to the left of the central orbit of the desired ion DI
  • the central orbit of the modified ion MI generated at the downstream position P2 is to the right of the central orbit of the desired ion DI.
  • the central orbit of the modified ion MI generated between P1 and P2 (particularly near P2) interferes with the central orbit of the desired ion DI, making them indistinguishable.
  • the central orbit of the modified ion MI may interfere with the central orbit of the desired ion DI depending on the generation position of the ion. Therefore, as described above, it is preferable that the first bias potential V b1 applied to the second region R2 and/or the mass analysis magnet device 24 a is negative.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of an ion extraction device according to the third embodiment. Components similar to those of the second embodiment in FIG. 36 and elsewhere are designated by the same reference numerals, and redundant explanations will be omitted.
  • the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a second reference potential Vr2 to the second region R2 and a second bias potential Vb2, which is different from the second reference potential Vr2 , to the first region R1 .
  • the second reference potential Vr2 may be equal to the ground potential Vgnd , which serves as a third reference potential applied to the reference electrode 22b, and will be assumed to be zero (0) below for convenience.
  • a fifth opening OP5 through which the first ion beam IB1 passes may be provided at the entrance of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, and a second suppression electrode 24e to which a negative second suppression potential Vsup2 lower than the potential Vr2 of the second region R2 is applied may be provided.
  • the fifth opening OP5 may have a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction and a short opening width in the vertical direction, similar to the front slit 20c ( Figure 29, etc.). Note that the fifth opening OP5 may be provided as a separate member from the second suppression electrode 24e.
  • the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero second reference potential Vr2 to the second region R2 (e.g., the housing of the mass analysis magnet device 24a) and applies a positive second bias potential Vb2 to the first region R1.
  • the second bias potential Vb2 may be applied to, for example, the housing 22g that surrounds most of the first region R1.
  • the potential at the front slit 20c is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., +40 kV).
  • the potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided).
  • the potential at the suppression electrode 22a is the aforementioned suppression potential V sup (e.g., ⁇ 2 kV).
  • V sup e.g., ⁇ 2 kV
  • the potential is maintained at a positive second bias potential V b2 by the reference electrode 22b and the housing 22g provided at the start position of the first region R1.
  • the potential is locally reduced to a second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24e.
  • the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the first suppression potential Vsup and the second bias potential Vb2 .
  • a second reference potential Vr2 of zero is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet device 24a.
  • the central trajectory of the deformed ion MI is deviated outward from the central trajectory (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the second positive bias potential Vb2 applied to the first region R1.
  • the deformed ion MI deviated outward is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.
  • Figure 44 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB.
  • "++" represents the central trajectory of the positively doubly charged desired ion DI
  • "Dimer” represents the central trajectory of the undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion
  • "P1” represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 42 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • P2 represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 42 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • “P3” represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 42 (even later than position P2).
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI varies depending on the generation position P1, P2, or P3.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P2 approaches but does not coincide with the central orbit of the desired ion DI.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P3 moves away from the central orbit of the desired ion DI.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI can be effectively prevented from interfering with the central orbit of the desired ion DI, regardless of the generation position of the deformed ion MI. Therefore, it is preferable that the second bias potential V b2 applied to the first region R1 and/or the housing 22g be positive.
  • the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero second reference potential Vr2 to the second region R2 and a negative second bias potential Vb2 to the first region R1.
  • the second bias potential Vb2 may be applied to, for example, a housing 22g that surrounds most of the first region R1.
  • the potential at the front slit 20c is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., "+40 kV").
  • the potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided).
  • the potential at the suppression electrode 22a is equivalent to a second suppression potential V sup2 , which will be described later.
  • the potential is maintained at a negative second bias potential V b2 by the reference electrode 22b, the housing 22g, and the like, which are provided at the start position of the first region R1.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI is deviated inward from the central orbit (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the second negative bias potential Vb2 applied to the first region R1.
  • the deformed ion MI deviated inward in this manner is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.
  • Figure 47 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB.
  • "++" represents the central trajectory of the positively doubly charged desired ion DI
  • "Dimer” represents the central trajectory of the undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion
  • "P1” represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 45 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • P2 represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 45 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a)
  • “P3” represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 45 (even later than position P2).
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI varies depending on the generation positions P1, P2, and P3.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the upstream position P1 is to the left of the central orbit of the desired ion DI
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the downstream position P2 is to the right of the central orbit of the desired ion DI.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated between P1 and P2 (particularly near P2) interferes with the central orbit of the desired ion DI and becomes indistinguishable.
  • the central orbit of the deformed ion MI may interfere with the central orbit of the desired ion DI depending on the generation position. Therefore, as described above, it is preferable that the second bias potential V b2 applied to the first region R1 and/or the housing 22g is positive.
  • the ion extraction device may include a trajectory calculation unit 404 that calculates the central trajectories of the desired ions DI (solid lines) and the modified ions MI (dotted lines) based on the potential difference set by the potential difference setting unit 403.
  • the calculations in the trajectory calculation unit 404 take into account the Larmor radius and the generation positions P1, P2, and P3 of the modified ions MI.
  • the trajectory calculation unit 404 calculates, for example, the difference between the central trajectories of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI in the deflection direction (x direction) by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b (see FIG. 1, etc.) serving as the first separation aperture.
  • the ion extraction device may also include a beam size adjustment unit 405 that adjusts the size or width of the first ion beam IB1 in the direction of deflection by the mass analysis magnet device 24a at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam IB1 at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b, for example, based on the central trajectories of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI calculated by the trajectory calculation unit 404.
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 adjusts the size or width of the first ion beam IB1 so that most of the desired ions DI can pass through the mass analysis slit 24b and most of the modified ions MI cannot pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the ion beam exiting the mass analysis unit 24 by referring to the size or width of the ion beam measured by the first beam current measurement device 406.
  • An example of the first beam current measurement device 406 is the injector Faraday cup 24c described above with reference to Figure 1, etc. This injector Faraday cup 24c may be located downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b as in Figure 1, etc., or may be located downstream of the mass analysis magnet device 24a and upstream of the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • Such a first beam current measuring device 406 measures the size or width of the ion beam in the deflection direction (x direction) by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device.
  • the first beam current measuring device 406 may measure the size or width of the first ion beam in the deflection direction by measuring the beam current of the second ion beam while changing the magnetic field applied by the mass analysis magnet device 24a.
  • the first beam current measuring device 406 may measure the size or width of the first ion beam in the deflection direction by measuring the beam current of the first ion beam while moving in the deflection direction (for example, while the injector Faraday cup 24c serving as the first beam current measuring device 406 is driven by the injector driver 24d).
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the distance (for example, the sum of the first distance Gap1 and the second distance Gap2 in FIG. 29 etc.) between the first opening OP1 in the ion source 20 and the suppression electrode 22a serving as the first suppression electrode in order to adjust the size or width of the ion beam by adjusting the extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of the first opening OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20.
  • the suppression electrode 22a serving as the first suppression electrode has a third opening OP3 through which the first ion beam passes, and a first suppression potential Vsup lower than the third reference potential Vgnd applied to the reference electrode 22b is applied to the suppression electrode 22a.
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the distance between the first opening OP in the ion source 20 and the movable conductor 22e (for example, the first distance Gap 1 in FIG. 29 etc.) in order to adjust the size or width of the ion beam by adjusting the extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of the first opening OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20.
  • the movable conductor 22e has a fourth opening OP4 through which the first ion beam passes, and the distance from the first opening OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20 is variable.
  • the beam size adjusting unit 405 may adjust the control potential V ctl (or the additional potential V add ) applied to the movable conductor 22e in order to adjust the size or width of the ion beam by adjusting the extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of the first aperture OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20.
  • the control potential V ctl higher than the third reference potential V gnd is applied to the movable conductor 22e.
  • the beam size adjusting unit 405 may adjust the second suppression potential V sup2 applied to the second suppression electrodes 24 e and/or 24 f to adjust the size or width of the ion beam.
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement unit 407.
  • An example of the phase space distribution measurement unit 407 is the angle measurement device provided in the beam profiler 46 described above. This phase space distribution measurement unit 407 measures the phase space distribution of the second ion beam downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b, which serves as the first separation aperture.
  • a beam size estimation unit 408 may be provided that estimates the size or width of the first ion beam in the deflection direction (x direction) at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement unit 407. In this case, the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam while referring to the size or width of the first ion beam estimated by the beam size estimation unit 408.
  • the ion extraction device may include an aperture width adjustment unit 409 that adjusts the aperture width of the mass analysis slit 24b, which serves as the first separation aperture, in the deflection direction (x direction) by the mass analysis magnet device 24a, which serves as the first beam deflection device.
  • the aperture width adjustment unit 409 may adjust the aperture width of the mass analysis slit 24b in the deflection direction, for example, in accordance with the difference between the central orbits of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI in the deflection direction calculated by the trajectory calculation unit 404, and the size or width of the ion beam in the deflection direction measured by the first beam current measurement device 406.
  • the aperture width adjustment unit 409 adjusts the aperture width of the mass analysis slit 24b so that the beam around the central orbit of the desired ions DI can pass through the mass analysis slit 24b, and so that the beam around the central orbit of the modified ions MI cannot pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.
  • a second beam deflection device 410 may be provided downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b serving as the first separation aperture, which deflects the second ion beam by applying an electric field or magnetic field.
  • Examples of the second beam deflection device 410 include the aforementioned beam scanning unit 28 ( Figure 2, etc.) and AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b ( Figure 1, etc.).
  • the deflection direction of the second ion beam by the second beam deflection device 410 may intersect the direction of travel of the second ion beam (z direction) and the deflection direction of the first ion beam by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device (x direction), as in the beam scanning unit 28, or may be substantially the same as the deflection direction of the first ion beam by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device (x direction), as in the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b.
  • the second beam deflection device 410 adjusts the electric field or magnetic field applied to the second ion beam, for example, so that the central trajectory of the desired ions DI calculated by the trajectory calculation unit 404 becomes the desired central trajectory (i.e., so that the desired ions DI pass through the desired trajectory).
  • an energy analysis slit 34c Downstream of the second beam deflection device 410 (beam scanning unit 28 and/or AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b), an energy analysis slit 34c (see FIG. 1, etc.) may be provided as a second separation aperture that separates and passes desired ions DI and modified ions MI in accordance with the electric or magnetic field.
  • a second beam current measurement device 411 that measures the beam currents of the desired ions DI and modified ions MI may be provided downstream of the energy analysis slit 34c. Examples of the second beam current measurement device 411 include the tuning cups 38a to 38d described above. The second beam current measurement device 411 may measure the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions DI and modified ions MI.
  • the ion irradiation prohibition unit 412 prohibits irradiation of the wafer with the second ion beam if the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions DI and modified ions MI measured by the second beam current measurement device 411 is outside the allowable range.
  • the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b as the first separation aperture.
  • the beam shaping unit 26 or other electric field application device may adjust the electric field applied to the ion beam.
  • This electric field application device is preferably provided between the mass analysis magnet device 24a as the first beam deflection device and the beam scanning unit 28 and/or AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b as the second beam deflection device 410, so as to apply an electric field that prevents the transport of the modified ions MI.
  • an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions; an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam; an implantation processing chamber for irradiating the wafer with the ion beam; Equipped with The extraction unit is configured as follows, from downstream to upstream in the traveling direction of the ion beam: a reference electrode having a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied; a suppression electrode having a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied; a movable conductor including a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes, the movable conductor having a variable distance from the first opening in the traveling direction; Equipped with Ion implantation equipment.
  • (Aspect 11) 11 The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 10, wherein the apparatus parameters are at least one of a gas species, a gas flow rate, a vaporizer temperature, an arc current, an arc voltage, a source magnet current, which are set as parameters of the ion source, an effective extraction current which is a total amount of charge carried per unit time by the ion group including the desired ions extracted from the ion source, and a beam current of the ion beam irradiated onto the wafer.
  • the apparatus parameters are at least one of a gas species, a gas flow rate, a vaporizer temperature, an arc current, an arc voltage, a source magnet current, which are set as parameters of the ion source, an effective extraction current which is a total amount of charge carried per unit time by the ion group including the desired ions extracted from the ion source, and a beam current of the ion beam irradiated onto the wafer.
  • the ion implantation apparatus further comprising an electrical information acquiring unit that acquires a potential difference between an extraction potential applied to the ion source and a control potential applied to the movable conductor, and an effective extraction current that is the total amount of charge carried per unit time by the group of ions including the desired ions extracted from the ion source.
  • an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions; an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam; Equipped with The extraction unit is configured as follows, from downstream to upstream in the traveling direction of the ion beam: a reference electrode having a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied; a suppression electrode having a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied; a movable conductor including a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes, the movable conductor having a variable distance from the first opening in the traveling direction; Equipped with Ion extraction device.
  • an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions; an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from the ion source to generate a first ion beam; a first beam deflection device that deflects the first ion beam by applying a magnetic field; a first separation aperture for passing the desired ions included in the first ion beam deflected by the first beam deflection device; a potential difference setting unit that sets a potential difference between a first region that is at least a part between the outlet of the extraction unit and the inlet of the first beam deflection device, and a second region that is at least a part between the inlet and the outlet of the first beam deflection device; an implantation processing chamber for irradiating a wafer with a second ion beam containing the desired ions that has passed through the first separation opening; Equipped with the potential difference is set so that modified ions generated by at least one of decomposition and charge conversion of a portion of the ions in the first separation opening; Equipped
  • (Aspect 21) 21 The ion implanter of any one of aspects 18 to 20, further comprising a first beam current measurement device that measures a size of the first ion beam in a direction of deflection by the first beam deflection device.
  • (Aspect 28) 21 The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of aspects 18 to 20, further comprising a beam size adjustment unit that adjusts a size of the first ion beam in a direction of deflection by the first beam deflector at the position of the first separation opening.
  • (Aspect 30) a first beam current measuring device that measures a size of the first ion beam in the deflection direction; the beam size adjustment unit adjusts the size while referring to the size measured by the first beam current measurement device. 29.
  • the extraction unit is configured to: a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied; a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied; Equipped with the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the distance between the first opening in the ion source and the first suppression electrode.
  • a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied
  • a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied
  • Equipped with the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the distance between the first opening in the ion source and the first suppression electrode.
  • the extraction unit is configured to: a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied; a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied; a conductor having a fourth opening through which the first ion beam passes, the conductor having a variable distance from the ion source to a first opening through which the first ion beam is extracted; Equipped with the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the distance between the first opening in the ion source and the conductor. 29.
  • the ion implanter according to aspect 28.
  • the extraction unit is configured to: a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied; a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied; a conductor having a fourth opening through which the first ion beam passes, the conductor having a control potential higher than the third reference potential applied thereto; Equipped with The beam size adjustment unit adjusts the control potential. 29.
  • a second suppression electrode is provided at at least one of an entrance and an exit of the first beam deflection device, the second suppression electrode having a fifth opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a second suppression potential lower than the potential of the second region is applied; the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the second suppression potential.
  • (Aspect 35) 29 The ion implanter of aspect 28, further comprising a second beam deflection device downstream of the first separation aperture, the second beam deflection device being configured to deflect the second ion beam by applying an electric or magnetic field thereto.
  • a second separation opening is provided downstream of the second beam deflection device, which separates the desired ions and the modified ions in accordance with the electric field or the magnetic field and allows them to pass;
  • a second beam current measuring device is provided downstream of the second separation opening to measure the beam currents of the desired ions and the modified ions; 36.
  • the ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 35.
  • the ion implantation apparatus of aspect 38 further comprises an ion irradiation prohibition unit that prohibits irradiation of the second ion beam onto the wafer when the ratio of the beam current of the desired ion and the modified ion measured by the second beam current measuring device is outside an acceptable range.
  • an electric field application device is provided between the first beam deflection device and the second beam deflection device, the electric field application device applying an electric field to hinder the transport of the metamorphic ions;
  • the electric field applying device adjusts the electric field to be applied.
  • (Aspect 43) 43 The ion implantation apparatus of claim 42, further comprising a beam size estimation unit that estimates the size of the first ion beam in the deflection direction at the position of the first separation aperture based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement device.
  • an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions; an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from the ion source to generate a first ion beam; a first beam deflection device that deflects the first ion beam by applying a magnetic field; a first separation aperture for passing the desired ions included in the first ion beam deflected by the first beam deflection device; a potential difference setting unit that sets a potential difference between a first region that is at least a part between the outlet of the extraction unit and the inlet of the first beam deflection device, and a second region that is at least a part between the inlet and the outlet of the first beam deflection device; Equipped with the potential difference is set so that modified ions generated by at least one of decomposition and charge conversion of a portion of the ions in the first ion beam passing through the first region and the desired ions have different central orbits in the second region, and at least some of the modified ions cannot pass through the first separation
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure may take the form of a computer program including one or more computer-readable sequences describing a method of the present disclosure, or may take the form of a non-transitory, tangible recording medium (e.g., non-volatile memory, magnetic tape, magnetic disk, or optical disk) on which such a computer program is stored.
  • a processor may implement a method of the present disclosure by executing such a computer program.
  • This disclosure relates to an ion implantation device and an ion extraction device.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physical Vapour Deposition (AREA)
  • Electron Sources, Ion Sources (AREA)

Abstract

This ion implantation apparatus comprises: an ion source 20 for generating plasma including desired ions; an extraction unit 22 for extracting an ion group including the desired ions via a first opening OP1 in the ion source 20 to generate an ion beam IB; and an injection processing chamber for irradiating a wafer with the ion beam IB. The extraction unit 22 includes: a reference electrode 22b to which a reference potential Vgnd is applied, the reference electrode 22b having a second opening OP2 through which the ion beam IB passes from downstream to upstream in a traveling direction of the ion beam IB; a suppression electrode 22a to which a suppression potential Vsup lower than the reference potential Vgnd is applied, the suppression electrode 22a having a third opening OP3 through which the ion beam IB passes; and a movable conductor 22e having a fourth opening OP4 through which the ion beam IB passes, and having a variable distance from the first opening OP1 in the traveling direction.

Description

イオン注入装置およびイオン引出装置Ion implantation device and ion extraction device

 本開示は、イオン注入装置およびイオン引出装置に関する。 This disclosure relates to an ion implantation device and an ion extraction device.

 半導体デバイス製造工程では、半導体の導電性を変化させる目的、半導体の結晶構造を変化させる目的などのため、半導体ウェハにイオンを注入する工程(イオン注入工程ともいう)が標準的に実施されている。 In the semiconductor device manufacturing process, a standard process is to implant ions into semiconductor wafers (also known as the ion implantation process) in order to change the conductivity or crystalline structure of the semiconductor.

特開2019-169407号公報Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-169407

 半導体ウェハに照射されるイオンビームは、プラズマを生成するイオン源から引き出される。イオンビームを構成するイオン群がイオン源から引き出される態様に応じて、イオンビームとウェハとの相互作用の態様が変化し、イオン注入の処理結果に影響を与える。 The ion beam irradiated onto the semiconductor wafer is extracted from an ion source that generates plasma. Depending on how the ions that make up the ion beam are extracted from the ion source, the manner in which the ion beam interacts with the wafer changes, affecting the results of the ion implantation process.

 本開示のある態様の例示的な目的のひとつは、イオン源からイオン群を適切に引き出すことができる技術を提供することにある。 One exemplary objective of an embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a technique that can appropriately extract a group of ions from an ion source.

 上記課題を解決するために、本発明のある態様のイオン注入装置は、所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、イオン源における第1開口から所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、イオンビームをウェハに照射する注入処理室と、を備える。引出部は、イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、基準電位が印加される基準電極と、イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、基準電位より低いサプレッション電位が印加されるサプレッション電極と、イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、第1開口との進行方向における距離が可変な可動導体と、を備える。 In order to solve the above problems, one embodiment of the ion implantation apparatus of the present invention comprises an ion source that generates plasma containing desired ions, an extraction unit that extracts a group of ions containing the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam, and an implantation processing chamber that irradiates the ion beam onto a wafer. The extraction unit comprises, from downstream to upstream in the direction of ion beam propagation, a reference electrode that has a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied, a suppression electrode that has a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied, and a movable conductor that has a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes and whose distance from the first opening in the direction of propagation is variable.

 本発明の別の態様は、イオン引出装置である。この装置は、所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、イオン源における第1開口から所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、を備える。引出部は、イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、基準電位が印加される基準電極と、イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、基準電位より低いサプレッション電位が印加されるサプレッション電極と、イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、第1開口との進行方向における距離が可変な可動導体と、を備える。 Another aspect of the present invention is an ion extraction device. This device comprises an ion source that generates plasma containing desired ions, and an extraction unit that extracts a group of ions containing the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam. The extraction unit comprises, from downstream to upstream in the direction of ion beam propagation, a reference electrode that has a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied, a suppression electrode that has a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied, and a movable conductor that has a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes and whose distance from the first opening in the direction of propagation is variable.

 なお、以上の構成要素の任意の組み合わせや本開示の構成要素や表現を、方法、装置、システムなどの間で相互に置換したものもまた、本開示の態様として有効である。 In addition, any combination of the above components, or any mutual substitution of the components or expressions of this disclosure between methods, devices, systems, etc., are also valid aspects of this disclosure.

 本開示の限定的ではない例示的な実施の形態によれば、イオン源からイオン群を適切に引き出すことができる技術を提供できる。 A non-limiting exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure provides a technique for appropriately extracting ions from an ion source.

実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置の概略構成を示す上面図である。1 is a top view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to an embodiment; 実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置の概略構成を示す側面図である。1 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to an embodiment. 第1保持装置および第2保持装置の概略構成を示す正面図である。FIG. 2 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of a first holding device and a second holding device. 図4(a)、(b)は、第1保持装置に保持される第1被処理物の水平方向の向きを模式的に示す上面図である。4A and 4B are top views schematically showing the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece held by the first holding device. 図5(a)~(c)は、第1保持装置に保持される第1被処理物の鉛直方向の向きを模式的に示す側面図である。5(a) to 5(c) are side views schematically showing the vertical orientation of the first workpiece held by the first holding device. 第1保持装置および第2保持装置の動作の一例を示す正面図である。10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device. 第1保持装置および第2保持装置の動作の一例を示す正面図である。10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device. 第1保持装置および第2保持装置の動作の一例を示す正面図である。10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device. 第1保持装置および第2保持装置の動作の一例を示す正面図である。10A and 10B are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device and the second holding device. 実施の形態に係るイオン注入方法の流れを示すフローチャートである。3 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to an embodiment. 変形例に係るイオン注入方法の流れを示すフローチャートである。10 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to a modified example. 別の実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置の概略構成を示す上面図である。FIG. 10 is a top view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to another embodiment. 別の実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置の概略構成を示す側面図である。FIG. 10 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus according to another embodiment. ビームプロファイラの可動範囲を模式的に示す正面図である。FIG. 2 is a front view schematically showing the movable range of the beam profiler. 第1の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置の概略構成を示す断面図である。1 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an angle measurement device according to a first embodiment. 図16(a)は、入射開口を有する入射面の概略構成を示す平面図であり、図16(b)は、出射開口を有する出射面の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 16(a) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an entrance surface having an entrance opening, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface having an exit opening. スキャンビームのスキャン電圧波形および角度測定装置における電位差の時間波形の一例を示すグラフである。10 is a graph showing an example of a scan voltage waveform of a scan beam and a time waveform of a potential difference in an angle measurement device. 図18(a)は、角度測定装置にて検出されるビーム電流の時間波形の一例を示すグラフであり、図18(b)は、図18(a)のビーム電流の時間波形を用いて算出したスキャンビームの角度分布の一例を示すグラフである。Figure 18(a) is a graph showing an example of the time waveform of the beam current detected by the angle measurement device, and Figure 18(b) is a graph showing an example of the angular distribution of the scan beam calculated using the time waveform of the beam current in Figure 18(a). 第2の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置の入射面の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an incident surface of an angle measurement device according to a second embodiment. 第2の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置の出射面の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface of an angle measurement device according to a second embodiment. 第2の実施の形態に係る電極アセンブリの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a second embodiment. 第2の実施の形態に係る電流測定器の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a current measuring device according to a second embodiment. 変形例に係る電極アセンブリの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a modified example. 第3の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置の入射面の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an incident surface of an angle measurement device according to a third embodiment. 第3の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置の出射面の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an exit surface of an angle measurement device according to a third embodiment. 第3の実施の形態に係る電極アセンブリの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a third embodiment. 第3の実施の形態に係る電流測定器の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a current measuring device according to a third embodiment. 変形例に係る電極アセンブリの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an electrode assembly according to a modified example. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a first embodiment. 第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. 第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. 第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. 第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. 第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. 第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。1 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置を示す。10 shows an ion extraction device according to a third embodiment.

 以下、図面を参照しながら、本開示に係るイオン注入装置およびイオン注入方法を実施するための形態について詳細に説明する。なお、図面の説明において同一の要素には同一の符号を付し、重複する説明を適宜省略する。また、以下に述べる構成は例示であり、本発明の範囲を何ら限定するものではない。 Below, with reference to the drawings, a detailed description will be given of embodiments for implementing an ion implantation apparatus and an ion implantation method according to the present disclosure. Note that in the description of the drawings, identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted where appropriate. Furthermore, the configurations described below are examples and do not in any way limit the scope of the present invention.

 図1は、実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置10の概略構成を示す上面図である。図2は、実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置10の概略構成を示す側面図である。イオン注入装置10は、被処理物W1、W2の表面にイオン注入処理を施すよう構成される。被処理物W1、W2は、例えば基板であり、例えば半導体ウェハである。説明の便宜のため、本明細書において被処理物を「基板」または「ウェハ」と呼ぶことがあるが、これは注入処理の対象を特定の物体に限定することを意図しない。被処理物は、フラットパネルディスプレイ(FPD)の製造に用いられる大型基板(例えばガラス基板または樹脂基板)であってもよい。 FIG. 1 is a top view showing the schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus 10 according to an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a side view showing the schematic configuration of the ion implantation apparatus 10 according to an embodiment. The ion implantation apparatus 10 is configured to perform ion implantation processing on the surfaces of workpieces W1 and W2. The workpieces W1 and W2 are, for example, substrates, such as semiconductor wafers. For ease of explanation, the workpieces may be referred to as "substrates" or "wafers" in this specification, but this is not intended to limit the target of the implantation processing to a specific object. The workpieces may also be large substrates (e.g., glass substrates or resin substrates) used in the manufacture of flat panel displays (FPDs).

 イオン注入装置10は、イオンビームを所定のスキャン方向に往復走査させ、被処理物W1、W2をスキャン方向と交差する方向に往復運動させることにより、被処理物W1、W2の被処理面全体にわたってスポット状のイオンビームを照射するよう構成される。イオン注入装置10は、ビーム生成装置12と、注入処理室14と、搬送装置16と、制御装置18とを備える。 The ion implantation device 10 is configured to irradiate the entire processing surface of the workpieces W1 and W2 with a spot-shaped ion beam by scanning the ion beam back and forth in a predetermined scanning direction and moving the workpieces W1 and W2 back and forth in a direction intersecting the scanning direction. The ion implantation device 10 includes a beam generation device 12, an implantation processing chamber 14, a transport device 16, and a control device 18.

 ビーム生成装置12は、イオンビームを生成し、イオンビームを注入処理室14へ輸送するよう構成される。注入処理室14は、注入処理の対象となる被処理物W1、W2を収容する。注入処理室14において、ビーム生成装置12から与えられるイオンビームが被処理物W1、W2に照射される。搬送装置16は、注入処理前の被処理物W1、W2を注入処理室14に搬入し、注入処理後の被処理物W1、W2を注入処理室14から搬出するよう構成される。制御装置18は、イオン注入装置10を構成する各種装置の動作全般を制御するよう構成される。イオン注入装置10は、ビーム生成装置12、注入処理室14および搬送装置16に所望の真空環境を提供するための真空排気系(図示せず)を備える。 The beam generator 12 is configured to generate an ion beam and transport the ion beam to the implantation processing chamber 14. The implantation processing chamber 14 contains workpieces W1 and W2 to be implanted. In the implantation processing chamber 14, the ion beam provided by the beam generator 12 is irradiated onto the workpieces W1 and W2. The transport device 16 is configured to transport the workpieces W1 and W2 before implantation processing into the implantation processing chamber 14 and transport the workpieces W1 and W2 after implantation processing out of the implantation processing chamber 14. The control device 18 is configured to control the overall operation of the various devices that make up the ion implantation apparatus 10. The ion implantation apparatus 10 is equipped with a vacuum exhaust system (not shown) for providing the desired vacuum environment for the beam generator 12, implantation processing chamber 14, and transport device 16.

 ビーム生成装置12は、ビームラインAの上流側から順に、イオン源20、引出部22、質量分析部24、ビーム成形部26、ビーム走査部28、ビーム平行化部30、加速減速部32、エネルギー分析部34を備える。ここで、ビームラインAは説明の便宜上使用されるものであり、ビーム走査部28によってイオンビームをスキャンしない場合における設計上の理想的なビーム軌道と同義である。また、ビームラインAの上流とは、イオン源20に近い側のことをいい、ビームラインAの下流とは注入処理室14(またはビームストッパ38)に近い側のことをいう。 The beam generator 12 comprises, in order from the upstream side of beamline A, an ion source 20, an extraction unit 22, a mass analysis unit 24, a beam shaping unit 26, a beam scanning unit 28, a beam collimation unit 30, an acceleration/deceleration unit 32, and an energy analysis unit 34. Here, beamline A is used for convenience of explanation and is synonymous with the ideal beam trajectory designed when the ion beam is not scanned by the beam scanning unit 28. Furthermore, "upstream" of beamline A refers to the side closer to the ion source 20, and "downstream" of beamline A refers to the side closer to the implantation processing chamber 14 (or beam stopper 38).

 ビーム生成装置12は、ビームラインAが途中で屈曲するように構成される。ビームラインAの進行方向は、質量分析部24およびエネルギー分析部34において変化する。ビームラインAは、鉛直方向に直交する水平面内において延びるように構成される。本書では説明の便宜上、ビームラインAに沿って進むイオンビームの進行方向をz方向とし、鉛直方向をy方向とし、y方向およびz方向に直交する方向をx方向とする。特に、イオン源20から質量分析部24までのビームラインAの進行方向をz1方向とし、y方向およびz1方向に直交する方向をx1方向とする。また、質量分析部24からエネルギー分析部34までのビームラインAの進行方向をz2方向とし、y方向とz2方向に直交する方向をx2方向とする。さらに、エネルギー分析部34よりも下流におけるビームラインAの進行方向をz3方向とし、y方向とz3方向に直交する方向をx3方向とする。 The beam generator 12 is configured so that the beamline A bends midway. The direction of travel of the beamline A changes at the mass analysis unit 24 and the energy analysis unit 34. The beamline A is configured to extend in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the vertical direction. For ease of explanation, the direction of travel of the ion beam traveling along the beamline A is referred to as the z direction, the vertical direction as the y direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z directions as the x direction. In particular, the direction of travel of the beamline A from the ion source 20 to the mass analysis unit 24 is referred to as the z1 direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z1 directions as the x1 direction. Furthermore, the direction of travel of the beamline A from the mass analysis unit 24 to the energy analysis unit 34 is referred to as the z2 direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z2 directions as the x2 direction. Furthermore, the direction of travel of the beamline A downstream of the energy analysis unit 34 is referred to as the z3 direction, and the direction perpendicular to the y and z3 directions as the x3 direction.

 イオン源20は、イオンビームを構成するイオンを生成するよう構成される。イオン源20は、アークチャンバ20aを備える。アークチャンバ20aは、プラズマが生成される内部空間20bを有する。アークチャンバ20aは、内部空間20bを区画する略直方体の箱形状を有する。アークチャンバ20aは、内部空間20bにて生成されるプラズマからイオンを引き出すためのフロントスリット20cを有する。フロントスリット20cは、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、フロントスリット20cの水平方向の開口幅は、フロントスリット20cの鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。 The ion source 20 is configured to generate ions that constitute an ion beam. The ion source 20 includes an arc chamber 20a. The arc chamber 20a has an internal space 20b in which plasma is generated. The arc chamber 20a has a roughly rectangular box shape that defines the internal space 20b. The arc chamber 20a has a front slit 20c for extracting ions from the plasma generated in the internal space 20b. The front slit 20c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the front slit 20c is larger than the vertical opening width of the front slit 20c.

 イオン源20は、ソース磁石装置20dを備える。ソース磁石装置20dは、アークチャンバ20aの内部空間20bに水平方向(x1方向)の磁場B1を印加するよう構成される。ソース磁石装置20dは、磁場B1を印加することにより、アークチャンバ20aの内部空間20bで生成されるプラズマの生成効率を高める。ソース磁石装置20dによる磁場B1の印加方向は、フロントスリット20cの長手方向に対応する。 The ion source 20 includes a source magnet device 20d. The source magnet device 20d is configured to apply a horizontal (x1 direction) magnetic field B1 to the internal space 20b of the arc chamber 20a. By applying the magnetic field B1, the source magnet device 20d increases the generation efficiency of plasma generated in the internal space 20b of the arc chamber 20a. The direction in which the source magnet device 20d applies the magnetic field B1 corresponds to the longitudinal direction of the front slit 20c.

 引出部22は、イオン源20の下流に設けられる。引出部22は、イオン源20からイオンを引き出してイオンビームを生成する。引出部22は、アークチャンバ20aの内部空間20bにて生成されるプラズマからイオンを引き出すよう構成される。引出部22は、第1引出電極22aと、第2引出電極22bとを備える。第1引出電極22aは、アークチャンバ20aの下流側に設けられ、第2引出電極22bは、第1引出電極22aの下流側に設けられる。第1引出電極22aには、負のサプレッション電圧が印加される。第2引出電極22bには、グランド電圧が印加される。なお、アークチャンバ20aには、正の引出電圧が印加されている。 The extraction unit 22 is provided downstream of the ion source 20. The extraction unit 22 extracts ions from the ion source 20 to generate an ion beam. The extraction unit 22 is configured to extract ions from plasma generated in the internal space 20b of the arc chamber 20a. The extraction unit 22 includes a first extraction electrode 22a and a second extraction electrode 22b. The first extraction electrode 22a is provided downstream of the arc chamber 20a, and the second extraction electrode 22b is provided downstream of the first extraction electrode 22a. A negative suppression voltage is applied to the first extraction electrode 22a. A ground voltage is applied to the second extraction electrode 22b. A positive extraction voltage is applied to the arc chamber 20a.

 第1引出電極22aは、イオンビームが通過する第1引出開口22cを有する。第1引出開口22cは、フロントスリット20cと同様、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、第1引出開口22cの水平方向の開口幅は、第1引出開口22cの鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。第2引出電極22bは、イオンビームが通過する第2引出開口22dを有する。第2引出開口22dは、フロントスリット20cと同様、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、第2引出開口22dの水平方向の開口幅は、第2引出開口22dの鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。 The first extraction electrode 22a has a first extraction opening 22c through which the ion beam passes. Similar to the front slit 20c, the first extraction opening 22c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the first extraction opening 22c is larger than the vertical opening width of the first extraction opening 22c. The second extraction electrode 22b has a second extraction opening 22d through which the ion beam passes. Similar to the front slit 20c, the second extraction opening 22d has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the second extraction opening 22d is larger than the vertical opening width of the second extraction opening 22d.

 引出部22によって引き出されるイオンビームは、水平方向(x1方向)に拡がったリボン状ビームであってもよい。フロントスリット20c、第1引出開口22cおよび第2引出開口22dの水平方向の開口幅を大きくすることにより、リボン状ビームの水平方向のサイズを大きくすることができる。その結果、イオン源20から引き出されるイオンビームのビーム電流を大きくすることが容易となる。 The ion beam extracted by the extraction unit 22 may be a ribbon-shaped beam that spreads in the horizontal direction (x1 direction). The horizontal size of the ribbon-shaped beam can be increased by increasing the horizontal opening widths of the front slit 20c, first extraction opening 22c, and second extraction opening 22d. As a result, it becomes easier to increase the beam current of the ion beam extracted from the ion source 20.

 質量分析部24は、引出部22の下流に設けられる。質量分析部24は、引出部22によって引き出されたイオンビームから必要なイオン種を質量分析により選択するよう構成される。質量分析部24は、質量分析磁石装置24aと、質量分析スリット24bと、インジェクタファラデーカップ24cとを備える。 The mass analysis unit 24 is located downstream of the extraction unit 22. The mass analysis unit 24 is configured to select the required ion species from the ion beam extracted by the extraction unit 22 through mass analysis. The mass analysis unit 24 includes a mass analysis magnet device 24a, a mass analysis slit 24b, and an injector Faraday cup 24c.

 質量分析磁石装置24aは、イオンビームに磁場B2を印加し、イオンの質量電荷比M=m/q(mは質量、qは電荷)の値に応じて異なる経路でイオンビームを偏向させる。質量分析磁石装置24aは、鉛直方向(-y方向)の磁場B2を印加し、イオンビームを水平方向(x1方向)に偏向させる。質量分析磁石装置24aによる磁場B2の印加強度は、所望の質量電荷比Mを有するイオン種が質量分析スリット24bを通過するように調整される。質量分析スリット24bを通過するイオンビームは、例えば、質量分析磁石装置24aによって90度偏向する。 The mass analysis magnet device 24a applies a magnetic field B2 to the ion beam, deflecting it along different paths depending on the value of the ion's mass-to-charge ratio M = m/q (m is mass, q is charge). The mass analysis magnet device 24a applies a magnetic field B2 in the vertical direction (-y direction) and deflects the ion beam horizontally (x1 direction). The strength of the magnetic field B2 applied by the mass analysis magnet device 24a is adjusted so that ion species with the desired mass-to-charge ratio M pass through the mass analysis slit 24b. The ion beam passing through the mass analysis slit 24b is deflected, for example, by 90 degrees by the mass analysis magnet device 24a.

 質量分析スリット24bは、質量分析磁石装置24aの下流に設けられる。質量分析スリット24bは、水平方向(x2方向)の開口幅が短く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が長いスリット形状を有する。つまり、質量分析スリット24bの鉛直方向の開口幅は、質量分析スリット24bの水平方向の開口幅よりも大きい。 The mass analysis slit 24b is located downstream of the mass analysis magnet device 24a. The mass analysis slit 24b has a slit shape with a short opening width in the horizontal direction (x2 direction) and a long opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the vertical opening width of the mass analysis slit 24b is larger than the horizontal opening width of the mass analysis slit 24b.

 質量分析スリット24bは、質量分解能の調整のために水平方向(x2方向)の開口幅(つまり、スリット幅)が可変となるように構成されてもよい。質量分析スリット24bは、スリット幅方向に移動可能な二枚のビーム遮蔽体により構成され、二枚のビーム遮蔽体の間隔を変化させることによりスリット幅が調整可能となるように構成されてもよい。質量分析スリット24bは、スリット幅の異なる複数のスリットのいずれか一つに切り替えることによりスリット幅が可変となるよう構成されてもよい。 The mass analysis slit 24b may be configured so that the opening width (i.e., slit width) in the horizontal direction (x2 direction) is variable in order to adjust the mass resolution. The mass analysis slit 24b may be configured so that it is made up of two beam shields that are movable in the slit width direction, and the slit width is adjustable by changing the distance between the two beam shields. The mass analysis slit 24b may be configured so that the slit width is variable by switching to one of multiple slits with different slit widths.

 インジェクタファラデーカップ24cは、質量分析スリット24bの下流に設けられる。インジェクタファラデーカップ24cは、質量分析スリット24bを通過する質量分析されたイオンビームのビーム電流を計測する。インジェクタファラデーカップ24cは、質量分析磁石装置24aの磁場強度を変化させながらビーム電流を測定することにより、イオンビームの質量分析スペクトラムを計測できる。計測した質量分析スペクトラムは、質量分析部24の質量分解能の算出に用いることができる。 The injector Faraday cup 24c is located downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b. The injector Faraday cup 24c measures the beam current of the mass-analyzed ion beam that passes through the mass analysis slit 24b. The injector Faraday cup 24c can measure the mass analysis spectrum of the ion beam by measuring the beam current while changing the magnetic field strength of the mass analysis magnet device 24a. The measured mass analysis spectrum can be used to calculate the mass resolution of the mass analysis unit 24.

 インジェクタファラデーカップ24cは、インジェクタ駆動部24dの動作によりビームラインAに出し入れ可能となるよう構成される。インジェクタ駆動部24dは、インジェクタファラデーカップ24cをビームラインAが延びるz2方向と直交する方向(例えばx2方向)に移動させる。インジェクタファラデーカップ24cは、図1の破線で示すようにビームラインAに配置された場合、下流側に向かうイオンビームを遮断する。一方、図1の実線で示すように、インジェクタファラデーカップ24cがビームラインAから退避された場合、下流側に向かうイオンビームの遮断が解除される。 The injector Faraday cup 24c is configured so that it can be inserted into and removed from beamline A by the operation of the injector driver 24d. The injector driver 24d moves the injector Faraday cup 24c in a direction (e.g., the x2 direction) perpendicular to the z2 direction in which beamline A extends. When the injector Faraday cup 24c is positioned in beamline A as shown by the dashed line in Figure 1, it blocks the ion beam traveling downstream. On the other hand, when the injector Faraday cup 24c is retracted from beamline A as shown by the solid line in Figure 1, the blockage of the ion beam traveling downstream is released.

 引出部22と質量分析部24の間には、磁気シールド23が設けられてもよい。磁気シールド23は、イオン源20に印加される磁場B1と質量分析部24に印加される磁場B2の間の磁場干渉を抑制するよう構成される。磁気シールド23は、電磁鋼板などの磁性材料で構成される。磁気シールド23は、引出部22から質量分析部24に向かうイオンビームを通過させる通過開口23aを備える。通過開口23aは、フロントスリット20cと同様、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有してもよい。つまり、通過開口23aの水平方向の開口幅は、通過開口23aの鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きくてもよい。 A magnetic shield 23 may be provided between the extraction section 22 and the mass analysis section 24. The magnetic shield 23 is configured to suppress magnetic field interference between the magnetic field B1 applied to the ion source 20 and the magnetic field B2 applied to the mass analysis section 24. The magnetic shield 23 is made of a magnetic material such as an electromagnetic steel plate. The magnetic shield 23 has a passage opening 23a that allows the ion beam traveling from the extraction section 22 toward the mass analysis section 24 to pass through. Similar to the front slit 20c, the passage opening 23a may have a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the passage opening 23a may be larger than the vertical opening width of the passage opening 23a.

 ビーム成形部26は、質量分析部24の下流に設けられる。ビーム成形部26は、質量分析部24を通過したイオンビームを所望の断面形状および収束発散角に成形するよう構成されている。ビーム成形部26は、イオンビームの断面形状および収束発散角の少なくとも一方を調整するレンズ装置を備える。ビーム成形部26は、例えば、水平方向に拡がったリボン状のイオンビームを集束させ、スポット状のイオンビームに成形するよう構成される。 The beam shaping unit 26 is provided downstream of the mass analysis unit 24. The beam shaping unit 26 is configured to shape the ion beam that has passed through the mass analysis unit 24 into a desired cross-sectional shape and convergence/divergence angle. The beam shaping unit 26 includes a lens device that adjusts at least one of the cross-sectional shape and convergence/divergence angle of the ion beam. The beam shaping unit 26 is configured, for example, to focus a ribbon-shaped ion beam that spreads horizontally and shape it into a spot-shaped ion beam.

 ビーム成形部26は、複数のレンズ装置を備え、例えば、三つのレンズ装置26a、26b、26cを備える。三つのレンズ装置26a~26cは、例えば、電場式の三段四重極レンズ(トリプレットQレンズともいう)として構成される。ビーム成形部26は、複数のレンズ装置を組み合わせて用いることにより、イオンビームの収束または発散を水平方向(x2方向)および鉛直方向(y方向)のそれぞれについて独立に調整できる。ビーム成形部26は、磁場式のレンズ装置を備えてもよい。ビーム成形部26は、電場と磁場の双方を利用してイオンビームを成形するレンズ装置を備えてもよい。 The beam shaping unit 26 includes multiple lens devices, for example, three lens devices 26a, 26b, and 26c. The three lens devices 26a to 26c are configured, for example, as electric field triple quadrupole lenses (also called triplet Q lenses). By using a combination of multiple lens devices, the beam shaping unit 26 can independently adjust the convergence or divergence of the ion beam in each of the horizontal direction (x2 direction) and vertical direction (y direction). The beam shaping unit 26 may also include a magnetic field lens device. The beam shaping unit 26 may also include a lens device that uses both electric and magnetic fields to shape the ion beam.

 ビーム走査部28は、ビーム成形部26の下流に設けられる。ビーム走査部28は、イオンビームを所定のスキャン方向に往復スキャンさせてスキャンビームSBを生成するよう構成される。ビーム走査部28は、ビーム成形部26によって成形されたイオンビームを所定のスキャン方向に偏向させるビーム偏向装置ともいえる。ビーム走査部28は、スキャン方向が水平方向とは異なる方向となるように構成され、例えば、スキャン方向が鉛直方向(y方向)となるように構成される。 The beam scanning unit 28 is provided downstream of the beam shaping unit 26. The beam scanning unit 28 is configured to generate a scan beam SB by scanning the ion beam back and forth in a predetermined scan direction. The beam scanning unit 28 can also be considered a beam deflection device that deflects the ion beam shaped by the beam shaping unit 26 in the predetermined scan direction. The beam scanning unit 28 is configured so that the scan direction is a direction different from the horizontal direction, for example, so that the scan direction is the vertical direction (y direction).

 ビーム走査部28は、鉛直方向(y方向)に対向する走査電極対28a、28bを備える。走査電極対28a、28bは可変電圧電源(図示せず)に接続される。走査電極対28a、28bの間に印加される電圧を周期的に変化させることにより、走査電極対28a、28bの間に生じる電界を変化させてイオンビームをさまざまな角度に偏向させる。その結果、イオンビームが鉛直方向(y方向)の走査範囲全体にわたって走査される。図2において、矢印Yによりイオンビームのスキャン方向及び走査範囲を例示し、走査範囲におけるイオンビームの複数の軌跡を破線で示している。なお、ビーム走査部28は、電場式ではなく、磁場式であってもよい。ビーム走査部28は、イオンビームを偏向させるための磁石装置を備えてもよい。 The beam scanning unit 28 includes a pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b facing each other in the vertical direction (y direction). The pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b are connected to a variable voltage power supply (not shown). By periodically changing the voltage applied between the pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b, the electric field generated between the pair of scanning electrodes 28a, 28b is changed, thereby deflecting the ion beam at various angles. As a result, the ion beam is scanned across the entire scanning range in the vertical direction (y direction). In Figure 2, the arrow Y illustrates the scanning direction and scanning range of the ion beam, and the dashed lines indicate multiple trajectories of the ion beam within the scanning range. Note that the beam scanning unit 28 may be a magnetic field type instead of an electric field type. The beam scanning unit 28 may also be equipped with a magnet device for deflecting the ion beam.

 ビーム平行化部30は、ビーム走査部28の下流に設けられる。ビーム平行化部30は、ビーム走査部28によって往復走査されたイオンビームの進行方向をビームラインAの方向と平行にするよう構成される。ビーム平行化部30は、水平方向(x2方向)の中央部にイオンビームの通過スリットが設けられた円弧形状の複数の平行化レンズ電極30a、30bを有する。平行化レンズ電極30a、30bは、高圧電源(図示せず)に接続されており、電圧印加により生じる電界をイオンビームに作用させて、イオンビームの進行方向を平行化する。なお、ビーム平行化部30は、電場式ではなく、磁場式であってもよい。ビーム平行化部30は、イオンビームを偏向させるための磁石装置を備えてもよい。 The beam collimator 30 is provided downstream of the beam scanning unit 28. The beam collimator 30 is configured to make the direction of travel of the ion beam scanned back and forth by the beam scanning unit 28 parallel to the direction of beamline A. The beam collimator 30 has multiple arc-shaped collimator lens electrodes 30a, 30b, each with an ion beam passage slit located in the center in the horizontal direction (x2 direction). The collimator lens electrodes 30a, 30b are connected to a high-voltage power supply (not shown), and an electric field generated by applying a voltage acts on the ion beam to collimate the direction of travel of the ion beam. Note that the beam collimator 30 may be a magnetic field type instead of an electric field type. The beam collimator 30 may also be equipped with a magnet device for deflecting the ion beam.

 加速減速部32は、ビーム平行化部30の下流に設けられる。加速減速部32は、ビーム平行化部30によって平行化されたスキャンビームを加速または減速させるよう構成される。加速減速部32は、静電式の加減速装置であり、加速減速部32の上流側に印加される第1電位と、加速減速部32の下流側に印加される第2電位との間の電位差を利用してイオンビームを加速または減速させる。 The acceleration/deceleration unit 32 is provided downstream of the beam collimator 30. The acceleration/deceleration unit 32 is configured to accelerate or decelerate the scan beam collimated by the beam collimator 30. The acceleration/deceleration unit 32 is an electrostatic acceleration/deceleration device, and accelerates or decelerates the ion beam by utilizing the potential difference between a first potential applied to the upstream side of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32 and a second potential applied to the downstream side of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32.

 エネルギー分析部34は、加速減速部32の下流に設けられる。エネルギー分析部34は、イオンビームのエネルギーを分析し、所望のエネルギーを有するイオンを注入処理室14に向けて通過させるよう構成される。エネルギー分析部34は、イオンビームを水平方向に偏向させ、その偏向角θによって所望のエネルギーを選択する角度エネルギーフィルタ(AEF)である。偏向角θは、例えば、10度以上20度以下であり、15度程度である。エネルギー分析部34は、AEF電極対34a、34bと、エネルギー分析スリット34cとを備える。 The energy analysis unit 34 is provided downstream of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32. The energy analysis unit 34 is configured to analyze the energy of the ion beam and pass ions having the desired energy toward the implantation processing chamber 14. The energy analysis unit 34 is an angular energy filter (AEF) that deflects the ion beam horizontally and selects the desired energy based on the deflection angle θ. The deflection angle θ is, for example, between 10 degrees and 20 degrees, and is approximately 15 degrees. The energy analysis unit 34 includes an AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b and an energy analysis slit 34c.

 AEF電極対34a、34bは、スキャン方向と直交する方向に対向するように配置される。AEF電極対34a、34bは、水平方向(x2方向またはx3方向)に対向するように配置される。AEF電極対34a、34bは、高圧電源(図示せず)に接続され、イオンビームに電場を作用させて偏向させる。AEF電極対34a、34bは、スキャンビームを水平方向に偏向させる偏向装置である。エネルギー分析スリット34cは、AEF電極対34a、34bの下流側に設けられる。 The AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b are arranged to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the scan direction. The AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b are arranged to face each other in the horizontal direction (x2 direction or x3 direction). The AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b are connected to a high-voltage power supply (not shown) and apply an electric field to the ion beam to deflect it. The AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b is a deflection device that deflects the scan beam in the horizontal direction. The energy analysis slit 34c is provided downstream of the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b.

 エネルギー分析スリット34cは、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が長く、水平方向(x3方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、エネルギー分析スリット34cの鉛直方向の開口幅は、エネルギー分析スリット34cの水平方向の開口幅よりも大きい。エネルギー分析スリット34cは、所望のエネルギー値またはエネルギー範囲のイオンビームを被処理物W1、W2に向けて通過させ、それ以外のイオンビームを遮蔽する。 The energy analysis slit 34c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the vertical direction (y direction) and a short opening width in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). In other words, the vertical opening width of the energy analysis slit 34c is larger than the horizontal opening width of the energy analysis slit 34c. The energy analysis slit 34c allows ion beams of the desired energy value or energy range to pass toward the workpieces W1 and W2, and blocks other ion beams.

 エネルギー分析部34は、電場式ではなく、磁場式であってもよい。エネルギー分析部34は、磁場偏向用の磁石装置を備えてもよい。エネルギー分析部34は、電場と磁場の双方を利用してもよく、電界偏向用のAEF電極対と磁場偏向用の磁石装置とを備えてもよい。 The energy analysis unit 34 may be a magnetic field type instead of an electric field type. The energy analysis unit 34 may be equipped with a magnet device for magnetic field deflection. The energy analysis unit 34 may use both an electric field and a magnetic field, and may be equipped with an AEF electrode pair for electric field deflection and a magnet device for magnetic field deflection.

 このようにして、ビーム生成装置12は、被処理物W1、W2に照射されるべきイオンビームを注入処理室14に供給する。ビーム生成装置12は、ビームライン装置と呼ばれてもよい。ビーム生成装置12は、ビーム生成装置12を構成する各種機器の動作パラメータを調整することにより、所望の注入条件を実現するためのイオンビームを生成するよう構成される。 In this way, the beam generator 12 supplies the ion beam to be irradiated onto the workpieces W1 and W2 to the implantation processing chamber 14. The beam generator 12 may also be called a beamline device. The beam generator 12 is configured to generate an ion beam to achieve the desired implantation conditions by adjusting the operating parameters of the various devices that make up the beam generator 12.

 注入処理室14は、プラズマシャワー装置36と、ビームストッパ38と、第1保持装置40と、第2保持装置42とを備える。 The implantation processing chamber 14 is equipped with a plasma shower device 36, a beam stopper 38, a first holding device 40, and a second holding device 42.

 プラズマシャワー装置36は、エネルギー分析部34の下流に位置する。プラズマシャワー装置36は、イオンビームのビーム電流量に応じてイオンビームおよび被処理物W1、W2の表面(被処理面)に低エネルギー電子を供給し、イオン注入で生じる被処理面における正電荷の蓄積に起因するチャージアップを抑制する。プラズマシャワー装置36は、例えば、イオンビームが通過するシャワーチューブ36aと、シャワーチューブ36a内に電子を供給するプラズマ発生部36bとを備える。シャワーチューブ36aは、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が長く、水平方向(x3方向)の開口幅が短い形状を有する。 The plasma shower device 36 is located downstream of the energy analysis section 34. The plasma shower device 36 supplies low-energy electrons to the ion beam and the surfaces (processed surfaces) of the workpieces W1 and W2 according to the beam current of the ion beam, suppressing charge-up caused by the accumulation of positive charge on the processed surfaces due to ion implantation. The plasma shower device 36 includes, for example, a shower tube 36a through which the ion beam passes, and a plasma generation section 36b that supplies electrons into the shower tube 36a. The shower tube 36a has a shape with a long opening width in the vertical direction (y direction) and a short opening width in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).

 ビームストッパ38は、ビームラインAの最下流に設けられ、例えば、注入処理室14の側壁に取り付けられる。ビームラインAに被処理物W1、W2が存在しない場合、イオンビームはビームストッパ38に入射する。ビームストッパ38には、複数のチューニングカップ38a、38b、38c、38dが設けられる。複数のチューニングカップ38a~38dは、ビームストッパ38に入射するイオンビームのビーム電流を測定するよう構成されるファラデーカップである。複数のチューニングカップ38a~38dは、例えば、鉛直方向(y方向)に間隔をあけて配置される。 Beam stopper 38 is provided at the most downstream position of beam line A and is attached, for example, to the side wall of implantation processing chamber 14. When no workpieces W1, W2 are present in beam line A, the ion beam is incident on beam stopper 38. Beam stopper 38 is provided with multiple tuning cups 38a, 38b, 38c, and 38d. The multiple tuning cups 38a-38d are Faraday cups configured to measure the beam current of the ion beam incident on beam stopper 38. The multiple tuning cups 38a-38d are arranged, for example, at intervals in the vertical direction (y direction).

 第1保持装置40は、注入処理の対象となる第1被処理物W1を保持可能に構成される。第1保持装置40は、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1をスキャンビームを横切る方向に往復移動させるよう構成される。第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1を水平方向(x3方向)に往復移動させるよう構成される。第1保持装置40は、水平方向(x3方向)に延びるガイドレール44に沿って移動可能である。 The first holding device 40 is configured to be able to hold the first workpiece W1 to be subjected to the injection process. The first holding device 40 is configured to move the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 back and forth in a direction crossing the scan beam. The first holding device 40 is configured to move the first workpiece W1 back and forth in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). The first holding device 40 is movable along a guide rail 44 extending in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).

 第1保持装置40は、第1チャック機構50と、第1ツイスト機構52と、第1鉛直角度調整機構54と、第1水平角度調整機構56と、第1往復運動機構58とを備える。 The first holding device 40 includes a first chuck mechanism 50, a first twist mechanism 52, a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54, a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56, and a first reciprocating mechanism 58.

 第1チャック機構50は、第1被処理物W1の裏面と接触して第1被処理物W1を保持するよう構成される。第1チャック機構50は、例えば、第1被処理物W1を保持するための静電チャック等を含む。第1チャック機構50は、第1被処理物W1を冷却または加熱するための温度調整機構を備えてもよい。第1チャック機構50は、第1チャック機構50から第1被処理物W1が離れるように第1被処理物W1を持ち上げるための第1リフト機構を備える。 The first chuck mechanism 50 is configured to contact the back surface of the first workpiece W1 and hold the first workpiece W1. The first chuck mechanism 50 includes, for example, an electrostatic chuck for holding the first workpiece W1. The first chuck mechanism 50 may also include a temperature adjustment mechanism for cooling or heating the first workpiece W1. The first chuck mechanism 50 includes a first lift mechanism for lifting the first workpiece W1 so as to separate it from the first chuck mechanism 50.

 第1ツイスト機構52は、第1チャック機構50を回動可能に支持する。第1ツイスト機構52は、第1チャック機構50に保持される第1被処理物W1の被処理面の法線方向に延びる回転軸(ツイスト軸ともいう)まわりに第1チャック機構50を回転させ、第1被処理物W1のツイスト角φa1を調整する。第1ツイスト機構52は、例えば、第1被処理物W1の外周部に設けられるアライメントマークと基準位置との間のツイスト角φa1を調整する。ここで、第1被処理物W1のアライメントマークとは、例えば、ウェハの外周部に設けられるノッチやオリフラのことをいい、ウェハの結晶軸方向や周方向の角度位置の基準となるマークをいう。 The first twist mechanism 52 rotatably supports the first chuck mechanism 50. The first twist mechanism 52 rotates the first chuck mechanism 50 around a rotation axis (also called the twist axis) extending normal to the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 held by the first chuck mechanism 50, thereby adjusting the twist angle φa1 of the first workpiece W1. The first twist mechanism 52 adjusts the twist angle φa1 between, for example, an alignment mark provided on the outer periphery of the first workpiece W1 and a reference position. Here, the alignment mark of the first workpiece W1 refers to, for example, a notch or orientation flat provided on the outer periphery of the wafer, and is a mark that serves as a reference for the crystal axis direction and angular position in the circumferential direction of the wafer.

 第1鉛直角度調整機構54は、第1ツイスト機構52を回動可能に支持する。第1鉛直角度調整機構54は、水平方向に延びる回転軸(搬送チルト軸ともいう)まわりに第1ツイスト機構52を回転させ、第1被処理物W1の鉛直方向の向きを調整する。第1被処理物W1の鉛直方向の向きは、水平方向の回転軸まわりの鉛直回動角φb1によって定義することができる。 The first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 rotatably supports the first twist mechanism 52. The first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 rotates the first twist mechanism 52 around a horizontally extending rotation axis (also called the transport tilt axis) to adjust the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1. The vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1 can be defined by the vertical rotation angle φb1 around the horizontal rotation axis.

 第1水平角度調整機構56は、第1鉛直角度調整機構54を回動可能に支持する。第1水平角度調整機構56は、鉛直方向に延びる回転軸(注入チルト軸ともいう)まわりに第1鉛直角度調整機構54を回転させ、第1被処理物W1の水平方向の向きを調整する。第1被処理物W1の水平方向の向きは、鉛直方向の回転軸まわりの水平回動角φc1によって定義することができる。 The first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 rotatably supports the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54. The first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 rotates the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 around a rotation axis (also called the injection tilt axis) extending in the vertical direction, adjusting the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1. The horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1 can be defined by the horizontal rotation angle φc1 around the vertical rotation axis.

 第1往復運動機構58は、第1水平角度調整機構56を水平方向(x3方向)に移動させるよう構成される。第1往復運動機構58は、第1水平角度調整機構56をガイドレール44に沿って移動させる。第1往復運動機構58は、例えば、ガイドレール44に沿って水平方向(x3方向)に延びる第1ボールねじ58aを備える。第1往復運動機構58は、第1ボールねじ58aを回転させることにより、第1水平角度調整機構56を水平方向に直線移動させる。 The first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 is configured to move the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). The first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 moves the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 along the guide rail 44. The first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 includes, for example, a first ball screw 58a that extends in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) along the guide rail 44. The first reciprocating motion mechanism 58 moves the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 linearly in the horizontal direction by rotating the first ball screw 58a.

 第2保持装置42は、注入処理の対象となる第2被処理物W2を保持可能に構成される。第2保持装置42は、第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2をスキャンビームを横切る方向に往復移動させるよう構成される。第2保持装置42は、第2被処理物W2を水平方向(x3方向)に往復移動させるよう構成される。第2保持装置42は、水平方向(x3方向)に延びるガイドレール44に沿って移動可能である。 The second holding device 42 is configured to be able to hold the second workpiece W2 to be subjected to the injection process. The second holding device 42 is configured to move the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 back and forth in a direction crossing the scan beam. The second holding device 42 is configured to move the second workpiece W2 back and forth in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). The second holding device 42 is movable along a guide rail 44 extending in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).

 第2保持装置42は、第1保持装置40と同様に構成されることができる。第2保持装置42は、第1保持装置40と同じ方向に移動可能である。第2保持装置42は、第1保持装置40と共通のガイドレール44に沿って移動可能である。なお、第2保持装置42は、第1保持装置40とは異なるガイドレールに沿って移動可能となるよう構成されてもよい。つまり、注入処理室14には、第1保持装置40が移動するための第1ガイドレールと、第2保持装置42が移動するための第2ガイドレールとが設けられてもよい。第2保持装置42は、第1保持装置40と同時に移動可能である。第2保持装置42は、第1保持装置40とは独立して移動可能である。 The second holding device 42 can be configured similarly to the first holding device 40. The second holding device 42 is movable in the same direction as the first holding device 40. The second holding device 42 is movable along a guide rail 44 shared with the first holding device 40. The second holding device 42 may also be configured to be movable along a guide rail different from that of the first holding device 40. In other words, the injection processing chamber 14 may be provided with a first guide rail along which the first holding device 40 moves, and a second guide rail along which the second holding device 42 moves. The second holding device 42 is movable simultaneously with the first holding device 40. The second holding device 42 is movable independently of the first holding device 40.

 第2保持装置42は、第2チャック機構60と、第2ツイスト機構62と、第2鉛直角度調整機構64と、第2水平角度調整機構66と、第2往復運動機構68とを備える。 The second holding device 42 includes a second chuck mechanism 60, a second twist mechanism 62, a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64, a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66, and a second reciprocating mechanism 68.

 第2チャック機構60は、第2被処理物W2の裏面と接触して第2被処理物W2を保持するよう構成される。第2チャック機構60は、例えば、第2被処理物W2を保持するための静電チャック等を含む。第2チャック機構60は、第2被処理物W2を冷却または加熱するための温度調整機構を備えてもよい。第2チャック機構60は、第2チャック機構60から第2被処理物W2が離れるように第2被処理物W2を持ち上げるための第2リフト機構を備える。 The second chuck mechanism 60 is configured to contact the back surface of the second workpiece W2 and hold the second workpiece W2. The second chuck mechanism 60 includes, for example, an electrostatic chuck for holding the second workpiece W2. The second chuck mechanism 60 may also include a temperature adjustment mechanism for cooling or heating the second workpiece W2. The second chuck mechanism 60 includes a second lift mechanism for lifting the second workpiece W2 so as to separate it from the second chuck mechanism 60.

 第2ツイスト機構62は、第2チャック機構60を回動可能に支持する。第2ツイスト機構62は、第2チャック機構60に保持される第2被処理物W2の被処理面の法線方向に延びる回転軸(ツイスト軸ともいう)まわりに第2チャック機構60を回転させ、第2被処理物W2のツイスト角φa2を調整する。第2ツイスト機構62は、例えば、第2被処理物W2の外周部に設けられるアライメントマークと基準位置との間のツイスト角φa2を調整する。 The second twist mechanism 62 rotatably supports the second chuck mechanism 60. The second twist mechanism 62 rotates the second chuck mechanism 60 around a rotation axis (also called the twist axis) extending normal to the processing surface of the second workpiece W2 held by the second chuck mechanism 60, thereby adjusting the twist angle φa2 of the second workpiece W2. The second twist mechanism 62 adjusts, for example, the twist angle φa2 between an alignment mark provided on the outer periphery of the second workpiece W2 and a reference position.

 第2鉛直角度調整機構64は、第2ツイスト機構62を回動可能に支持する。第2鉛直角度調整機構64は、水平方向に延びる回転軸(搬送チルト軸ともいう)まわりに第2ツイスト機構62を回転させ、第2被処理物W2の鉛直方向の向きを調整する。第2被処理物W2の鉛直方向の向きは、水平方向の回転軸まわりの鉛直回動角φb2によって定義することができる。 The second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 rotatably supports the second twist mechanism 62. The second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 rotates the second twist mechanism 62 around a horizontally extending rotation axis (also called the transport tilt axis) to adjust the vertical orientation of the second workpiece W2. The vertical orientation of the second workpiece W2 can be defined by the vertical rotation angle φb2 around the horizontal rotation axis.

 第2水平角度調整機構66は、第2鉛直角度調整機構64を回動可能に支持する。第2水平角度調整機構66は、鉛直方向に延びる回転軸(注入チルト軸ともいう)まわりに第2鉛直角度調整機構64を回転させ、第2被処理物W2の水平方向の向きを調整する。第2被処理物W2の水平方向の向きは、鉛直方向の回転軸まわりの水平回動角φc2によって定義することができる。 The second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 rotatably supports the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64. The second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 rotates the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 around a rotation axis (also called the injection tilt axis) extending in the vertical direction, adjusting the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece W2. The horizontal orientation of the second workpiece W2 can be defined by the horizontal rotation angle φc2 around the vertical rotation axis.

 第2往復運動機構68は、第2水平角度調整機構66を水平方向(x3方向)に移動させるよう構成される。第2往復運動機構68は、第2水平角度調整機構66をガイドレール44に沿って移動させる。第2往復運動機構68は、例えば、ガイドレール44に沿って水平方向(x3方向)に延びる第2ボールねじ68aを備え、第2ボールねじ68aを回転させることにより、第2水平角度調整機構66を水平方向に直線移動させる。 The second reciprocating motion mechanism 68 is configured to move the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). The second reciprocating motion mechanism 68 moves the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 along the guide rail 44. The second reciprocating motion mechanism 68, for example, includes a second ball screw 68a extending in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) along the guide rail 44, and by rotating the second ball screw 68a, the second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 66 is moved linearly in the horizontal direction.

 搬送装置16は、第1搬送装置70と、第2搬送装置72とを備える。第1搬送装置70および第2搬送装置72は、ビームラインAから水平方向(x3方向)に離れて配置される。図1の例において、第1搬送装置70は、ビームラインAから-x3方向に離れて配置され、第2搬送装置72は、ビームラインAから+x3方向に離れて配置される。第1搬送装置70および第2搬送装置72は、例えば、第1搬送装置70と第2搬送装置72の間にビームストッパ38が位置するように配置される。 The transport device 16 comprises a first transport device 70 and a second transport device 72. The first transport device 70 and the second transport device 72 are arranged at a distance from the beamline A in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). In the example of Figure 1, the first transport device 70 is arranged at a distance from the beamline A in the -x3 direction, and the second transport device 72 is arranged at a distance from the beamline A in the +x3 direction. The first transport device 70 and the second transport device 72 are arranged, for example, so that the beam stopper 38 is located between the first transport device 70 and the second transport device 72.

 第1搬送装置70は、注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を注入処理室14に搬入し、注入処理後の第1被処理物W1を注入処理室14から搬出するよう構成される。第1搬送装置70は、第1保持装置40に第1被処理物W1を搬入し、第1保持装置40から第1被処理物W1を搬出する。第1搬送装置70は、例えば、第1被処理物W1を搬送するための第1搬送ロボット(図示せず)を備える。第1搬送装置70は、注入処理室14の側壁に設けられる第1搬送口74を通じて第1被処理物W1を搬送する。 The first transfer device 70 is configured to transfer the first workpiece W1 into the injection treatment chamber 14 before injection treatment and to transfer the first workpiece W1 from the injection treatment chamber 14 after injection treatment. The first transfer device 70 transfers the first workpiece W1 into the first holding device 40 and transfers the first workpiece W1 from the first holding device 40. The first transfer device 70 is equipped with, for example, a first transfer robot (not shown) for transferring the first workpiece W1. The first transfer device 70 transfers the first workpiece W1 through a first transfer port 74 provided in the side wall of the injection treatment chamber 14.

 第2搬送装置72は、注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を注入処理室14に搬入し、注入処理後の第2被処理物W2を注入処理室14から搬出するよう構成される。第2搬送装置72は、第2保持装置42に第2被処理物W2を搬入し、第2保持装置42から第2被処理物W2を搬出する。第2搬送装置72は、例えば、第2被処理物W2を搬送するための第2搬送ロボット(図示せず)を備える。第2搬送装置72は、注入処理室14の側壁に設けられる第2搬送口76を通じて第2被処理物W2を搬送する。 The second transport device 72 is configured to transport the second workpiece W2 into the injection processing chamber 14 before injection processing and to transport the second workpiece W2 from the injection processing chamber 14 after injection processing. The second transport device 72 transports the second workpiece W2 into the second holding device 42 and transports the second workpiece W2 from the second holding device 42. The second transport device 72 is equipped with, for example, a second transport robot (not shown) for transporting the second workpiece W2. The second transport device 72 transports the second workpiece W2 through a second transport port 76 provided in the side wall of the injection processing chamber 14.

 制御装置18は、イオン注入装置10の動作全般を制御する。制御装置18は、ハードウェア的には、コンピュータのCPUやメモリをはじめとする素子や機械装置で実現され、ソフトウェア的にはコンピュータプログラム等によって実現される。制御装置18により提供される各種機能は、ハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの連携によって実現されうる。 The control device 18 controls the overall operation of the ion implantation device 10. In terms of hardware, the control device 18 is realized by elements and mechanical devices such as a computer's CPU and memory, and in terms of software, it is realized by computer programs, etc. The various functions provided by the control device 18 can be realized through the cooperation of hardware and software.

 制御装置18は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)などのプロセッサ18aと、ROM(Read Only Memory)やRAM(Random Access Memory)などのメモリ18bとを備える。制御装置18は、例えば、メモリ18bに格納されたプログラムをプロセッサ18aが実行することにより、プログラムにしたがってイオン注入装置10の動作全般を制御する。プロセッサ18aは、メモリ18bとは異なる任意の記憶装置に記憶されるプログラムを実行してもよいし、読取装置により任意の記録媒体から取得されるプログラムを実行してもよいし、ネットワークを介して取得されるプログラムを実行してもよい。プログラムが格納されるメモリ18bは、DRAM(Dynamic Random Access Memory)などの揮発性メモリであってもよいし、EEPROM(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory)、フラッシュメモリ、磁気抵抗メモリ、抵抗変化型メモリ、強誘電体メモリなどの不揮発性メモリであってもよい。不揮発性メモリ、磁気テープおよび磁気ディスクなどの磁気記録媒体ならびに光学ディスクなどの光学記録媒体は、非一時的(non-transitory)かつ有形(tangible)なコンピュータ読み取り可能(computer readable)である記録媒体(storage medium)の一例である。 The control device 18 includes a processor 18a such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and a memory 18b such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) or RAM (Random Access Memory). The control device 18 controls the overall operation of the ion implantation device 10 in accordance with a program stored in the memory 18b, for example, by the processor 18a executing the program. The processor 18a may execute a program stored in an arbitrary storage device other than the memory 18b, or may execute a program obtained from an arbitrary recording medium by a reading device, or may execute a program obtained via a network. The memory 18b in which the program is stored may be a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), or may be a non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory), flash memory, magnetoresistive memory, resistance change memory, or ferroelectric memory. Non-volatile memory, magnetic recording media such as magnetic tape and magnetic disks, and optical recording media such as optical disks are examples of non-transitory, tangible, computer-readable storage media.

 制御装置18が提供する各種機能は、プロセッサ18aおよびメモリ18bを備える単一の装置によって実現されてもよいし、それぞれがプロセッサ18aおよびメモリ18bを備える複数の装置の連携によって実現されてもよい。 The various functions provided by the control device 18 may be realized by a single device equipped with a processor 18a and memory 18b, or may be realized by the cooperation of multiple devices, each equipped with a processor 18a and memory 18b.

 図3は、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の概略構成を示す正面図であり、注入処理室14におけるビーム進行方向(z3方向)に見たときの構成を示す。図3において、第1保持装置40は第1搬送位置80に配置され、第2保持装置42は第2搬送位置82に配置されている。第1搬送位置80は、第1搬送口74を通じて第1被処理物W1を第1保持装置40に搬入または第1保持装置40から搬出するための位置である。第1搬送位置80は、第1搬送口74の位置に対応する。第2搬送位置82は、第2搬送口76を通じて第2被処理物W2を第2保持装置42に搬入または第2保持装置42から搬出するための位置である。第2搬送位置82は、第2搬送口76の位置に対応する。第1搬送位置80および第2搬送位置82は、被処理物W1、W2にイオンビームを照射するための注入位置84から水平方向(x3方向)に離れている。 Figure 3 is a front view showing the schematic configuration of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42, and shows the configuration when viewed in the beam propagation direction (z3 direction) in the implantation processing chamber 14. In Figure 3, the first holding device 40 is positioned at the first transfer position 80, and the second holding device 42 is positioned at the second transfer position 82. The first transfer position 80 is a position for loading or unloading the first workpiece W1 into or from the first holding device 40 through the first transfer port 74. The first transfer position 80 corresponds to the position of the first transfer port 74. The second transfer position 82 is a position for loading or unloading the second workpiece W2 into or from the second holding device 42 through the second transfer port 76. The second transfer position 82 corresponds to the position of the second transfer port 76. The first transfer position 80 and the second transfer position 82 are separated in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) from the implantation position 84 for irradiating the workpieces W1 and W2 with the ion beam.

 注入位置84は、水平方向(x3方向)において注入処理室14の中央部に位置する。注入位置84は、第1搬送位置80と第2搬送位置82の間に位置する。注入位置84は、注入中央位置84Cと、注入左端位置84Lと、注入右端位置84Rとを含む。図3において、注入中央位置84C、注入左端位置84Lおよび注入右端位置84Rのそれぞれに位置する被処理物WC、WL、WRを二点鎖線で示している。注入中央位置84Cは、ビーム生成装置12によって生成されるスキャンビームSBが照射される位置に対応する。注入左端位置84Lは、注入中央位置84Cから左側(図3の+x3方向)にずれた位置であり、注入左端位置84Lに配置される被処理物WLの被処理面全体がスキャンビームSBと重ならないように設定される。注入右端位置84Rは、注入中央位置84Cから右側(図3の-x3方向)にずれた位置であり、注入右端位置84Rに配置される被処理物WRの被処理面全体がスキャンビームSBと重ならないように設定される。 The injection position 84 is located in the center of the injection processing chamber 14 in the horizontal direction (x3 direction). The injection position 84 is located between the first transport position 80 and the second transport position 82. The injection position 84 includes an injection center position 84C, an injection left end position 84L, and an injection right end position 84R. In Figure 3, the workpieces WC, WL, and WR located at the injection center position 84C, the injection left end position 84L, and the injection right end position 84R are indicated by dashed double-dashed lines. The injection center position 84C corresponds to the position where the scan beam SB generated by the beam generating device 12 is irradiated. The injection left end position 84L is shifted to the left (+x3 direction in Figure 3) from the injection center position 84C and is set so that the entire processing surface of the workpiece WL placed at the injection left end position 84L does not overlap with the scan beam SB. The right end implantation position 84R is a position shifted to the right (in the -x3 direction in Figure 3) from the central implantation position 84C, and is set so that the entire surface to be processed of the workpiece WR placed at the right end implantation position 84R does not overlap with the scan beam SB.

 スキャンビームSBの鉛直方向(y方向)の照射範囲のサイズhは、被処理物W1、W2の被処理面の鉛直方向(y方向)のサイズhよりも大きい。スキャンビームSBの鉛直方向のサイズhは、例えば、被処理物W1、W2の被処理面の鉛直方向のサイズhの1.1倍以上3倍以下であり、好ましくは1.2倍以上2倍以下である。 The size hB of the irradiation range of the scan beam SB in the vertical direction (y direction) is larger than the size hW of the treatment surfaces of the workpieces W1 and W2 in the vertical direction (y direction). The size hB of the scan beam SB in the vertical direction is, for example, 1.1 to 3 times, and preferably 1.2 to 2 times, the size hW of the treatment surfaces of the workpieces W1 and W2 in the vertical direction.

 第1保持装置40は、注入位置84において水平方向(x3方向)に往復運動することにより、第1被処理物W1の被処理面の全体にスキャンビームSBを照射させる。第1保持装置40は、注入左端位置84Lから注入右端位置84Rまでの移動範囲Cにおいて往復運動することにより、第1被処理物W1の被処理面の全体にスキャンビームSBを照射させる。第1保持装置40は、第1搬送位置80に移動することにより、第1被処理物W1を搬入可能または搬出可能にする。第1保持装置40は、注入位置84と第1搬送位置80の間で移動可能である。第1保持装置40は、第1搬送位置80から注入左端位置84Lまでの第1可動範囲E1にわたって移動可能である。第1保持装置40は、第2搬送位置82には移動不可である。 The first holding device 40 reciprocates in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) at the injection position 84, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the first workpiece W1 with the scan beam SB. The first holding device 40 reciprocates within a movement range C from the injection left end position 84L to the injection right end position 84R, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the first workpiece W1 with the scan beam SB. The first holding device 40 moves to the first transport position 80, making it possible to load or unload the first workpiece W1. The first holding device 40 is movable between the injection position 84 and the first transport position 80. The first holding device 40 is movable over a first movable range E1 from the first transport position 80 to the injection left end position 84L. The first holding device 40 cannot move to the second transport position 82.

 第2保持装置42は、注入位置84において水平方向(x3方向)に往復運動することにより、第2被処理物W2の被処理面の全体にスキャンビームSBを照射させる。第2保持装置42は、注入左端位置84Lから注入右端位置84Rまでの移動範囲Cにおいて往復運動することにより、第2被処理物W2の被処理面の全体にスキャンビームSBを照射させる。第2保持装置42は、第2搬送位置82に移動することにより、第2被処理物W2を搬入可能または搬出可能にする。第2保持装置42は、注入位置84と第2搬送位置82の間で移動可能である。第2保持装置42は、第2搬送位置82から注入右端位置84Rまでの第2可動範囲E2にわたって移動可能である。第2保持装置42は、第1搬送位置80には移動不可である。 The second holding device 42 reciprocates in the horizontal direction (x3 direction) at the injection position 84, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the second workpiece W2 with the scan beam SB. The second holding device 42 reciprocates within a movement range C from the injection left end position 84L to the injection right end position 84R, thereby irradiating the entire processing surface of the second workpiece W2 with the scan beam SB. The second holding device 42 moves to the second transport position 82, making it possible to load or unload the second workpiece W2. The second holding device 42 is movable between the injection position 84 and the second transport position 82. The second holding device 42 is movable over a second movable range E2 from the second transport position 82 to the injection right end position 84R. The second holding device 42 cannot move to the first transport position 80.

 第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1にイオンビームを照射するための第1注入位置は、第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2にイオンビームを照射するための第2注入位置と共通である。つまり、第1注入位置および第2注入位置は、共通の注入位置84に一致する。また、第1注入位置にて第1保持装置40が第1被処理物W1を往復移動させる第1移動範囲は、第2注入位置にて第2保持装置42が第2被処理物W2を往復移動させる第2移動範囲と共通である。つまり、第1移動範囲および第2移動範囲は、共通の移動範囲Cに一致する。第1移動範囲および第2移動範囲は、ビーム進行方向に見て重なっている。第1注入位置にて第1保持装置40によって保持される第1被処理物W1の鉛直方向の位置は、第2注入位置にて第2保持装置42によって保持される第2被処理物W2の鉛直方向の位置と共通である。第1注入位置にて第1保持装置40によって保持される第1被処理物W1のビーム進行方向の位置は、第2注入位置にて第2保持装置42によって保持される第2被処理物W2のビーム進行方向の位置と共通である。したがって、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42は、第1被処理物W1および第2被処理物W2をスキャンビームSBに対して同じように往復移動できるよう構成される。したがって、第1被処理物W1および第2被処理物W2は、共通する注入環境においてスキャンビームSBが照射される。 The first implantation position for irradiating the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 with an ion beam is common to the second implantation position for irradiating the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 with an ion beam. That is, the first implantation position and the second implantation position coincide with the common implantation position 84. Furthermore, the first movement range in which the first holding device 40 reciprocates the first workpiece W1 at the first implantation position is common to the second movement range in which the second holding device 42 reciprocates the second workpiece W2 at the second implantation position. That is, the first movement range and the second movement range coincide with the common movement range C. The first movement range and the second movement range overlap when viewed in the direction of beam propagation. The vertical position of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 at the first implantation position is common to the vertical position of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 at the second implantation position. The position in the beam propagation direction of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 at the first implantation position is the same as the position in the beam propagation direction of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42 at the second implantation position. Therefore, the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 are configured to allow the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 to move back and forth in the same manner relative to the scan beam SB. Therefore, the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 are irradiated with the scan beam SB in a common implantation environment.

 図4(a)、(b)は、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1の水平方向の向きを模式的に示す上面図である。図4(a)、(b)は、第1水平角度調整機構56による第1被処理物W1の水平方向の向きの変化を示す。なお、第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2の水平方向の向きについても同様である。 Figures 4(a) and (b) are top views schematically showing the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40. Figures 4(a) and (b) show the change in the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece W1 caused by the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56. The same applies to the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.

 図4(a)、(b)は、第1被処理物W1にスキャンビームSBが照射される注入工程における第1被処理物W1の向きを示す。図4(a)は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面がスキャンビームSBの進行方向(z3方向)と直交する場合を示す。図4(b)は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面がスキャンビームSBの進行方向(z3方向)と斜めに交差する場合を示す。図4(b)において、第1被処理物W1の被処理面は、スキャンビームSBの進行方向(z3方向)に対して水平チルト角α1を有する。水平チルト角α1は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面の法線に対するスキャンビームSBの入射方向の水平方向における傾きを示す。第1保持装置40は、第1水平角度調整機構56を駆動して水平回動角φc1を調整することにより、第1被処理物W1の水平チルト角α1を調整できる。第1保持装置40は、イオン注入時において、例えば±30度の範囲内、または±60度の範囲内で水平チルト角α1を調整できるよう構成される。 Figures 4(a) and (b) show the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the implantation process in which the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the first workpiece W1. Figure 4(a) shows the case where the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is perpendicular to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z3 direction). Figure 4(b) shows the case where the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 intersects the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z3 direction) obliquely. In Figure 4(b), the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 has a horizontal tilt angle α1 with respect to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z3 direction). The horizontal tilt angle α1 indicates the horizontal inclination of the incident direction of the scan beam SB with respect to the normal to the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1. The first holding device 40 can adjust the horizontal tilt angle α1 of the first workpiece W1 by driving the first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism 56 to adjust the horizontal rotation angle φc1. The first holding device 40 is configured to be able to adjust the horizontal tilt angle α1 within a range of, for example, ±30 degrees or ±60 degrees during ion implantation.

 図5(a)~(c)は、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1の鉛直方向の向きを模式的に示す側面図である。図5(a)~(c)は、第1鉛直角度調整機構54による第1被処理物W1の鉛直方向の向きの変化を示す。なお、第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2の鉛直方向の向きについても同様である。 Figures 5(a) to 5(c) are side views that schematically show the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40. Figures 5(a) to 5(c) show changes in the vertical orientation of the first workpiece W1 caused by the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54. The same applies to the vertical orientation of the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42.

 図5(a)は、第1被処理物W1にスキャンビームSBが照射される注入工程における第1被処理物W1の向きの一例を示す。図5(a)において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面がスキャンビームSBの進行方向(z3方向)と直交する向きとなるように第1被処理物W1を保持する。つまり、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が水平方向に沿わない向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。図5(a)の例において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が鉛直方向に沿う向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。 Figure 5(a) shows an example of the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the injection process in which the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the first workpiece W1. In Figure 5(a), the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is oriented perpendicular to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (direction z3). In other words, the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is oriented not along the horizontal direction. In the example of Figure 5(a), the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is oriented along the vertical direction.

 図5(b)は、第1被処理物W1にスキャンビームSBが照射される注入工程における第1被処理物W1の向きの別の例を示す。図5(b)において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が鉛直方向に対して傾斜する向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。図5(b)において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が水平方向に沿わない向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。図5(b)において、第1被処理物W1の被処理面は、スキャンビームSBの進行方向(z3方向)に対して鉛直チルト角β1を有する。鉛直チルト角β1は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面の法線に対するスキャンビームSBの入射方向の鉛直方向における傾きを示す。第1保持装置40は、第1鉛直角度調整機構54を駆動して鉛直回動角φb1を調整することにより、鉛直チルト角β1を調整できる。第1保持装置40は、イオン注入時において、例えば±30度の範囲内、または±60度の範囲内で鉛直チルト角β1を調整できるように構成される。 Figure 5(b) shows another example of the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the injection process in which the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the first workpiece W1. In Figure 5(b), the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is inclined relative to the vertical direction. In Figure 5(b), the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 is not aligned with the horizontal direction. In Figure 5(b), the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1 has a vertical tilt angle β1 with respect to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (direction z3). The vertical tilt angle β1 indicates the vertical inclination of the incident direction of the scan beam SB with respect to the normal to the surface to be processed of the first workpiece W1. The first holding device 40 can adjust the vertical tilt angle β1 by driving the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 to adjust the vertical rotation angle φb1. The first holding device 40 is configured to be able to adjust the vertical tilt angle β1 within a range of ±30 degrees or ±60 degrees, for example, during ion implantation.

 図5(c)は、第1被処理物W1を第1保持装置40に搬入または第1保持装置40から搬出する搬送工程における第1被処理物W1の向きを示す。図5(c)において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が水平方向に沿う向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。図5(c)において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1が第1チャック機構50から離れるように、第1リフト機構50aを用いて第1被処理物W1を持ち上げる。これにより、第1被処理物W1を搬入または搬出するための第1搬送ロボットのアームが第1チャック機構50と第1被処理物W1の間の隙間50bに挿入できるようにする。なお、第1搬送ロボットのアームが第1チャック機構50と第1被処理物W1の間の隙間50bに挿入されることは必須ではない。第1搬送ロボットのアームは、第1被処理物W1の裏面ではなく、第1被処理物W1の外周部を支持するように構成されてもよい。この場合、隙間50bはごく僅かであってもよい。 Figure 5(c) shows the orientation of the first workpiece W1 during the transport process in which the first workpiece W1 is loaded into or unloaded from the first holding device 40. In Figure 5(c), the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 with the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 oriented horizontally. In Figure 5(c), the first holding device 40 lifts the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a so that the first workpiece W1 moves away from the first chuck mechanism 50. This allows the arm of the first transport robot for loading or unloading the first workpiece W1 to be inserted into the gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1. Note that it is not necessary for the arm of the first transport robot to be inserted into the gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1. The arm of the first transport robot may be configured to support the outer periphery of the first workpiece W1 rather than the back surface of the first workpiece W1. In this case, the gap 50b may be very small.

 図6~図9は、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の動作の一例を示す正面図である。図6は、第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程が実施されている状況を示す。図6において、第1保持装置40は、注入位置84に配置され、第2保持装置42は、第2搬送位置82に配置されている。第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1への注入処理のために、注入位置84において矢印Xで示されるように水平方向に往復運動する。第2保持装置42は、第2搬送口76を通じて注入処理後の第2被処理物W2を搬出するために、第2搬送位置82において第2リフト機構60aを用いて第2被処理物W2をリフトアップする。第2保持装置42は、第2搬送口76を通じて注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を搬入するために、第2搬送位置82において第2リフト機構60aを用いて第2被処理物W2を受け取る。 FIGS. 6 to 9 are front views showing an example of the operation of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42. FIG. 6 shows a situation in which the first injection process is being performed on the first workpiece W1. In FIG. 6, the first holding device 40 is positioned at the injection position 84, and the second holding device 42 is positioned at the second transfer position 82. The first holding device 40 reciprocates horizontally at the injection position 84 as indicated by the arrow X to perform the injection process on the first workpiece W1. The second holding device 42 lifts up the second workpiece W2 using the second lift mechanism 60a at the second transfer position 82 in order to transport the second workpiece W2 after the injection process through the second transfer port 76. The second holding device 42 receives the second workpiece W2 using the second lift mechanism 60a at the second transfer position 82 in order to transport the second workpiece W2 before the injection process through the second transfer port 76.

 図6において、第1保持装置40は、第1被処理物W1の被処理面にスキャンビームSBが照射される向きとなるように第1被処理物W1を保持する。第1保持装置40は、例えば、図4(a)に示されるように、水平チルト角α1が0となる向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。第1保持装置40は、例えば、図5(a)に示されるように、鉛直チルト角β1が0となる向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。第1保持装置40は、図4(b)に示されるように、水平チルト角α1が0ではない向きで第1被処理物W1を保持してもよい。第1保持装置40は、図5(b)に示されるように、鉛直チルト角β1が0ではない向きで第1被処理物W1を保持してもよい。第1保持装置40は、水平チルト角α1および鉛直チルト角β1のいずれも0ではない向きで第1被処理物W1を保持してもよい。 6, the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the processing surface of the first workpiece W1. The first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle α1 is 0, as shown in FIG. 4(a), for example. The first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle β1 is 0, as shown in FIG. 5(a), for example. The first holding device 40 may hold the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle α1 is not 0, as shown in FIG. 4(b). The first holding device 40 may hold the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle β1 is not 0, as shown in FIG. 5(b). The first holding device 40 may hold the first workpiece W1 in an orientation where both the horizontal tilt angle α1 and the vertical tilt angle β1 are not 0.

 図6において、第2保持装置42は、第2搬送口76を通じた第2被処理物W2の搬入または搬出が可能となる向きとなるように第2被処理物W2を保持する。第2保持装置42は、図5(c)と同様に、第2被処理物W2の被処理面が水平方向に沿う向きで第2被処理物W2を保持する。第2保持装置42は、第2リフト機構60aを用いて第2被処理物W2をリフトアップし、第2チャック機構60と第2被処理物W2の間に隙間60bを形成する。第2搬送装置72は、第2チャック機構60と第2被処理物W2の間の隙間60bに第2搬送ロボットのアームを挿入することにより、注入処理後の第2被処理物W2を搬出する。第2保持装置42は、第2搬送ロボットのアームによって第2リフト機構60aに注入処理前の第2被処理物W2が載置された場合、第2被処理物W2のリフトアップを解除し、第2チャック機構60に第2被処理物W2を保持する。第2保持装置42は、注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を保持した後、第2鉛直角度調整機構64を駆動して鉛直回動角φb2を変化させ、第2被処理物W2の被処理面が水平方向に沿わない向きで第2被処理物W2を保持する。 In Figure 6, the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 in an orientation that allows the second workpiece W2 to be loaded or unloaded through the second transport port 76. As in Figure 5 (c), the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 with the processing surface of the second workpiece W2 oriented horizontally. The second holding device 42 lifts up the second workpiece W2 using the second lift mechanism 60a, forming a gap 60b between the second chuck mechanism 60 and the second workpiece W2. The second transport device 72 loads the second workpiece W2 after the injection process by inserting the arm of the second transport robot into the gap 60b between the second chuck mechanism 60 and the second workpiece W2. When the second workpiece W2 before injection processing is placed on the second lift mechanism 60a by the arm of the second transport robot, the second holding device 42 releases the lift-up of the second workpiece W2 and holds the second workpiece W2 in the second chuck mechanism 60. After holding the second workpiece W2 before injection processing, the second holding device 42 drives the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism 64 to change the vertical rotation angle φb2 and hold the second workpiece W2 with the processing surface of the second workpiece W2 oriented not along the horizontal direction.

 図7は、第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程から第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程に切り替える状況を示す。つまり、第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程が終了し、第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程が開始する状況を示す。図7において、第1保持装置40は、矢印F1で示されるように注入位置84から第1搬送位置80に向けて移動し、第2保持装置42は、矢印F2で示されるように、第2搬送位置82から注入位置84に向けて移動している。図7に示されるように、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42を同時に同じ方向に移動させることにより、第1注入工程から第2注入工程への切り替えにかかる時間を短縮できる。 Figure 7 shows the situation when switching from the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 to the second injection process into the second workpiece W2. That is, it shows the situation when the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 ends and the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 begins. In Figure 7, the first holding device 40 moves from the injection position 84 toward the first transfer position 80 as indicated by arrow F1, and the second holding device 42 moves from the second transfer position 82 toward the injection position 84 as indicated by arrow F2. As shown in Figure 7, by moving the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 simultaneously in the same direction, the time required to switch from the first injection process to the second injection process can be shortened.

 図7において、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1と第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2の間の相対距離dが維持されるように第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42を移動させることができる。例えば、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の移動速度を同じとすることにより相対距離dを一定に維持できる。なお、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の移動速度を調整することにより、相対距離dが所定の上限値から下限値までの範囲内に維持されるように第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42を移動させてもよい。この場合、第1保持装置40の移動速度を第2保持装置42の移動速度より速くしてもよいし、遅くしてもよい。被処理物に対して水平方向に均一なドーズ分布とするイオン注入の場合、相対距離dはできるだけ小さいことが好ましい。被処理物に対して水平方向に不均一なドーズ分布とするイオン注入の場合、相対距離dは、スキャンビームSBの水平方向(x3方向)のサイズより大きいことが好ましい。 7, the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can be moved so as to maintain the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 and the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42. For example, the relative distance d can be maintained constant by making the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 the same. The movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can also be adjusted to move the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 so that the relative distance d is maintained within a range from a predetermined upper limit to a predetermined lower limit. In this case, the movement speed of the first holding device 40 may be faster or slower than the movement speed of the second holding device 42. For ion implantation that achieves a uniform dose distribution in the horizontal direction for the workpiece, it is preferable that the relative distance d be as small as possible. For ion implantation that achieves a non-uniform dose distribution in the horizontal direction for the workpiece, it is preferable that the relative distance d be larger than the size of the scan beam SB in the horizontal direction (x3 direction).

 図7において、注入工程が終了する第1被処理物W1を保持する第1保持装置40の移動速度は、第1保持装置40が取り得る最大速度であってもよい。第1保持装置40を最大速度で移動させることにより、第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程の完了から第1被処理物W1の搬出までにかかる時間を短縮でき、生産性を向上できる。一方、注入工程が開始する第2被処理物W2を保持する第2保持装置42の移動速度は、第2被処理物W2の注入条件に応じて定められてもよい。第2保持装置42を注入条件に応じた移動速度で移動させることにより、第2被処理物W2が注入位置84に移動した後にそのままの移動速度で第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程を開始できる。これにより、第2注入工程の開始を早めることができ、生産性を向上できる。 In FIG. 7, the movement speed of the first holding device 40 holding the first workpiece W1 at the end of the injection process may be the maximum speed possible for the first holding device 40. By moving the first holding device 40 at the maximum speed, the time required from the completion of the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 to the removal of the first workpiece W1 can be shortened, improving productivity. On the other hand, the movement speed of the second holding device 42 holding the second workpiece W2 at the start of the injection process may be determined according to the injection conditions for the second workpiece W2. By moving the second holding device 42 at a movement speed according to the injection conditions, the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 can be started at the same movement speed after the second workpiece W2 has moved to the injection position 84. This allows the second injection process to be started earlier, improving productivity.

 図8は、第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程が実施されている状況を示す。図8において、第2保持装置42は、注入位置84に配置され、第1保持装置40は、第1搬送位置80に配置されている。第2保持装置42は、第2被処理物W2への注入処理のために、注入位置84において矢印Xで示されるように水平方向に往復運動する。第1保持装置40は、第1搬送口74を通じて注入処理後の第1被処理物W1を搬出するために、第1搬送位置80において第1リフト機構50aを用いて第1被処理物W1をリフトアップする。第1保持装置40は、第1搬送口74を通じて注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を搬入するために、第1搬送位置80において第1リフト機構50aを用いて第1被処理物W1を受け取る。 Figure 8 shows the situation when the second injection process is being performed on the second workpiece W2. In Figure 8, the second holding device 42 is positioned at the injection position 84, and the first holding device 40 is positioned at the first transfer position 80. The second holding device 42 reciprocates horizontally at the injection position 84 as indicated by the arrow X to inject the second workpiece W2. The first holding device 40 lifts up the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a at the first transfer position 80 in order to transport the first workpiece W1 after the injection process through the first transfer opening 74. The first holding device 40 receives the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a at the first transfer position 80 in order to transport the first workpiece W1 before the injection process through the first transfer opening 74.

 図8において、第2保持装置42は、第2被処理物W2の被処理面にスキャンビームSBが照射される向きとなるように第2被処理物W2を保持する。第2保持装置42は、例えば、図4(a)と同様に、水平チルト角α2が0となる向きで第2被処理物W2を保持する。第2保持装置42は、例えば、図5(a)と同様に、鉛直チルト角β2が0となる向きで第2被処理物W2を保持する。第2保持装置42は、図4(b)と同様に、水平チルト角α2が0ではない向きで第2被処理物W2を保持してもよい。第2保持装置42は、図5(b)と同様に、鉛直チルト角β2が0ではない向きで第2被処理物W2を保持してもよい。第2保持装置42は、水平チルト角α2および鉛直チルト角β2のいずれも0ではない向きで第2被処理物W2を保持してもよい。 In FIG. 8, the second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 so that the scan beam SB is irradiated onto the processing surface of the second workpiece W2. The second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle α2 is 0, as in FIG. 4(a), for example. The second holding device 42 holds the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle β2 is 0, as in FIG. 5(a), for example. The second holding device 42 may hold the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the horizontal tilt angle α2 is not 0, as in FIG. 4(b). The second holding device 42 may hold the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where the vertical tilt angle β2 is not 0, as in FIG. 5(b). The second holding device 42 may hold the second workpiece W2 in an orientation where both the horizontal tilt angle α2 and the vertical tilt angle β2 are not 0.

 図8において、第1保持装置40は、第1搬送口74を通じた第1被処理物W1の搬入または搬出が可能となる向きとなるように第1被処理物W1を保持する。第1保持装置40は、図5(c)に示されるように、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が水平方向に沿う向きとなるように第1被処理物W1を保持する。第1保持装置40は、第1リフト機構50aを用いて第1被処理物W1をリフトアップし、第1チャック機構50と第1被処理物W1の間に隙間50bを形成する。第1搬送装置70は、第1チャック機構50と第1被処理物W1の間の隙間50bに第1搬送ロボットのアームを挿入することにより、注入処理後の第1被処理物W1を搬出する。第1保持装置40は、第1搬送ロボットのアームによって第1リフト機構50aに注入処理前の第1被処理物W1が載置された場合、第1被処理物W1のリフトアップを解除し、第1チャック機構50に第1被処理物W1を保持する。第1保持装置40は、注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を保持した後、第1鉛直角度調整機構54を駆動して鉛直回動角φb1を変化させ、第1被処理物W1の被処理面が水平方向に沿わない向きで第1被処理物W1を保持する。 In Figure 8, the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that it is oriented in a way that allows the first workpiece W1 to be loaded or unloaded through the first transport port 74. As shown in Figure 5 (c), the first holding device 40 holds the first workpiece W1 so that the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 is oriented horizontally. The first holding device 40 lifts up the first workpiece W1 using the first lift mechanism 50a, forming a gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1. The first transport device 70 loads the first workpiece W1 after the injection process by inserting the arm of the first transport robot into the gap 50b between the first chuck mechanism 50 and the first workpiece W1. When the first workpiece W1 before injection processing is placed on the first lift mechanism 50a by the arm of the first transport robot, the first holding device 40 releases the lift-up of the first workpiece W1 and holds the first workpiece W1 in the first chuck mechanism 50. After holding the first workpiece W1 before injection processing, the first holding device 40 drives the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism 54 to change the vertical rotation angle φb1 and holds the first workpiece W1 with the processing surface of the first workpiece W1 oriented not along the horizontal direction.

 図9は、第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程から第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程に切り替える状況を示す。つまり、第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程が終了し、第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程が開始する状況を示す。図9において、第1保持装置40は、矢印F3で示されるように第1搬送位置80から注入位置84に向けて移動し、第2保持装置42は、矢印F4で示されるように、注入位置84から第2搬送位置82に向けて移動している。図9に示されるように、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42を同時に同じ方向に移動させることにより、第2注入工程から第1注入工程への切り替えにかかる時間を短縮できる。 Figure 9 shows the situation when switching from the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 to the first injection process into the first workpiece W1. That is, it shows the situation when the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 ends and the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 begins. In Figure 9, the first holding device 40 moves from the first transfer position 80 toward the injection position 84 as shown by arrow F3, and the second holding device 42 moves from the injection position 84 toward the second transfer position 82 as shown by arrow F4. As shown in Figure 9, by moving the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 simultaneously in the same direction, the time required to switch from the second injection process to the first injection process can be shortened.

 図9において、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1と第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2の間の相対距離dが維持されるように第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42を移動させることができる。例えば、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の移動速度を同じとすることにより相対距離dを一定に維持できる。なお、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の移動速度を調整することにより、相対距離dが所定の上限値から下限値までの範囲内に維持されるように第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42を移動させてもよい。この場合、第1保持装置40の移動速度を第2保持装置42の移動速度より速くしてもよいし、遅くしてもよい。相対距離dは、スキャンビームSBの水平方向(x3方向)のサイズより大きいことが好ましい。 In FIG. 9, the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can be moved so as to maintain the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40 and the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42. For example, the relative distance d can be maintained constant by making the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 the same. Note that the movement speeds of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 can also be adjusted to move the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 so that the relative distance d is maintained within a range from a predetermined upper limit to a predetermined lower limit. In this case, the movement speed of the first holding device 40 may be faster or slower than the movement speed of the second holding device 42. It is preferable that the relative distance d be greater than the horizontal size (x3 direction) of the scan beam SB.

 図9において、注入工程が終了する第2被処理物W2を保持する第2保持装置42の移動速度は、第2保持装置42が取り得る最大速度であってもよい。第2保持装置42を最大速度で移動させることにより、第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程の完了から第2被処理物W2の搬出までにかかる時間を短縮でき、生産性を向上できる。一方、注入工程が開始する第1被処理物W1を保持する第1保持装置40の移動速度は、第1被処理物W1の注入条件に応じて定められてもよい。第1保持装置40を注入条件に応じた移動速度で移動させることにより、第1被処理物W1が注入位置84に移動した後にそのままの移動速度で第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程を開始できる。これにより、第1注入工程の開始を早めることができ、生産性を向上できる。 In FIG. 9, the movement speed of the second holding device 42 holding the second workpiece W2 at the end of the injection process may be the maximum speed that the second holding device 42 can achieve. By moving the second holding device 42 at the maximum speed, the time required from the completion of the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 to the removal of the second workpiece W2 can be shortened, improving productivity. On the other hand, the movement speed of the first holding device 40 holding the first workpiece W1 at the start of the injection process may be determined according to the injection conditions of the first workpiece W1. By moving the first holding device 40 at a movement speed according to the injection conditions, the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 can be started at the same movement speed after the first workpiece W1 has moved to the injection position 84. This allows the start of the first injection process to be accelerated, improving productivity.

 図10は、実施の形態に係るイオン注入方法の流れを示すフローチャートである。まず、第1保持装置40に注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を搬入する(S10)。S10において、第1保持装置40に保持される注入処理済の第1被処理物W1を搬出した後に、第1保持装置40に注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を搬入してもよい。次に、第2保持装置42を第2搬送位置82に移動させ(S12)、第1保持装置40を第1注入位置(例えば注入位置84)に移動させる(S14)。S12とS14は、同時に実行することができ、S12およびS14のそれぞれの実行期間が少なくとも部分的に重なるように実行できる。つづいて、第1注入位置にて第1保持装置40を往復移動させることにより、往復移動する第1被処理物W1にイオンビームを照射する(S16)。 FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to an embodiment. First, a first workpiece W1 before implantation is loaded into the first holding device 40 (S10). In S10, the first workpiece W1 held in the first holding device 40 and having been implanted may be unloaded, and then the first workpiece W1 before implantation may be loaded into the first holding device 40. Next, the second holding device 42 is moved to the second transfer position 82 (S12), and the first holding device 40 is moved to the first implantation position (e.g., implantation position 84) (S14). S12 and S14 can be performed simultaneously, and can be performed so that the execution periods of S12 and S14 at least partially overlap. Next, the first holding device 40 is moved back and forth at the first implantation position, and the reciprocating first workpiece W1 is irradiated with an ion beam (S16).

 S16の実行前、実行中または実行後において、第2保持装置42に注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を搬入する(S18)。S18において、第2保持装置42に保持される注入処理済の第2被処理物W2を搬出した後に、第2保持装置42に注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を搬入してもよい。次に、第1保持装置40を第1搬送位置80に移動させ(S20)、第2保持装置42を第2注入位置(例えば注入位置84)に移動させる(S22)。S20とS22は、同時に実行することができ、S20およびS22のそれぞれの実行期間が少なくとも部分的に重なるように実行できる。つづいて、第2注入位置にて第2保持装置42を往復移動させることにより、往復移動する第2被処理物W2にイオンビームを照射する(S24)。 Before, during, or after S16, the second workpiece W2 before the implantation process is loaded into the second holding device 42 (S18). In S18, the implanted second workpiece W2 held in the second holding device 42 may be unloaded, and then the second workpiece W2 before the implantation process may be loaded into the second holding device 42. Next, the first holding device 40 is moved to the first transfer position 80 (S20), and the second holding device 42 is moved to a second implantation position (e.g., implantation position 84) (S22). S20 and S22 can be performed simultaneously, and can be performed so that the respective execution periods of S20 and S22 at least partially overlap. Next, the second holding device 42 is moved back and forth at the second implantation position, and the reciprocating second workpiece W2 is irradiated with an ion beam (S24).

 図10に示すフローは、繰り返し実行することができる。例えば、繰り返し後のS10の処理は、S24の実行前、実行中または実行後において実行することができる。S24の実行前、実行中または実行後において、第1保持装置40に保持される注入処理済の第1被処理物W1を搬出し、第1保持装置40に注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を搬入することができる。図10に示すフローを繰り返すことにより、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程と、第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程とを交互に繰り返し実行できる。図10に示すフローは、連続的に処理すべき複数の被処理物に対する注入工程が完了するまで、繰り返し実行できる。 The flow shown in FIG. 10 can be executed repeatedly. For example, the processing of S10 after the repetition can be executed before, during, or after the execution of S24. Before, during, or after the execution of S24, the first workpiece W1 held in the first holding device 40 that has been injected can be removed, and the first workpiece W1 before the injection can be carried into the first holding device 40. By repeating the flow shown in FIG. 10, the first injection process into the first workpiece W1 held in the first holding device 40 and the second injection process into the second workpiece W2 held in the second holding device 42 can be executed alternately and repeatedly. The flow shown in FIG. 10 can be executed repeatedly until the injection processes for the multiple workpieces to be processed consecutively are completed.

 本実施の形態によれば、注入処理室14に複数の保持装置を設けることにより、被処理物の注入工程と搬送工程を並行して実行できる。例えば、第1保持装置40に保持される第1被処理物W1への第1注入工程と同時に、第2保持装置42にて第2被処理物W2の搬送工程を実行できる。また、第2保持装置42に保持される第2被処理物W2への第2注入工程と同時に、第1保持装置40にて第1被処理物W1の搬送工程を実行できる。その結果、単一の保持装置を用いて注入工程と搬送工程を交互に実行する場合に比べて、複数の被処理物の連続処理にかかる時間を短縮でき、生産性を向上できる。 In this embodiment, by providing multiple holding devices in the injection processing chamber 14, the injection process and transport process for the workpieces can be carried out in parallel. For example, the transport process for the second workpiece W2 can be carried out by the second holding device 42 simultaneously with the first injection process for the first workpiece W1 held by the first holding device 40. Furthermore, the transport process for the first workpiece W1 can be carried out by the first holding device 40 simultaneously with the second injection process for the second workpiece W2 held by the second holding device 42. As a result, the time required for continuous processing of multiple workpieces can be shortened and productivity can be improved compared to when the injection process and transport process are carried out alternately using a single holding device.

 本実施の形態によれば、複数の保持装置を水平方向に往復移動させる構成とすることにより、複数の保持装置を鉛直方向に往復移動させる構成に比べて、注入処理室14および搬送装置16の構成の複雑化を抑制できる。また、複数の保持装置を水平方向に往復移動させる構成とすることにより、注入処理室14および搬送装置16の鉛直方向のサイズを抑制できる。その結果、一般的な半導体プロセス工場のフロアにおける高さ制限の範囲内となる外形サイズを有するイオン注入装置10を提供できる。 According to this embodiment, by configuring multiple holding devices to reciprocate horizontally, the configuration of the implantation processing chamber 14 and the transfer device 16 can be made less complex than in a configuration in which multiple holding devices reciprocate vertically. Furthermore, by configuring multiple holding devices to reciprocate horizontally, the vertical size of the implantation processing chamber 14 and the transfer device 16 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide an ion implantation device 10 having an external size that falls within the height restrictions on the floor of a typical semiconductor process factory.

 本実施の形態によれば、複数の保持装置が共通のガイドレール44に沿って移動する構成とすることにより、注入位置における複数の保持装置のそれぞれの往復移動を共通化できる。その結果、複数の保持装置を用いることによって注入環境に差異が生じることを防ぐことができる。その結果、複数の被処理物に対する注入処理のばらつきを抑制しつつ、複数の被処理物に対する注入処理の生産性を向上できる。 In this embodiment, by configuring multiple holding devices to move along a common guide rail 44, the reciprocating movements of the multiple holding devices at the injection position can be standardized. As a result, differences in the injection environment caused by using multiple holding devices can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to improve the productivity of injection processing for multiple workpieces while suppressing variations in the injection processing for multiple workpieces.

 本実施の形態によれば、イオンビームを鉛直方向に往復走査し、被処理物を水平方向に往復移動させることにより、被処理物の被処理面全体にスキャンビームを効率的に照射できる。また、質量分析部24およびエネルギー分析部34においてイオンビームを水平方向に偏向させることにより、水平面内に沿って進行するビームラインAを構成することができ、ビーム生成装置12の鉛直方向のサイズを抑制できる。 In this embodiment, by scanning the ion beam back and forth in the vertical direction and moving the workpiece back and forth in the horizontal direction, the entire surface of the workpiece can be efficiently irradiated with the scan beam. Furthermore, by deflecting the ion beam horizontally in the mass analysis unit 24 and the energy analysis unit 34, a beamline A can be formed that travels along a horizontal plane, thereby reducing the vertical size of the beam generation device 12.

 本実施の形態によれば、イオン源20のフロントスリット20cを水平方向に長いスリット形状とすることにより、引出部22を通じて水平方向に拡がったイオンビームを生成できる。その結果、イオン源20からスポット状のイオンビームを引き出す場合に比べて、ビーム電流のより大きなイオンビームの生成が容易となる。また、イオン源20から引き出されるイオンビームの鉛直方向のサイズが小さいため、イオンビームが通過するための質量分析磁石装置24aの対向磁極間の間隔を小さくできる。その結果、質量分析磁石装置24aのサイズを抑制できる。例えば、イオン源のフロントスリットを水平方向に狭くし、鉛直方向に長いスリット形状とする比較例に比べて、質量分析磁石装置24aのサイズを抑制しつつ、ビーム電流のより大きなイオンビームを生成できる。 In this embodiment, by making the front slit 20c of the ion source 20 a slit-like shape that is long in the horizontal direction, an ion beam that spreads in the horizontal direction can be generated through the extraction section 22. As a result, it is easier to generate an ion beam with a larger beam current than when a spot-shaped ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20. Furthermore, because the vertical size of the ion beam extracted from the ion source 20 is small, the distance between the opposing magnetic poles of the mass analysis magnet device 24a through which the ion beam passes can be made smaller. As a result, the size of the mass analysis magnet device 24a can be reduced. For example, compared to a comparative example in which the front slit of the ion source is narrowed in the horizontal direction and has a slit-like shape that is long in the vertical direction, an ion beam with a larger beam current can be generated while keeping the size of the mass analysis magnet device 24a smaller.

 本実施の形態によれば、水平方向に拡がったイオンビームをビーム成形部26にてスポット状に成形することにより、ビーム走査部28による鉛直方向のビームスキャンに適したスポットビームを形成できる。ビーム走査部28によってスポットビームを鉛直方向にスキャンすることにより、鉛直方向のサイズが大きな被処理物へのイオン注入が可能となる。本実施の形態によれば、鉛直方向のサイズが大きな被処理物に対してビーム電流のより大きなスキャンビームを照射できるため、注入処理の生産性を向上できる。 According to this embodiment, by shaping the horizontally expanding ion beam into a spot shape using the beam shaping unit 26, a spot beam suitable for vertical beam scanning by the beam scanning unit 28 can be formed. By scanning the spot beam vertically using the beam scanning unit 28, ion implantation into workpieces with large vertical dimensions becomes possible. According to this embodiment, a scan beam with a larger beam current can be irradiated onto workpieces with large vertical dimensions, thereby improving the productivity of the implantation process.

 本実施の形態では、イオン源20における磁場B1の印加方向と質量分析部24における磁場B2の印加方向が直交するため、両者が干渉することによってビーム品質や磁場制御に悪影響を与える可能性が高くなる。一方、イオン源における磁場の印加方向が鉛直方向となる比較例の場合、イオン源における磁場の印加方向と質量分析部における磁場の印加方向が平行であるため、両者の磁場が多少干渉しても大きな問題とはならない。本実施の形態によれば、引出部22と質量分析部24の間に磁気シールド23を設けることにより、イオン源20に印加される水平方向の磁場B1と質量分析部24に印加される鉛直方向の磁場B2の間の磁場干渉を抑制できる。これにより、イオン源20におけるプラズマ生成効率と質量分析部24の質量分析精度を両立させることができる。 In this embodiment, the direction of application of magnetic field B1 in the ion source 20 and the direction of application of magnetic field B2 in the mass analysis unit 24 are perpendicular to each other, which increases the possibility of interference between the two adversely affecting beam quality and magnetic field control. On the other hand, in the comparative example in which the direction of application of the magnetic field in the ion source is vertical, the direction of application of the magnetic field in the ion source and the direction of application of the magnetic field in the mass analysis unit are parallel, so even if the two magnetic fields interfere to some extent, it does not pose a major problem. According to this embodiment, by providing a magnetic shield 23 between the extraction unit 22 and the mass analysis unit 24, magnetic field interference between the horizontal magnetic field B1 applied to the ion source 20 and the vertical magnetic field B2 applied to the mass analysis unit 24 can be suppressed. This makes it possible to achieve both high plasma generation efficiency in the ion source 20 and high mass analysis accuracy in the mass analysis unit 24.

 本実施の形態は、鉛直方向のサイズが大きな被処理物へのイオン注入処理に適用できる。鉛直方向のサイズが大きな被処理物の一例は、フラットパネルディスプレイ(FPD)の製造に用いられる大型基板である。このような大型基板の鉛直方向および水平方向のサイズは、例えば1m×2m以上である。このような大型の被処理物を鉛直方向に往復移動させることは現実的ではない。本実施の形態によれば、被処理物を水平方向に往復移動させるため、被処理物を鉛直方向に往復移動させる場合に比べて、大型基板の往復移動が容易である。水平方向に往復移動する大型基板に対し、鉛直方向にスキャンされるスキャンビームを照射することにより、大型基板に対するイオン注入処理を実行できる。 This embodiment can be applied to ion implantation processing of workpieces that are large in size in the vertical direction. One example of a workpiece that is large in size in the vertical direction is a large substrate used in the manufacture of flat panel displays (FPDs). The vertical and horizontal dimensions of such a large substrate are, for example, 1 m x 2 m or more. It is not realistic to move such a large workpiece back and forth in the vertical direction. According to this embodiment, the workpiece is moved back and forth in the horizontal direction, which makes it easier to move the large substrate back and forth compared to moving the workpiece back and forth in the vertical direction. Ion implantation processing can be performed on the large substrate by irradiating a scan beam that is scanned vertically onto the large substrate that is moving back and forth in the horizontal direction.

 イオン注入装置10は、被処理物がFPD用の大型基板の場合、ビーム平行化部30、加速減速部32およびエネルギー分析部34の少なくとも一つを備えなくてもよい。注入処理室14は、被処理物がFPD用の大型基板の場合、被処理物を水平方向に移動させることにより、被処理物を注入処理室14に搬入し、被処理物を注入処理室14から搬出してもよい。例えば、注入処理前の大型基板を注入処理室14の右側(または左側)から搬入し、大型基板を注入処理室14にて左方向(または右方向)に移動させてイオン注入処理を実行し、注入処理後の大型基板を注入処理室14の左側(または右側)から搬出してもよい。これにより、イオン注入装置10は、大型基板をインラインで連続的に処理してもよい。 When the workpiece is a large substrate for an FPD, the ion implantation apparatus 10 does not need to include at least one of the beam collimator 30, the acceleration/deceleration unit 32, and the energy analyzer 34. When the workpiece is a large substrate for an FPD, the implantation chamber 14 may be loaded and unloaded by moving the workpiece horizontally. For example, the large substrate before implantation may be loaded into the right (or left) side of the implantation chamber 14, moved left (or right) within the implantation chamber 14 to perform ion implantation, and the large substrate after implantation may be unloaded from the left (or right) side of the implantation chamber 14. In this way, the ion implantation apparatus 10 may continuously process large substrates in-line.

 図11は、変形例に係るイオン注入方法の流れを示すフローチャートである。図11のフローでは、第1被処理物W1に対する第1注入工程と第2被処理物W2に対する第2注入工程を並行して実行する。 FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of an ion implantation method according to a modified example. In the flow of FIG. 11, a first implantation process for a first workpiece W1 and a second implantation process for a second workpiece W2 are carried out in parallel.

 まず、第1保持装置40に注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を搬入する(S30)。S30において、第1保持装置40に保持される注入処理済の第1被処理物W1を搬出した後に、第1保持装置40に注入処理前の第1被処理物W1を搬入してもよい。また、第2保持装置42に注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を搬入する(S32)。S32において、第2保持装置42に保持される注入処理済の第2被処理物W2を搬出した後に、第2保持装置42に注入処理前の第2被処理物W2を搬入してもよい。S30とS32の工程の順序は問わず、S30の開始後にS32を開始してもよいし、S32の開始後にS30を開始してもよい。S30およびS32の工程は同時に実行されてもよい。 First, the first workpiece W1 before injection processing is carried into the first holding device 40 (S30). In S30, the first workpiece W1 after injection processing held in the first holding device 40 may be carried out, and then the first workpiece W1 before injection processing may be carried into the first holding device 40. Alternatively, the second workpiece W2 before injection processing is carried into the second holding device 42 (S32). In S32, the second workpiece W2 after injection processing held in the second holding device 42 may be carried out, and then the second workpiece W2 before injection processing may be carried into the second holding device 42. The order of steps S30 and S32 does not matter; S32 may be started after S30 starts, or S30 may be started after S32 starts. Steps S30 and S32 may be performed simultaneously.

 つづいて、第1保持装置40を第1注入位置(例えば注入位置84)に移動させる(S34)。第1注入位置にて第1保持装置40を往復移動させることにより、往復移動する第1被処理物W1にイオンビームを照射する(S36)。S36における第1被処理物W1の往復移動の回数は特に限られないが、例えば、1往復のみでもよい。その後、第1保持装置40を第1注入位置から退避させ(S38)、第2保持装置42を第2注入位置(例えば注入位置84)に移動させる(S40)。第1保持装置40を退避させる第1退避位置は、例えば、第1搬送位置80と第1注入位置の間に位置する。第1保持装置40を退避させる第1退避位置は、第1搬送位置80と同じであってもよい。 Next, the first holding device 40 is moved to a first injection position (e.g., injection position 84) (S34). The first holding device 40 is moved back and forth at the first injection position, thereby irradiating the reciprocating first workpiece W1 with an ion beam (S36). The number of reciprocating movements of the first workpiece W1 in S36 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, only one reciprocation. Thereafter, the first holding device 40 is retracted from the first injection position (S38), and the second holding device 42 is moved to a second injection position (e.g., injection position 84) (S40). The first retraction position to which the first holding device 40 is retracted is, for example, located between the first transfer position 80 and the first injection position. The first retraction position to which the first holding device 40 is retracted may be the same as the first transfer position 80.

 つづいて、第2注入位置にて第2保持装置42を往復移動させることにより、往復移動する第2被処理物W2にイオンビームを照射する(S42)。S42における第2被処理物W2の往復移動の回数は特に限られないが、例えば、1往復のみでもよい。その後、第2保持装置42を第2注入位置から退避させる(S44)。第2保持装置42を退避させる第2退避位置は、例えば、第2搬送位置82と第2注入位置の間に位置する。第2保持装置42を退避させる第2退避位置は、第2搬送位置82と同じであってもよい。 Next, the second holding device 42 is moved back and forth at the second implantation position, thereby irradiating the reciprocating second workpiece W2 with an ion beam (S42). The number of reciprocating movements of the second workpiece W2 in S42 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, only one reciprocation. Thereafter, the second holding device 42 is retracted from the second implantation position (S44). The second retraction position to which the second holding device 42 is retracted is, for example, located between the second transfer position 82 and the second implantation position. The second retraction position to which the second holding device 42 is retracted may be the same as the second transfer position 82.

 第1被処理物W1および第2被処理物W2に対する注入処理が完了していなければ(S46のN)、注入処理が完了するまで、S34~S44の工程を繰り返す。例えば、第1被処理物W1および第2被処理物W2の注入処理の完了に必要な往復移動の回数が3回(つまり、3往復)であれば、S34~S44の工程が3回繰り返される。この場合、第1被処理物W1が1往復してイオンビームが照射される工程と、第2被処理物W2が1往復してイオンビームが照射される工程とが交互に3回ずつ実行される。この場合、第1被処理物W1と第2被処理物W2の間の相対距離dをできるだけ小さくしてS38とS40を同時に実行することができ、また、第1被処理物W1と第2被処理物W2の間の相対距離dをできるだけ小さくしてS44とS34を同時に実行できる。つまり、第1被処理物W1と第2被処理物W2の間の相対距離dをできるだけ小さくした状態を維持して、第1被処理物W1および第2被処理物W2を同一方向に同期させて往復移動させることができる。これにより、イオンビームの利用効率を向上させることができる。 If the implantation process for the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 is not complete (N in S46), steps S34 to S44 are repeated until the implantation process is complete. For example, if the number of reciprocating movements required to complete the implantation process for the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 is three (i.e., three round trips), steps S34 to S44 are repeated three times. In this case, the process of irradiating the ion beam by making one round trip of the first workpiece W1 and the process of irradiating the ion beam by making one round trip of the second workpiece W2 are alternately performed three times each. In this case, S38 and S40 can be performed simultaneously by minimizing the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2, and S44 and S34 can be performed simultaneously by minimizing the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2. In other words, the relative distance d between the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 can be kept as small as possible, and the first workpiece W1 and the second workpiece W2 can be moved back and forth in the same direction in synchronization. This improves the efficiency of ion beam utilization.

 S46にて注入処理が完了していれば(S46のY)、第1保持装置40を第1搬送位置80に移動させ(S48)、第2保持装置42を第2搬送位置82に移動させる(S50)。S48とS50の工程の順序は問わず、S48の開始後にS50を開始してもよいし、S50の開始後にS48を開始してもよい。S48およびS50の工程は同時に実行されてもよい。また、第1退避位置が第1搬送位置80である場合、S38の工程において第1保持装置40が第1搬送位置80にすでに配置されているため、S48の工程が省略されてもよい。同様に、第2退避位置が第2搬送位置82である場合、S44の工程において第2保持装置42が第2搬送位置82にすでに配置されているため、S50の工程が省略されてもよい。 If the injection process is completed in S46 (Y in S46), the first holding device 40 is moved to the first transfer position 80 (S48), and the second holding device 42 is moved to the second transfer position 82 (S50). The order of steps S48 and S50 does not matter; S50 may be started after S48, or S48 may be started after S50. Steps S48 and S50 may be executed simultaneously. Furthermore, if the first retraction position is the first transfer position 80, step S48 may be omitted because the first holding device 40 is already positioned at the first transfer position 80 in step S38. Similarly, if the second retraction position is the second transfer position 82, step S50 may be omitted because the second holding device 42 is already positioned at the second transfer position 82 in step S44.

 図11に示すフローは、連続的に処理すべき複数の被処理物に対する注入工程が完了するまで、繰り返し実行できる。図11のフローによれば、第1保持装置40にて第1被処理物W1を搬入および搬出する第1搬送工程と、第2保持装置42にて第2被処理物W2を搬入および搬出する第2搬送工程とを同時に実行できるため、生産性を向上できる。図11に示すフローは、被処理物の搬出および搬入にかかる搬送時間に比べて、被処理物にイオンビームが照射される注入時間が十分に短い(例えば半分以下である)場合に適用されることが好ましい。また、図11に示すフローは、被処理物の搬出および搬入にかかる搬送時間に比べて、被処理物にイオンビームが照射される注入時間が十分に長い(例えば2倍以上である)場合に適用されることも好ましい。図11に示すフローは、被処理物にイオンビームが照射される注入時間が被処理物の搬出および搬入にかかる搬送時間と同程度の場合にも適用できるが、この場合、図10に示すフローの方が生産性が高いかもしれない。 The flow shown in FIG. 11 can be repeatedly executed until the implantation process for multiple workpieces to be processed consecutively is completed. According to the flow shown in FIG. 11, the first transport process of loading and unloading the first workpiece W1 using the first holding device 40 and the second transport process of loading and unloading the second workpiece W2 using the second holding device 42 can be executed simultaneously, thereby improving productivity. The flow shown in FIG. 11 is preferably applied when the implantation time during which the workpiece is irradiated with an ion beam is sufficiently short (e.g., less than half) compared to the transport time required for loading and unloading the workpiece. The flow shown in FIG. 11 is also preferably applied when the implantation time during which the workpiece is irradiated with an ion beam is sufficiently long (e.g., more than twice) compared to the transport time required for loading and unloading the workpiece. The flow shown in FIG. 11 can also be applied when the implantation time during which the workpiece is irradiated with an ion beam is approximately the same as the transport time required for loading and unloading the workpiece; in this case, the flow shown in FIG. 10 may be more productive.

 上述の実施の形態では、ビーム走査部28およびビーム平行化部30を用いて、ビーム生成装置12がスキャンビームを生成する場合について示した。別の実施の形態では、ビーム生成装置がリボンビームを生成してもよい。ビーム生成装置は、ビーム走査部28の代わりにリボンビーム生成部を備えてもよい。リボンビーム生成部は、スポット状のイオンビームを鉛直方向に発散させることによってリボンビームを生成する。リボンビーム生成部は、電場式または磁場式のビーム発散装置によって構成されてもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the beam generating device 12 generates a scanned beam using the beam scanning unit 28 and the beam collimating unit 30. In another embodiment, the beam generating device may generate a ribbon beam. The beam generating device may include a ribbon beam generating unit instead of the beam scanning unit 28. The ribbon beam generating unit generates a ribbon beam by diverging a spot-shaped ion beam in the vertical direction. The ribbon beam generating unit may be configured with an electric field type or magnetic field type beam diverging device.

 上述の実施の形態では、イオン源20から引き出されるイオンビームが水平方向に拡がったリボン状ビームである場合について示した。別の実施の形態では、イオン源から引き出されるイオンビームが鉛直方向に拡がったリボンビームであってもよい。この場合、イオン源のフロントスリットは、鉛直方向の開口幅が長く、水平方向の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。同様に、引出部の引出電極は、鉛直方向の開口幅が長く、水平方向の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。この場合、質量分析部は、鉛直方向に拡がったリボンビームを水平方向に偏向させるよう構成される。この場合、ビーム生成装置は、ビーム走査部28およびビーム平行化部30を備えなくてもよい。この場合、イオン源および引出部は、鉛直方向に拡がったリボンビームを生成するためのリボンビーム生成部ということができる。 In the above-described embodiment, the ion beam extracted from the ion source 20 is a ribbon-shaped beam that expands in the horizontal direction. In another embodiment, the ion beam extracted from the ion source may be a ribbon beam that expands in the vertical direction. In this case, the front slit of the ion source has a slit shape with a long vertical opening width and a short horizontal opening width. Similarly, the extraction electrode of the extraction unit has a slit shape with a long vertical opening width and a short horizontal opening width. In this case, the mass analysis unit is configured to deflect the vertically expanded ribbon beam in the horizontal direction. In this case, the beam generation device does not need to include the beam scanning unit 28 and the beam collimator 30. In this case, the ion source and extraction unit can be said to be a ribbon beam generation unit for generating a vertically expanded ribbon beam.

 上述の別の実施の形態において、鉛直方向に拡がったリボンビームの鉛直方向における照射範囲のサイズは、被処理物の鉛直方向のサイズよりも大きい。したがって、リボンビームを生成するビーム生成装置は、鉛直方向における照射範囲のサイズが被処理物の被処理面のサイズよりも大きい照射範囲にわたってイオンビームを照射するよう構成される。なお、上述の実施の形態において、スキャンビームを生成するビーム生成装置12は、鉛直方向における照射範囲のサイズが被処理物の被処理面のサイズよりも大きい照射範囲にわたってイオンビームを照射するよう構成される。 In the other embodiment described above, the size of the vertical irradiation range of the ribbon beam expanded in the vertical direction is larger than the vertical size of the workpiece. Therefore, the beam generating device that generates the ribbon beam is configured to irradiate the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in the vertical direction is larger than the size of the workpiece's surface to be processed. Note that in the embodiment described above, the beam generating device 12 that generates the scan beam is configured to irradiate the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in the vertical direction is larger than the size of the workpiece's surface to be processed.

 上述の実施の形態では、注入処理室14に複数の保持装置40、42を設ける場合について示した。別の実施の形態では、注入処理室14に単一の保持装置のみが設けられてもよい。単一の保持装置は、上述の第1保持装置40または第2保持装置42のいずれかと同様に構成されてもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the implantation processing chamber 14 is provided with multiple holding devices 40, 42. In another embodiment, the implantation processing chamber 14 may be provided with only a single holding device. The single holding device may be configured similarly to either the first holding device 40 or the second holding device 42 described above.

 上述の実施の形態では、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向が鉛直方向である場合について示した。別の実施の形態では、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向が鉛直方向に対して傾斜するように構成されてもよい。この場合、ビーム走査部28、ビーム平行化部30、加速減速部32およびエネルギー分析部34は、(例えば、質量分析部24より下流であってビーム走査部28より上流の位置において)z2方向に延びるビームラインAを回転軸として回転させた位置に(つまり、傾斜した向きで)配置される。なお、ビーム走査部28およびビーム平行化部30のみを回転させ、加速減速部32およびエネルギー分析部34の少なくとも一方については回転させない配置としてもよい。この場合、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向は、鉛直方向から45度以内であることが好ましい。 In the above-described embodiment, the scanning direction of the scan beam SB is vertical. In another embodiment, the scanning direction of the scan beam SB may be configured to be inclined relative to the vertical. In this case, the beam scanning unit 28, beam collimation unit 30, acceleration/deceleration unit 32, and energy analysis unit 34 are arranged at a position rotated (i.e., in an inclined orientation) around the beam line A extending in the z2 direction as the axis of rotation (for example, at a position downstream of the mass analysis unit 24 and upstream of the beam scanning unit 28). Note that it is also possible to arrange it so that only the beam scanning unit 28 and the beam collimation unit 30 rotate, and at least one of the acceleration/deceleration unit 32 and the energy analysis unit 34 does not rotate. In this case, it is preferable that the scanning direction of the scan beam SB is within 45 degrees of the vertical.

 上述の実施の形態では、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42が水平方向に移動する場合について示した。別の実施の形態では、第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の移動方向が水平方向でなくてもよく、水平方向に対して傾斜してもよい。第1保持装置40および第2保持装置42の移動方向は、水平方向とは異なる方向であって、スキャンビームを横切る任意の方向であってもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 move horizontally. In another embodiment, the movement direction of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 does not have to be horizontal, and may be inclined relative to the horizontal. The movement direction of the first holding device 40 and the second holding device 42 may be a direction other than the horizontal direction and may be any direction that crosses the scan beam.

 本開示のある態様は以下の通りである。
(項1)イオンを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源から前記イオンを引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 前記イオンビームを水平方向とは異なるスキャン方向に往復スキャンさせてスキャンビームを生成するよう構成されるビーム走査部と、
 被処理物を保持可能に構成される保持装置であって、前記保持装置に保持される前記被処理物を前記スキャンビームを横切る方向に往復移動させるよう構成される保持装置と、を備えるイオン注入装置。
(項2)前記保持装置は、前記保持装置に保持される前記被処理物を前記水平方向に往復移動させるよう構成される、項1に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項3)前記スキャン方向は、鉛直方向から45度以内となる方向である、項1または項2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項4)前記スキャン方向は、鉛直方向である、項1または項2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項5)前記イオン源は、前記引出部によって引き出される前記イオンが通過するフロントスリットを備え、
 前記フロントスリットの前記水平方向の開口幅は、前記フロントスリットの鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい、項1から項4のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項6)前記イオン源は、
 内部空間を有し、前記内部空間にて生成されるプラズマから前記イオンを引き出すための前記フロントスリットを有するアークチャンバと、
 前記内部空間に前記水平方向の磁場を印加する磁石装置と、を備える項5に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項7)前記引出部は、前記イオンビームが通過する引出開口を有する引出電極を備え、
 前記引出開口の前記水平方向の開口幅は、前記引出開口の前記鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい、項5または項6に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項8)前記引出部と前記ビーム走査部の間に設けられ、前記イオンビームを前記水平方向に偏向させる質量分析部をさらに備える、項1から項7のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項9)前記質量分析部は、前記イオンビームに鉛直方向の磁場を印加する磁石装置を備える、項8に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項10)前記引出部と前記質量分析部の間に設けられ、前記イオンビームが通過する通過開口を有する磁気シールドをさらに備える、項8または項9に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項11)前記質量分析部と前記ビーム走査部の間に設けられ、前記イオンビームの断面形状および収束発散角の少なくとも一方を調整するための少なくとも一つのレンズ装置を備えるビーム成形部をさらに備える、項8から項10のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項12)前記ビーム走査部の下流側に設けられ、前記スキャンビームを平行化するビーム平行化部をさらに備える、項1から項11のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項13)前記スキャンビームを前記水平方向に偏向させる偏向装置と、前記偏向装置の下流側に設けられるエネルギー分析スリットとを備えるエネルギー分析部をさらに備える、項1から項12のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項14)前記偏向装置は、前記スキャンビームを挟んで対向する電極対と、前記電極対に直流電圧を印加する電源とを備える、項13に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項15)前記偏向装置の前記電極対は、前記水平方向に対向するように配置される、項14に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項16)前記偏向装置の前記電極対は、前記スキャン方向と直交する方向に対向するように配置される、項14に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項17)イオン源を用いてイオンを生成することと、
 前記イオン源から前記イオンを引き出してイオンビームを生成することと、
 前記イオンビームを水平方向とは異なるスキャン方向に往復スキャンさせてスキャンビームを生成することと、
 前記スキャンビームを横切る方向に被処理物を往復移動させることと、を備えるイオン注入方法。
Some aspects of the present disclosure are as follows.
(Item 1) an ion source for generating ions;
an extractor that extracts the ions from the ion source to generate an ion beam;
a beam scanning unit configured to reciprocally scan the ion beam in a scan direction different from a horizontal direction to generate a scanned beam;
An ion implantation apparatus comprising: a holding device configured to be able to hold a workpiece, the holding device configured to reciprocate the workpiece held by the holding device in a direction crossing the scan beam.
(Item 2) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 1, wherein the holding device is configured to reciprocate the object held by the holding device in the horizontal direction.
(Item 3) The ion implantation apparatus according to item 1 or 2, wherein the scanning direction is a direction within 45 degrees from the vertical direction.
(Item 4) The ion implantation apparatus according to item 1 or 2, wherein the scanning direction is a vertical direction.
(Item 5) The ion source includes a front slit through which the ions extracted by the extraction unit pass,
5. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the horizontal opening width of the front slit is larger than the vertical opening width of the front slit.
(Item 6) The ion source is
an arc chamber having an internal space and a front slit for extracting the ions from plasma generated in the internal space;
Item 6. The ion implantation apparatus according to item 5, further comprising: a magnet device that applies the horizontal magnetic field to the internal space.
(Item 7) The extraction section includes an extraction electrode having an extraction opening through which the ion beam passes,
Item 7. The ion implantation apparatus according to item 5 or 6, wherein the extraction opening has a width in the horizontal direction greater than a width in the vertical direction of the extraction opening.
(Item 8) The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 1 to 7, further comprising a mass analysis unit provided between the extraction unit and the beam scanning unit, for deflecting the ion beam in the horizontal direction.
(Item 9) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 8, wherein the mass analysis section includes a magnet device that applies a magnetic field to the ion beam in a vertical direction.
(Item 10) The ion implantation apparatus according to item 8 or 9, further comprising a magnetic shield provided between the extraction section and the mass analysis section, the magnetic shield having a passage opening through which the ion beam passes.
(Item 11) An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 8 to 10, further comprising a beam shaping unit provided between the mass analysis unit and the beam scanning unit, the beam shaping unit comprising at least one lens device for adjusting at least one of the cross-sectional shape and convergence/divergence angle of the ion beam.
(Item 12) The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 1 to 11, further comprising a beam collimator provided downstream of the beam scanning unit to collimate the scan beam.
(Item 13) An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 1 to 12, further comprising an energy analysis unit including a deflection device that deflects the scan beam in the horizontal direction and an energy analysis slit provided downstream of the deflection device.
(Item 14) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 13, wherein the deflection device comprises a pair of electrodes facing each other across the scan beam, and a power supply that applies a DC voltage to the pair of electrodes.
(Item 15) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 14, wherein the electrode pair of the deflection device is arranged to face each other in the horizontal direction.
(Item 16) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 14, wherein the electrode pair of the deflection device is arranged to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the scanning direction.
(Item 17) generating ions using an ion source;
extracting the ions from the ion source to form an ion beam;
generating a scanned beam by scanning the ion beam back and forth in a scan direction different from a horizontal direction;
and moving the workpiece back and forth in a direction crossing the scan beam.

 本開示のある態様は以下の通りである。
(項18)被処理物に照射されるイオンビームを生成し、鉛直方向における照射範囲のサイズが前記被処理物の被処理面のサイズよりも大きい前記照射範囲にわたって前記イオンビームを照射するよう構成されるビーム生成装置と、
 第1被処理物を保持可能に構成される第1保持装置であって、前記第1保持装置に保持される前記第1被処理物が前記照射範囲を横切るように前記第1被処理物を水平方向に往復移動させるよう構成される第1保持装置と、
 第2被処理物を保持可能に構成される第2保持装置であって、前記第2保持装置に保持される前記第2被処理物が前記照射範囲を横切るように前記第2被処理物を前記水平方向に往復移動させるよう構成される第2保持装置と、を備えるイオン注入装置。
(項19)前記第1保持装置は、前記第1被処理物に前記イオンビームを照射するための第1注入位置と、前記第1被処理物を前記第1保持装置に搬入または前記第1保持装置から搬出するための第1搬送位置との間で移動可能となるよう構成され、
 前記第2保持装置は、前記第2被処理物に前記イオンビームを照射するための第2注入位置と、前記第2被処理物を前記第2保持装置に搬入または前記第2保持装置から搬出するための第2搬送位置との間で移動可能となるよう構成される、項18に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項20)前記第1注入位置および前記第2注入位置は、前記第1搬送位置と前記第2搬送位置の間に位置する、項19に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項21)前記第1注入位置にて前記第1保持装置が前記第1被処理物を往復移動させる第1移動範囲は、前記第2注入位置にて前記第2保持装置が前記第2被処理物を往復移動させる第2移動範囲とビーム進行方向に見て重なる、項19または項20に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項22)前記第1移動範囲は、前記第2移動範囲と共通である、項21に記載のイオン注入装置。
(項23)前記第1注入位置にて前記第1保持装置によって保持される前記第1被処理物の前記鉛直方向の位置は、前記第2注入位置にて前記第2保持装置によって保持される前記第2被処理物の前記鉛直方向の位置と共通である、項19から項22のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項24)前記第1注入位置にて前記第1保持装置によって保持される前記第1被処理物のビーム進行方向の位置は、前記第2注入位置にて前記第2保持装置によって保持される前記第2被処理物の前記ビーム進行方向の位置と共通である、項19から項23のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項25)前記第1保持装置は、前記第2搬送位置に移動不可となるよう構成され、
 前記第2保持装置は、前記第1搬送位置に移動不可となるよう構成される、項19から項24のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項26)前記第1保持装置および前記第2保持装置は、同じ方向に移動可能である、項18から項25のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項27)前記第1保持装置および前記第2保持装置は、前記第1保持装置によって保持される前記第1被処理物と前記第2保持装置によって保持される前記第2被処理物の間の相対距離を維持したまま、同じ方向に同時に移動可能である、項18から項26のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項28)前記第1保持装置および前記第2保持装置は、共通のガイドレールに沿って移動可能である、項18から項27のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項29)前記第1保持装置は、前記第1被処理物の前記鉛直方向の向きを調整する第1鉛直角度調整機構と、前記第1被処理物の前記水平方向の向きを調整する第1水平角度調整機構とを備え、
 前記第2保持装置は、前記第2被処理物の前記鉛直方向の向きを調整する第2鉛直角度調整機構と、前記第2被処理物の前記水平方向の向きを調整する第2水平角度調整機構とを備える、項18から項28のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項30)前記第1保持装置は、前記水平方向の回転軸まわりに回動して前記第1被処理物の向きを調整する第1鉛直角度調整機構と、前記鉛直方向の回転軸まわりに回動して前記第1被処理物の向きを調整する第1水平角度調整機構とを備え、
 前記第2保持装置は、前記水平方向の回転軸まわりに回動して前記第2被処理物の向きを調整する第2鉛直角度調整機構と、前記鉛直方向の回転軸まわりに回動して前記第2被処理物の向きを調整する第2水平角度調整機構とを備える、項18から項28のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項31)前記第1保持装置は、前記第1被処理物の向きを調整する第1鉛直角度調整機構を備え、前記第1鉛直角度調整機構は、前記第1被処理物の搬入または搬出時に前記第1被処理物の被処理面が前記水平方向に沿う向きに調整し、前記第1被処理物への前記イオンビームの照射時に前記第1被処理物の前記被処理面が前記水平方向に沿わない向きに調整するように構成され、
 前記第2保持装置は、前記第2被処理物の向きを調整する第2鉛直角度調整機構を備え、前記第2鉛直角度調整機構は、前記第2被処理物の搬入または搬出時に前記第2被処理物の被処理面が前記水平方向に沿う向きに調整し、前記第2被処理物への前記イオンビームの照射時に前記第2被処理物の前記被処理面が前記水平方向に沿わない向きに調整するように構成される、項18から項28のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項32)前記第1保持装置は、前記第1被処理物の前記水平方向の向きを調整する第1水平角度調整機構と、前記第1被処理物のツイスト角度を調整する第1ツイスト機構とを備え、
 前記第2保持装置は、前記第2被処理物の前記水平方向の向きを調整する第2水平角度調整機構と、前記第2被処理物のツイスト角度を調整する第2ツイスト機構とを備える、項18から項31のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項33)前記ビーム生成装置は、前記照射範囲にわたって前記イオンビームを往復スキャンさせるビーム走査部を備える、項18から項32のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項34)前記ビーム生成装置は、前記照射範囲のサイズに対応したビームサイズを有するリボンビームを生成するリボンビーム生成部を備える、項18から項32のいずれか一つに記載のイオン注入装置。
(項35)被処理物に照射されるイオンビームを生成することと、
 鉛直方向における照射範囲のサイズが前記被処理物の被処理面のサイズよりも大きい前記照射範囲にわたって前記イオンビームを照射することと、
 第1被処理物を第1保持装置に保持させることと、
 前記第1保持装置を用いて、前記第1被処理物が前記照射範囲を横切るように前記第1被処理物を水平方向に往復移動させることと、
 第2被処理物を第2保持装置に保持させることと、
 前記第2保持装置を用いて、前記第2被処理物が前記照射範囲を横切るように前記第2被処理物を前記水平方向に往復移動させることと、を備えるイオン注入方法。
Some aspects of the present disclosure are as follows.
(Item 18) A beam generating device configured to generate an ion beam to be irradiated onto a workpiece, and to irradiate the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in the vertical direction is larger than the size of the surface to be processed of the workpiece;
a first holding device configured to be able to hold a first workpiece, the first holding device configured to reciprocate the first workpiece held by the first holding device in a horizontal direction so that the first workpiece crosses the irradiation range;
An ion implantation apparatus comprising: a second holding device configured to be able to hold a second object to be processed, the second holding device configured to move the second object to and fro in the horizontal direction so that the second object to be processed held by the second holding device crosses the irradiation range.
(Item 19) The first holding device is configured to be movable between a first implantation position for irradiating the first workpiece with the ion beam and a first transport position for carrying the first workpiece into or out of the first holding device,
Item 19. The ion implantation apparatus described in Item 18, wherein the second holding device is configured to be movable between a second implantation position for irradiating the second workpiece with the ion beam and a second transport position for loading or unloading the second workpiece into or from the second holding device.
(Item 20) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 19, wherein the first implantation position and the second implantation position are located between the first transfer position and the second transfer position.
(Item 21) An ion implantation apparatus described in Item 19 or Item 20, wherein a first movement range in which the first holding device moves the first workpiece back and forth at the first implantation position overlaps with a second movement range in which the second holding device moves the second workpiece back and forth at the second implantation position in the beam propagation direction.
(Item 22) The ion implantation apparatus according to Item 21, wherein the first movement range is common to the second movement range.
(Item 23) An ion implantation apparatus described in any one of Items 19 to 22, wherein the vertical position of the first workpiece held by the first holding device at the first implantation position is the same as the vertical position of the second workpiece held by the second holding device at the second implantation position.
(Item 24) An ion implantation apparatus described in any one of Items 19 to 23, wherein the position in the beam propagation direction of the first workpiece held by the first holding device at the first implantation position is the same as the position in the beam propagation direction of the second workpiece held by the second holding device at the second implantation position.
(Item 25) The first holding device is configured to be unable to move to the second conveying position,
25. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 19 to 24, wherein the second holding device is configured to be unable to move to the first transfer position.
(Item 26) An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 18 to 25, wherein the first holding device and the second holding device are movable in the same direction.
(Item 27) An ion implantation apparatus described in any one of Items 18 to 26, wherein the first holding device and the second holding device are capable of moving simultaneously in the same direction while maintaining the relative distance between the first workpiece held by the first holding device and the second workpiece held by the second holding device.
(Item 28) An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 18 to 27, wherein the first holding device and the second holding device are movable along a common guide rail.
(Item 29) The first holding device includes a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the vertical orientation of the first workpiece, and a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece,
29. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 28, wherein the second holding device comprises a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the vertical orientation of the second workpiece, and a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece.
(Item 30) The first holding device includes a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the horizontal rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the first workpiece, and a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the vertical rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the first workpiece,
29. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 28, wherein the second holding device comprises a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the horizontal rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the second workpiece, and a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that rotates around the vertical rotation axis to adjust the orientation of the second workpiece.
(Item 31) The first holding device includes a first vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the orientation of the first workpiece, and the first vertical angle adjustment mechanism is configured to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the first workpiece to be along the horizontal direction when the first workpiece is carried in or out, and to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the first workpiece to be not along the horizontal direction when the first workpiece is irradiated with the ion beam,
29. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 28, wherein the second holding device is provided with a second vertical angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the orientation of the second workpiece, and the second vertical angle adjustment mechanism is configured to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the second workpiece to be along the horizontal direction when the second workpiece is loaded or unloaded, and to adjust the orientation of the processing surface of the second workpiece to be not along the horizontal direction when the ion beam is irradiated onto the second workpiece.
(Item 32) The first holding device includes a first horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the first workpiece, and a first twist mechanism that adjusts the twist angle of the first workpiece,
Item 32. An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of items 18 to 31, wherein the second holding device comprises a second horizontal angle adjustment mechanism that adjusts the horizontal orientation of the second workpiece, and a second twist mechanism that adjusts the twist angle of the second workpiece.
(Item 33) An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 18 to 32, wherein the beam generating device includes a beam scanning unit that scans the ion beam back and forth across the irradiation range.
(Item 34) An ion implantation apparatus according to any one of Items 18 to 32, wherein the beam generating device includes a ribbon beam generating unit that generates a ribbon beam having a beam size corresponding to the size of the irradiation range.
(Item 35) generating an ion beam to be irradiated onto a workpiece;
irradiating the ion beam over an irradiation range whose size in a vertical direction is larger than the size of the surface to be processed of the workpiece;
holding the first workpiece in a first holding device;
Using the first holding device, reciprocating the first workpiece in a horizontal direction so that the first workpiece crosses the irradiation range;
holding the second object to be processed in a second holding device;
and using the second holding device, reciprocating the second object in the horizontal direction so that the second object crosses the irradiation range.

 図12は、別の実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置10Aの概略構成を示す上面図である。図13は、別の実施の形態に係るイオン注入装置10Aの概略構成を示す側面図である。図12および図13に示されるイオン注入装置10Aは、注入処理室14に設けられるビームプロファイラ46をさらに備える点で、図1および図2に示されるイオン注入装置10と相違する。以下、イオン注入装置10Aについて、上述の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点については適宜説明を省略する。 FIG. 12 is a top view showing the schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus 10A according to another embodiment. FIG. 13 is a side view showing the schematic configuration of an ion implantation apparatus 10A according to another embodiment. The ion implantation apparatus 10A shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 differs from the ion implantation apparatus 10 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 in that it further includes a beam profiler 46 provided in the implantation processing chamber 14. The following description of the ion implantation apparatus 10A will focus on the differences from the above-mentioned embodiments, and will omit a description of the commonalities as appropriate.

 ビームプロファイラ46は、注入処理室14の内部に設けられる。ビームプロファイラ46は、被処理物W1、W2の表面の位置におけるスキャンビームSBを測定するためのビーム測定装置である。ビームプロファイラ46は、プロファイラ駆動装置47の動作により鉛直方向(y方向)に可動となるよう構成される。ビームプロファイラ46は、イオン注入時に被処理物W1またはW2が位置する注入位置から退避され、被処理物W1またはW2が注入位置にないときに注入位置に挿入される。 The beam profiler 46 is provided inside the implantation processing chamber 14. The beam profiler 46 is a beam measurement device for measuring the scan beam SB at the surface position of the workpieces W1 and W2. The beam profiler 46 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction (y direction) by the operation of the profiler drive device 47. The beam profiler 46 is retracted from the implantation position where the workpieces W1 and W2 are located during ion implantation, and is inserted into the implantation position when the workpieces W1 and W2 are not at the implantation position.

 図14は、ビームプロファイラ46の可動範囲を模式的に示す正面図であり、上述の図3にビームプロファイラ46を追加したものである。図14は、注入位置に挿入された状態のビームプロファイラ46を示す。ビームプロファイラ46は、プロファイラ駆動装置47の動作により、矢印Hで示されるように鉛直方向(y方向)に可動である。ビームプロファイラ46は、例えば、スキャンビームSBの鉛直方向の照射範囲のサイズhにわたって可動となるように構成され、スキャンビームSBよりも鉛直上側の上端位置46aと、スキャンビームSBよりも鉛直下側の下端位置46bとの間で可動となるように構成される。ビームプロファイラ46を注入位置から退避させる場合、ビームプロファイラ46は、例えば上端位置46aに配置される。 FIG. 14 is a front view schematically illustrating the movable range of the beam profiler 46, and is obtained by adding the beam profiler 46 to FIG. 3 described above. FIG. 14 shows the beam profiler 46 inserted at the implantation position. The beam profiler 46 is movable in the vertical direction (y direction) as indicated by the arrow H by operation of the profiler driver 47. The beam profiler 46 is configured to be movable, for example, over the size hB of the vertical irradiation range of the scan beam SB, and is configured to be movable between an upper end position 46a vertically above the scan beam SB and a lower end position 46b vertically below the scan beam SB. When the beam profiler 46 is retracted from the implantation position, the beam profiler 46 is disposed, for example, at the upper end position 46a.

 ビームプロファイラ46は、スキャンビームSBのビーム電流を測定するためのファラデーカップであるプロファラカップを備える。ビームプロファイラ46は、鉛直方向(y方向)に移動しながらビーム電流を測定することにより、スキャンビームSBのビーム走査範囲の全体にわたってビーム電流を測定できる。ビームプロファイラ46は、スキャンビームSBの鉛直方向(y方向)のビーム電流密度分布を測定する測定装置であってもよい。 The beam profiler 46 is equipped with a profiler cup, which is a Faraday cup for measuring the beam current of the scan beam SB. The beam profiler 46 measures the beam current while moving in the vertical direction (y direction), thereby measuring the beam current throughout the entire beam scanning range of the scan beam SB. The beam profiler 46 may also be a measurement device that measures the beam current density distribution in the vertical direction (y direction) of the scan beam SB.

 ビームプロファイラ46は、スキャンビームSBの角度情報を測定するための角度測定装置を備えてもよい。角度測定装置は、スキャンビームSBの水平方向(x方向)の角度情報を測定可能な第1角度測定装置と、スキャンビームSBの鉛直方向(y方向)の角度情報を測定可能な第2角度測定装置とを備えてもよい。ビームプロファイラ46は、x方向の角度情報およびy方向の角度情報を測定する測定装置であってもよく、角度情報として、角度重心や収束/発散角度などを測定してもよい。 Beam profiler 46 may be equipped with an angle measurement device for measuring angular information of scan beam SB. The angle measurement device may be equipped with a first angle measurement device capable of measuring angular information in the horizontal direction (x direction) of scan beam SB, and a second angle measurement device capable of measuring angular information in the vertical direction (y direction) of scan beam SB. Beam profiler 46 may be a measurement device that measures angular information in the x direction and angular information in the y direction, and may measure angular center of gravity, convergence/divergence angles, etc. as angular information.

 以下、ビームプロファイラ46に用いることのできる角度測定装置について説明する。 Below, we will explain angle measurement devices that can be used with the beam profiler 46.

(第1の実施の形態)
 図15は、第1の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置100の概略構成を示す断面図である。角度測定装置100は、スキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度情報を測定するように構成される。図15は、第1方向がスキャン方向(y方向)と平行である場合を示すが、角度測定装置100が測定する角度情報の方向(つまり、第1方向)は特に限定されず、第1方向がスキャン方向に対して斜めであってもよい。
(First embodiment)
Fig. 15 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an angle measurement device 100 according to the first embodiment. The angle measurement device 100 is configured to measure angular information of the scan beam SB in a first direction. Fig. 15 shows a case where the first direction is parallel to the scan direction (y direction), but the direction of the angular information measured by the angle measurement device 100 (i.e., the first direction) is not particularly limited, and the first direction may be oblique to the scan direction.

 角度測定装置100は、入射開口102を有する入射面104と、出射開口106を有する出射面108と、電極アセンブリ110と、電源112と、電流測定器114とを備える。 The angle measurement device 100 includes an entrance surface 104 having an entrance opening 102, an exit surface 108 having an exit opening 106, an electrode assembly 110, a power supply 112, and a current measuring device 114.

 角度測定装置100は、入射面104を有する前面板116を備えることができる。入射開口102は、前面板116を貫通するように形成される。入射開口102は、入射面104に入射するスキャンビームSBの一部を通過させる。入射開口102は、少なくとも第1方向の開口幅が短い開口形状を有する。 The angle measurement device 100 may include a front plate 116 having an incident surface 104. The incident aperture 102 is formed to penetrate the front plate 116. The incident aperture 102 passes a portion of the scan beam SB that is incident on the incident surface 104. The incident aperture 102 has an aperture shape in which the opening width in at least the first direction is short.

 角度測定装置100は、出射面108を有する背面板118を備えることができる。背面板118は、前面板116からスキャンビームSBの進行方向(つまり、z方向)に離れて配置される。出射開口106は、背面板118を貫通するように形成される。出射開口106は、入射開口102を通過したイオンビームの一部を通過させる。出射開口106は、入射開口102と同様に、少なくとも第1方向の開口幅が短い開口形状を有する。出射開口106は、例えば、スキャンビームSBの進行方向(z方向)に直交するx方向およびy方向の位置が入射開口102と一致するように配置される。 The angle measurement device 100 may include a rear plate 118 having an exit surface 108. The rear plate 118 is positioned away from the front plate 116 in the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (i.e., the z direction). The exit aperture 106 is formed to penetrate the rear plate 118. The exit aperture 106 passes a portion of the ion beam that has passed through the entrance aperture 102. Similar to the entrance aperture 102, the exit aperture 106 has an opening shape with a short opening width in at least the first direction. The exit aperture 106 is positioned, for example, so that its position in the x and y directions perpendicular to the direction of travel of the scan beam SB (z direction) coincides with that of the entrance aperture 102.

 図16(a)は、入射開口102を有する入射面104の概略構成を示す平面図であり、図16(b)は、出射開口106を有する出射面108の概略構成を示す平面図である。入射開口102は、第1方向(例えばy方向)の開口幅w1が短く、第1方向に直交する方向(例えばx方向)の開口幅w2が長いスリット形状を有することができる。入射開口102は、例えば、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向と平行なスリット幅方向を有するスリットである。 Figure 16(a) is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of an incident surface 104 having an incident aperture 102, and Figure 16(b) is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of an exit surface 108 having an exit aperture 106. The incident aperture 102 can have a slit shape with a short opening width w1 in a first direction (e.g., the y direction) and a long opening width w2 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction (e.g., the x direction). The incident aperture 102 is, for example, a slit with a slit width direction parallel to the scanning direction of the scan beam SB.

 入射開口102のスリット幅方向の開口幅w1は、例えば10mm以下、5mm以下または3mm以下である。入射開口102のスリット幅方向の開口幅w1は、例えば0.1mm以上、0.5mm以上または1mm以上である。入射開口102の第1方向に直交するスリット長方向の開口幅w2は、例えばスキャンビームSBのx方向のビーム幅よりも長い。入射開口102のスリット長方向の開口幅w2は、例えば10mm以上、20mm以上または30mm以上である。入射開口102のスリット長方向の開口幅w2は、例えば200mm以下、150mm以下または100mm以下である。 The opening width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit width direction is, for example, 10 mm or less, 5 mm or less, or 3 mm or less. The opening width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit width direction is, for example, 0.1 mm or more, 0.5 mm or more, or 1 mm or more. The opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction perpendicular to the first direction is longer than, for example, the beam width of the scan beam SB in the x direction. The opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction is, for example, 10 mm or more, 20 mm or more, or 30 mm or more. The opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction is, for example, 200 mm or less, 150 mm or less, or 100 mm or less.

 出射開口106は、入射開口102と同様の形状およびサイズを有することができる。出射開口106は、例えば、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向と平行なスリット幅方向を有するスリットである。出射開口106のスリット幅方向の開口幅w3は、入射開口102のスリット幅方向の開口幅w1と同じであってもよい。出射開口106のスリット長方向の開口幅w4は、入射開口102のスリット長方向の開口幅w2と同じであってもよい。 The exit aperture 106 can have the same shape and size as the entrance aperture 102. The exit aperture 106 is, for example, a slit having a slit width direction parallel to the scanning direction of the scan beam SB. The opening width w3 of the exit aperture 106 in the slit width direction may be the same as the opening width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit width direction. The opening width w4 of the exit aperture 106 in the slit length direction may be the same as the opening width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in the slit length direction.

 なお、入射開口102の第1方向に直交する方向の開口幅w2は、スキャンビームSBのビーム幅よりも短くてもよい。入射開口102の第1方向に直交する方向の開口幅w2は、入射開口102の第1方向の開口幅w1と同程度であってもよい。この場合、入射開口102の開口形状は、スリット形状ではなく、方形状または円形状であってもよい。同様に、出射開口106の第1方向に直交する方向の開口幅w4は、スキャンビームSBの第1方向に直交する方向のビーム幅よりも短くてもよい。出射開口106の第1方向に直交する方向の開口幅w4は、出射開口106の第1方向の開口幅w3と同程度であってもよい。この場合、出射開口106の開口形状は、スリット形状ではなく、方形状または円形状であってもよい。 Note that the aperture width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be shorter than the beam width of the scan beam SB. The aperture width w2 of the entrance aperture 102 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be approximately the same as the aperture width w1 of the entrance aperture 102 in the first direction. In this case, the aperture shape of the entrance aperture 102 may be rectangular or circular rather than slit-shaped. Similarly, the aperture width w4 of the exit aperture 106 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be shorter than the beam width of the scan beam SB in the direction perpendicular to the first direction. The aperture width w4 of the exit aperture 106 in a direction perpendicular to the first direction may be approximately the same as the aperture width w3 of the exit aperture 106 in the first direction. In this case, the aperture shape of the exit aperture 106 may be rectangular or circular rather than slit-shaped.

 図15に戻り、電極アセンブリ110は、入射面104と出射面108の間に設けられる。電極アセンブリ110は、入射開口102から出射開口106に向かうイオンビームを挟んで第1方向に対向する第1電極面122および第2電極面124を有する。第1電極面122および第2電極面124は、互いに平行となるように対向する。第1電極面122および第2電極面124の第1方向の対向距離dは、入射開口102および入射面104の第1方向の開口幅w1、w3よりも十分に大きい。ここで「十分に大きい」とは、入射開口102から出射開口106に向かうイオンビームの輸送を阻害しない程度に大きいことを意味する。第1電極面122および第2電極面124の第1方向の対向距離dは、例えば5mm以上、10mm以上または15mm以上である。第1電極面122および第2電極面124の第1方向の対向距離dは、例えば50mm以下、30mm以下または20mm以下である。 Returning to Figure 15, the electrode assembly 110 is disposed between the incident surface 104 and the exit surface 108. The electrode assembly 110 has a first electrode surface 122 and a second electrode surface 124 that face each other in a first direction across the ion beam traveling from the incident aperture 102 to the exit aperture 106. The first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 face each other so as to be parallel to each other. The facing distance d between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 in the first direction is sufficiently larger than the opening widths w1 and w3 in the first direction of the incident aperture 102 and the incident surface 104. Here, "sufficiently large" means large enough not to impede the transport of the ion beam from the incident aperture 102 to the exit aperture 106. The facing distance d between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 in the first direction is, for example, 5 mm or more, 10 mm or more, or 15 mm or more. The opposing distance d in the first direction between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 is, for example, 50 mm or less, 30 mm or less, or 20 mm or less.

 電極アセンブリ110は、第1電極面122を有する第1電極体126と、第2電極面124を有する第2電極体128とを備えることができる。電極アセンブリ110の周囲には、第1電極体126および第2電極体128を包囲するための側板120を設けることができる。側板120は、前面板116から背面板118に向けて筒状に延びるように構成できる。前面板116、背面板118および側板120は、電極アセンブリ110を収容する筐体を構成することができる。前面板116、背面板118および側板120は、接地されてグランド電位を有することができる。 The electrode assembly 110 may include a first electrode body 126 having a first electrode surface 122 and a second electrode body 128 having a second electrode surface 124. A side plate 120 may be provided around the electrode assembly 110 to surround the first electrode body 126 and the second electrode body 128. The side plate 120 may be configured to extend cylindrically from the front plate 116 toward the back plate 118. The front plate 116, back plate 118, and side plate 120 may form a housing that houses the electrode assembly 110. The front plate 116, back plate 118, and side plate 120 may be grounded and have a ground potential.

 電源112は、電極アセンブリ110に電圧を印加し、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間に電位差ΔVを生じさせる。電源112は、可変電圧源であり、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVが可変となるようにする。電源112は、第1電極面122または第1電極体126に結合される第1電源130と、第2電極面124または第2電極体128に結合される第2電源132とを備えることができる。電源112は、第1電源130または第2電源132の一方のみを備えてもよい。この場合、第1電源130または第2電源132が結合されない電極面または電極体は、接地されてグランド電位を有してもよい。 The power source 112 applies a voltage to the electrode assembly 110, generating a potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124. The power source 112 is a variable voltage source, allowing the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 to be variable. The power source 112 may include a first power source 130 coupled to the first electrode surface 122 or the first electrode body 126, and a second power source 132 coupled to the second electrode surface 124 or the second electrode body 128. The power source 112 may include only one of the first power source 130 or the second power source 132. In this case, the electrode surface or electrode body to which the first power source 130 or the second power source 132 is not coupled may be grounded and have ground potential.

 電源112は、例えば、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVが最大で例えば500V以上、1000V以上または2000V以上となるように電圧を印加する。第1電源130および第2電源132のそれぞれは、例えば、最大で1000Vの絶対値となる電圧が印加可能となるように構成される。例えば、第1電源130の印加電圧を-1000Vとし、第2電源132の印加電圧を+1000Vとすることにより、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVを2000Vとすることができる。電源112は、例えば、制御装置18からの指令値に基づいて印加電圧を変化させる。 The power supply 112 applies a voltage such that the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 is, for example, at most 500 V or more, 1000 V or more, or 2000 V or more. The first power supply 130 and the second power supply 132 are each configured to be able to apply a voltage with an absolute value of, for example, up to 1000 V. For example, by setting the applied voltage of the first power supply 130 to -1000 V and the applied voltage of the second power supply 132 to +1000 V, the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 can be 2000 V. The power supply 112 changes the applied voltage based on, for example, a command value from the control device 18.

 電極アセンブリ110および電源112は、入射開口102から出射開口106に向かうイオンビームを偏向させる偏向装置として機能する。図15は、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVに起因する電界Eによって偏向するイオンビームの軌跡151、152、153を示す。電界Eの大きさは、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVおよび対向距離dを用いて、E=ΔV/dと表すことができる。太線で示される軌跡151は、入射開口102および出射開口106の双方を通過可能なイオンビームを示す。細線で示される軌跡152、153は、出射開口106を通過できずに出射面108または背面板118によって遮られるイオンビームを示す。軌跡152に沿ったイオンビームは、軌跡151に沿ったイオンビームに比べて第1方向の角度θyが僅かに大きいために出射開口106を通過できない。また、軌跡153に沿ったイオンビームは、軌跡151に沿ったイオンビームに比べて第1方向の角度θyが僅かに小さいために出射開口106を通過できない。したがって、出射開口106から出射されるイオンビームは、入射開口102における第1方向の角度θyが特定範囲内であるものに限られる。 The electrode assembly 110 and power supply 112 function as a deflection device that deflects the ion beam from the entrance aperture 102 toward the exit aperture 106. Figure 15 shows trajectories 151, 152, and 153 of an ion beam deflected by the electric field E caused by the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124. The magnitude of the electric field E can be expressed as E = ΔV/d, using the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 and the opposing distance d. The trajectory 151 shown by the thick line represents an ion beam that can pass through both the entrance aperture 102 and the exit aperture 106. The trajectories 152 and 153 shown by the thin lines represent ion beams that cannot pass through the exit aperture 106 and are blocked by the exit surface 108 or the back plate 118. The ion beam along trajectory 152 cannot pass through the exit aperture 106 because the angle θy in the first direction is slightly larger than that of the ion beam along trajectory 151. Furthermore, the ion beam along trajectory 153 cannot pass through the exit aperture 106 because the angle θy in the first direction is slightly smaller than that of the ion beam along trajectory 151. Therefore, the ion beams that are extracted from the exit aperture 106 are limited to those whose angle θy in the first direction at the entrance aperture 102 is within a specific range.

 出射開口106から出射されるイオンビームが入射開口102において有する第1方向の角度θyは、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電界Eすなわち電位差ΔVによって変化する。したがって、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVを変化させることによって、出射開口106から出射されるイオンビームが入射開口102において有する第1方向の角度θyを変化させることができる。 The angle θy of the first direction that the ion beam emitted from the exit aperture 106 has at the entrance aperture 102 varies depending on the electric field E, i.e., the potential difference ΔV, between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124. Therefore, by changing the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124, it is possible to change the angle θy of the first direction that the ion beam emitted from the exit aperture 106 has at the entrance aperture 102.

 電流測定器114は、出射開口106を通過したイオンビームを検出してビーム電流値を測定する。電流測定器114は、イオンビームを検出するためのファラデーカップ134と、ファラデーカップ134に結合される電流計136とを備える。電流測定器114は、出射面108とファラデーカップ134の間に配置されるサプレッション電極138をさらに備えることができる。サプレッション電極138は、所定のサプレッション電圧を印加するためのサプレッション電源140に結合される。サプレッション電極138は、出射開口106からファラデーカップ134に向かうイオンビームを通過させる通過開口142を有する。通過開口142は、出射開口106からファラデーカップ134に向かうイオンビームを遮らないように、出射開口106よりも十分に大きなサイズの開口形状を有する。なお、電子の移動を抑制するためのサプレッション電場を印加する構成に代えて、電子の移動を抑制するためのサプレッション磁場が印加される構成が採用されてもよい。 The current measuring device 114 detects the ion beam that has passed through the exit aperture 106 and measures the beam current value. The current measuring device 114 includes a Faraday cup 134 for detecting the ion beam and an ammeter 136 coupled to the Faraday cup 134. The current measuring device 114 may further include a suppression electrode 138 disposed between the exit surface 108 and the Faraday cup 134. The suppression electrode 138 is coupled to a suppression power supply 140 for applying a predetermined suppression voltage. The suppression electrode 138 has a passage opening 142 that allows the ion beam to pass from the exit aperture 106 toward the Faraday cup 134. The passage opening 142 has an opening shape that is sufficiently larger than the exit aperture 106 so as not to obstruct the ion beam traveling from the exit aperture 106 toward the Faraday cup 134. Note that instead of a configuration in which a suppression electric field is applied to suppress the movement of electrons, a configuration in which a suppression magnetic field is applied to suppress the movement of electrons may be employed.

 角度測定装置100は、測定制御装置144をさらに備えることができる。測定制御装置144は、プロセッサ144aと、メモリ144bとを備える。測定制御装置144は、例えば、メモリ144bに格納された所定のプログラムをプロセッサ144aが実行することにより、所定のプログラムにしたがって角度測定装置100の動作全般を制御する。測定制御装置144は、例えば、上述の制御装置18と同様に構成されることができる。角度測定装置100は、測定制御装置144に加えてまたは代えて、制御装置18によって動作が制御されてもよい。 The angle measurement device 100 may further include a measurement control device 144. The measurement control device 144 includes a processor 144a and a memory 144b. The measurement control device 144 controls the overall operation of the angle measurement device 100 in accordance with a predetermined program, for example, by having the processor 144a execute the predetermined program stored in the memory 144b. The measurement control device 144 may be configured, for example, in the same manner as the control device 18 described above. The operation of the angle measurement device 100 may be controlled by the control device 18 in addition to or instead of the measurement control device 144.

 測定制御装置144は、電源112の印加電圧を設定するための指令値を出力する。測定制御装置144は、例えば、電極アセンブリ110に可変電圧を印加するための指令値を出力し、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVの値を時間変化させる。測定制御装置144は、例えば、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVの値を周期的に変化させるための指令値を出力してもよい。測定制御装置144は、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVの時系列値を示す指令値を出力してもよい。 The measurement control device 144 outputs a command value for setting the applied voltage of the power supply 112. The measurement control device 144, for example, outputs a command value for applying a variable voltage to the electrode assembly 110, thereby changing the value of the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 over time. The measurement control device 144 may, for example, output a command value for periodically changing the value of the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124. The measurement control device 144 may output a command value that indicates the time series value of the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124.

 測定制御装置144は、電流測定器114によって測定されるビーム電流値Iを取得する。測定制御装置144は、指令値に基づく第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVの値と、取得したビーム電流値Iとを用いて、スキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度情報を算出する。測定制御装置144は、例えば、スキャンビームSBのビームエネルギーと、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVの値とを用いて、電流測定器114によって検出されるイオンビームが入射開口102において有する第1方向の角度θyを算出する。測定制御装置144は、算出した角度θyと取得したビーム電流値とを対応付けることにより、スキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度成分の強度を算出する。測定制御装置144は、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の複数の電位差ΔVi(i=1~n)の値と、複数の電位差ΔViの値に対応する複数のビーム電流値Ii(i=1~n)とを対応付けることにより、スキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度分布を算出できる。 The measurement control device 144 acquires the beam current value I measured by the current measuring device 114. The measurement control device 144 calculates angular information of the first direction of the scan beam SB using the value of the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 based on the command value and the acquired beam current value I. The measurement control device 144 calculates the angle θy in the first direction that the ion beam detected by the current measuring device 114 has at the entrance aperture 102, for example, using the beam energy of the scan beam SB and the value of the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124. The measurement control device 144 calculates the intensity of the angular component of the first direction of the scan beam SB by correlating the calculated angle θy with the acquired beam current value. The measurement control device 144 can calculate the angular distribution of the scan beam SB in the first direction by associating multiple potential difference ΔVi (i = 1 to n) values between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 with multiple beam current values Ii (i = 1 to n) corresponding to the multiple potential difference ΔVi values.

 測定制御装置144は、スキャンビームSBのスキャン周期Tsに対応させて、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVの値を変化させてもよい。測定制御装置144は、スキャンビームSBが角度測定装置100(具体的には入射面104)に入射するタイミングにおいて、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVを固定してもよい。言い換えれば、測定制御装置144は、スキャンビームSBが角度測定装置100(具体的には入射面104)に入射していないタイミングにおいて、第1電極面122と第2電極面124の間の電位差ΔVを変化させてもよい。 The measurement control device 144 may change the value of the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 in accordance with the scan period Ts of the scan beam SB. The measurement control device 144 may fix the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 at the timing when the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100 (specifically, the incident surface 104). In other words, the measurement control device 144 may change the potential difference ΔV between the first electrode surface 122 and the second electrode surface 124 at the timing when the scan beam SB is not incident on the angle measurement device 100 (specifically, the incident surface 104).

 図17は、スキャンビームSBのスキャン電圧波形Vs(t)および角度測定装置100における電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)の一例を示すグラフである。グラフの縦軸は電圧値Vであり、スキャン電圧Vsおよび電位差ΔVのそれぞれの絶対値の最大値を規格化してVmaxとしている。スキャン電圧波形Vs(t)のスキャン周期Tsに対応するスキャン周波数fs(=1/Ts)は、例えば10Hz以上または100Hz以上であり、例えば100kHz以下または10kHz以下である。スキャン周波数fsの一例は、1kHzである。 Figure 17 is a graph showing an example of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) of the scan beam SB and the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference in the angle measurement device 100. The vertical axis of the graph is the voltage value V, and the maximum absolute values of the scan voltage Vs and the potential difference ΔV are normalized to Vmax. The scan frequency fs (= 1/Ts) corresponding to the scan period Ts of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) is, for example, 10 Hz or more or 100 Hz or more, and, for example, 100 kHz or less or 10 kHz or less. An example of the scan frequency fs is 1 kHz.

 図17は、角度測定装置100にスキャンビームSBが入射する測定タイミングtj(例えば、j=1~2n)を黒丸で表している。図17の例では、角度測定装置100がスキャンビームSBのスキャン方向(つまりy方向)の中心に位置しており、スキャン電圧Vs=0となるときにスキャンビームSBが角度測定装置100に入射する。なお、角度測定装置100の位置は特に限られず、スキャン電圧Vsが0ではない特定の値となるタイミングにおいてスキャンビームSBが角度測定装置100に入射するように角度測定装置100が配置されてもよい。 In Figure 17, the measurement timing tj (for example, j = 1 to 2n) at which the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100 is represented by a black circle. In the example of Figure 17, the angle measurement device 100 is positioned at the center of the scan direction (i.e., the y direction) of the scan beam SB, and the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100 when the scan voltage Vs = 0. The position of the angle measurement device 100 is not particularly limited, and the angle measurement device 100 may be positioned so that the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100 at the timing when the scan voltage Vs becomes a specific value other than 0.

 角度測定装置100における電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)は、スキャン周期Tsに対応して段階的に変化する。電位差ΔV(t)の値は、角度測定装置100にスキャンビームSBが入射する測定タイミングtjにおいて固定され、測定タイミングtjとは異なるタイミングにおいて変更される。図17の例では、スキャン電圧Vs=-Vmaxとなるタイミングにおいて電位差ΔVの値が変更される。なお、電位差ΔVの値が変更されるタイミングは特に限られず、測定タイミングtjとは異なる任意のタイミングを選択することができ、例えばスキャン電圧Vs=+Vmaxとなるタイミングとしてもよい。 The time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference in the angle measurement device 100 changes in stages corresponding to the scan period Ts. The value of the potential difference ΔV(t) is fixed at the measurement timing tj when the scan beam SB is incident on the angle measurement device 100, and is changed at a timing different from the measurement timing tj. In the example of Figure 17, the value of the potential difference ΔV is changed at the timing when the scan voltage Vs = -Vmax. Note that the timing when the value of the potential difference ΔV is changed is not particularly limited, and any timing different from the measurement timing tj can be selected; for example, it may be the timing when the scan voltage Vs = +Vmax.

 図17の例では、1回のスキャン周期Tsごとに電位差ΔVの値が変更され、-Vmaxから+Vmaxに向けて15段階の電圧値が設定されている。図17の例では、電位差ΔVの値が-Vmaxから+Vmaxに向けて変化する過程のみが示されているが、逆にVmaxから-Vmaxに変化させてもよいし、-Vmaxから+Vmaxに向けて変化させた後に+Vmaxから-Vmaxに変化させてもよい。その他、-Vmaxから+Vmaxの間で電位差ΔVを繰り返し変化させてもよい。電位差ΔVの値が-Vmaxから+Vmaxに変化する時間は、電位差ΔVを変化させる偏向周期Tdの半分(Td/2)に相当する。図17の例では、偏向周期Tdは、スキャン周期Tsの28倍(つまり、Td=28×Ts)となる。したがって、偏向周期Tdに対応する偏向周波数fd(=1/Td)は、スキャン周波数fsの1/28となる。 In the example of Figure 17, the value of the potential difference ΔV is changed every scan period Ts, with 15 voltage levels set from -Vmax to +Vmax. While the example of Figure 17 only shows the process of the potential difference ΔV changing from -Vmax to +Vmax, it may also change conversely from Vmax to -Vmax, or from -Vmax to +Vmax and then from +Vmax to -Vmax. Alternatively, the potential difference ΔV may be repeatedly changed between -Vmax and +Vmax. The time it takes for the potential difference ΔV to change from -Vmax to +Vmax corresponds to half (Td/2) of the deflection period Td over which the potential difference ΔV is changed. In the example of Figure 17, the deflection period Td is 28 times the scan period Ts (i.e., Td = 28 x Ts). Therefore, the deflection frequency fd (= 1/Td) corresponding to the deflection period Td is 1/28 of the scan frequency fs.

 電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)に設定される電圧値の段階数は、特に限られないが、例えば10以上、15以上または20以上とすることができ、例えば100以下、50以下または30以下とすることができる。段階数を増やすことにより、測定精度(例えば、角度分解能)を高めることができるが、測定に要する時間が増加する。したがって、電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)の段階数は、必要とされる角度分解能および測定時間のバランスに応じて適宜設定することができる。また、1回のスキャン周期Tsごとに電位差ΔVの値を変更する代わりに、スキャン周期Tsの半分ごとに電位差ΔVの値を変更してもよい。この場合、測定に要する時間を短縮化できる。その他、スキャン周期Tsの整数倍(例えばk・Ts)ごとに電位差ΔVの値を変更してもよい。この場合、一つの段階におけるスキャンビームSBの測定回数が増えるため、測定精度を向上できる。偏向周波数fdは、例えば、スキャン周波数fsの1/1000以上、1/500以上または1/200以上に設定することができ、例えば、スキャン周波数fsの1/10以下、1/20以下または1/50以下に設定できる。偏向周波数fdの一例は、スキャン周波数fsの1/100程度であり、例えば10Hz程度である。偏向周波数fdは、スキャン周波数fsとは異なるように設定されることが好ましい。 The number of voltage value steps set in the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 10 or more, 15 or more, or 20 or more, or, for example, 100 or less, 50 or less, or 30 or less. Increasing the number of steps can improve measurement accuracy (e.g., angular resolution), but increases the time required for measurement. Therefore, the number of steps in the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference can be set appropriately depending on the required balance between angular resolution and measurement time. Furthermore, instead of changing the value of the potential difference ΔV every scan period Ts, the value of the potential difference ΔV may be changed every half of the scan period Ts. In this case, the time required for measurement can be shortened. Alternatively, the value of the potential difference ΔV may be changed every integer multiple of the scan period Ts (e.g., k·Ts). In this case, the number of measurements of the scan beam SB in one period increases, thereby improving measurement accuracy. The deflection frequency fd can be set, for example, to 1/1000 or more, 1/500 or more, or 1/200 or more of the scan frequency fs, or to 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, or 1/50 or less of the scan frequency fs. An example of the deflection frequency fd is about 1/100 of the scan frequency fs, for example, about 10 Hz. It is preferable that the deflection frequency fd be set differently from the scan frequency fs.

 図18(a)は、角度測定装置100にて検出されるビーム電流の時間波形I(t)の一例を示すグラフである。図18(a)は、図17に示される電位差ΔVの時間波形を適用した場合のビーム電流の時間波形I(t)に相当する。ビーム電流の時間波形I(t)は、複数の測定タイミングtjのそれぞれにて測定されるパルス状のビーム電流Ijの時系列値によって構成される。図18(a)の例では、電位差ΔVi(=ΔV(t))の値が固定される間にスキャンビームSBが往復で1回ずつ(合計2回)角度測定装置100に入射するため、特定の電位差ΔViの値に対して二つのパルス状のビーム電流Ijが測定される。この二つのビーム電流値Ijを用いて、例えばこれらを合計または平均することにより、特定の電位差ΔViの値に対応するビーム電流値Iiを得ることができる。さらに、電位差ΔViを角度θyiに変換することにより、角度θyiに対応するビーム電流値Iiを得ることができる。図18(b)は、図18(a)のビーム電流の時間波形I(t)を用いて算出したスキャンビームの角度分布の一例を示すグラフであり、例えば、破線156で示されるような角度分布を算出できる。 18(a) is a graph showing an example of the time waveform I(t) of the beam current detected by the angle measurement device 100. FIG. 18(a) corresponds to the time waveform I(t) of the beam current when the time waveform of the potential difference ΔV shown in FIG. 17 is applied. The time waveform I(t) of the beam current is composed of time series values of the pulsed beam current Ij measured at each of multiple measurement timings tj. In the example of FIG. 18(a), the scan beam SB enters the angle measurement device 100 once in a round trip (twice in total) while the value of the potential difference ΔVi (= ΔV(t)) is fixed, so two pulsed beam currents Ij are measured for a specific value of the potential difference ΔVi. Using these two beam current values Ij, for example, by summing or averaging them, the beam current value Ii corresponding to a specific value of the potential difference ΔVi can be obtained. Furthermore, by converting the potential difference ΔVi to an angle θyi, the beam current value Ii corresponding to the angle θyi can be obtained. Figure 18(b) is a graph showing an example of the angular distribution of the scan beam calculated using the time waveform I(t) of the beam current in Figure 18(a); for example, an angular distribution such as that shown by the dashed line 156 can be calculated.

 本実施の形態によれば、スキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度情報を高精度に短時間で取得できる。角度測定装置100に入射するスキャンビームSBは、角度測定装置100の上流に配置されるビーム走査部28(ビーム走査装置ともいう)によって往復スキャンされているため、角度測定装置100を移動させなくてもビーム全体を測定できる。また、角度分布の取得に必要となる偏向周期Tdを1秒以下または0.1秒以下にすることができるため、非常に短い時間でスキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度分布を測定できる。また、電位差ΔViの段階数を増やすことにより角度分解能を向上できるため、複数の電極体を並べて角度分布を測定する従来の構成に比べて測定精度を向上できる。 According to this embodiment, angular information in the first direction of the scan beam SB can be obtained with high precision in a short time. The scan beam SB incident on the angle measurement device 100 is scanned back and forth by the beam scanning unit 28 (also called a beam scanning device) located upstream of the angle measurement device 100, so the entire beam can be measured without moving the angle measurement device 100. Furthermore, the deflection period Td required to obtain the angular distribution can be set to 1 second or less or 0.1 seconds or less, so the angular distribution in the first direction of the scan beam SB can be measured in an extremely short time. Furthermore, because the angular resolution can be improved by increasing the number of stages of the potential difference ΔVi, measurement accuracy can be improved compared to conventional configurations in which multiple electrode bodies are arranged to measure the angular distribution.

 上述の実施の形態では、偏向周波数fdをスキャン周波数fsよりも小さくする、つまり、偏向周期Tdがスキャン周期Tsよりも大きい場合について示した。変形例においては、偏向周波数fdをスキャン周波数fsよりも大きくしてもよく、偏向周期Tdがスキャン周期Tsよりも小さくてもよい。例えば、スキャン周波数fsを10Hz以下などの小さな値とし、偏向周波数fdをスキャン周波数fsの例えば10倍以上、20倍以上または50倍以上とし、例えば1000倍以下、500倍以下または200倍以下としてもよい。偏向周波数fdは、例えば100Hz以上、500Hz以上または1kHz以上であってもよく、例えば100kHz以下、50kH以下または10kHz以下であってもよい。この場合、スキャンビームSBが往復または片道でスキャンされる間に複数の電位差ΔViに対応する複数のビーム電流値Iiを取得することができる。したがって、この場合であっても、1秒以下または0.1秒以下のスキャン周期Tsの間にスキャンビームSBの第1方向の角度分布を測定できる。この場合、偏向周波数fdは、スキャン周波数fsの整数倍とならないように設定されてもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the deflection frequency fd is smaller than the scan frequency fs, i.e., the deflection period Td is greater than the scan period Ts. In a modified example, the deflection frequency fd may be greater than the scan frequency fs, or the deflection period Td may be smaller than the scan period Ts. For example, the scan frequency fs may be a small value such as 10 Hz or less, and the deflection frequency fd may be, for example, 10 times or more, 20 times or more, or 50 times or more of the scan frequency fs, or, for example, 1000 times or less, 500 times or less, or 200 times or less. The deflection frequency fd may be, for example, 100 Hz or more, 500 Hz or more, or 1 kHz or more, or, for example, 100 kHz or less, 50 kHz or less, or 10 kHz or less. In this case, multiple beam current values Ii corresponding to multiple potential differences ΔVi can be obtained while the scan beam SB is scanned back and forth or one way. Therefore, even in this case, the angular distribution of the scan beam SB in the first direction can be measured during a scan period Ts of 1 second or less or 0.1 seconds or less. In this case, the deflection frequency fd may be set so as not to be an integer multiple of the scan frequency fs.

 上述の実施の形態では、スキャン電圧波形Vs(t)が三角波である場合を示したが、スキャン電圧波形Vs(t)の形状は特に問わず、正弦波であってもよいし、三角波または正弦波を変調したものであってもよいし、階段状に変化する波形であってもよい。また、上述の実施の形態では、電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)が階段状に変化する場合を示したが、電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)の形状は問わず、三角波であってもよいし、正弦波であってもよいし、三角波または正弦波を変調したものであってもよい。スキャン電圧波形Vs(t)および電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)のそれぞれは、階段状の波形、三角波、正弦波、三角波または正弦波を変調したもの等に代表される周期的に変化する任意の波形であってもよく、電位差の時間波形ΔV(t)の偏向周波数fdが、スキャン電圧波形Vs(t)のスキャン周波数fsの整数倍とならないように、かつ、スキャン周波数fsが、偏向周波数fdの整数倍とならないように設定されてもよい。 In the above embodiment, the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) is a triangular wave, but the shape of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t) is not particularly limited and may be a sine wave, a modulated triangular wave or sine wave, or a waveform that changes in a stepwise manner. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference is shown to change in a stepwise manner, but the shape of the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference is not particularly limited and may be a triangular wave, a sine wave, or a modulated triangular wave or sine wave. The scan voltage waveform Vs(t) and the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference may each be any periodically changing waveform, such as a stepwise waveform, a triangular wave, a sine wave, or a modulated triangular wave or sine wave. The deflection frequency fd of the time waveform ΔV(t) of the potential difference may be set so that it is not an integer multiple of the scan frequency fs of the scan voltage waveform Vs(t), and the scan frequency fs may not be an integer multiple of the deflection frequency fd.

 上述の実施の形態では、スキャンビームSBを測定対象とする場合について説明したが、角度測定装置100は、ビーム走査装置によってスキャンされていないイオンビームを測定対象としてもよい。この場合、スキャンされていないイオンビームの全体を測定対象とするために、角度測定装置100をスキャン方向(y方向)に移動させることと組み合わせてイオンビームの測定を実行してもよい。また、角度測定装置100をスキャン方向(y方向)に移動させることと組み合わせて、スキャンビームSBの測定を実行してもよい。 In the above embodiment, the case where the scanned beam SB is the measurement target has been described, but the angle measurement device 100 may also measure an ion beam that is not scanned by a beam scanning device. In this case, in order to measure the entire ion beam that is not scanned, the measurement of the ion beam may be performed in combination with moving the angle measurement device 100 in the scan direction (y direction). Furthermore, the measurement of the scanned beam SB may be performed in combination with moving the angle measurement device 100 in the scan direction (y direction).

(第2の実施の形態)
 第2の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置は、第1の実施の形態と同様、入射面と、出射面と、電極アセンブリと、電源と、電流測定器とを備える。第2の実施の形態では、入射面に複数の入射開口が設けられ、出射面に複数の出射開口が設けられる点で、上述の第1の実施の形態と相違する。以下、第2の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置について、第1の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点については説明を適宜省略する。
Second Embodiment
The angle measurement device according to the second embodiment, like the first embodiment, includes an incident surface, an exit surface, an electrode assembly, a power supply, and a current measuring device. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that multiple incident openings are provided on the incident surface and multiple exit openings are provided on the exit surface. The angle measurement device according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, and a description of the commonalities will be omitted as appropriate.

 図19および図20は、第2の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置200の概略構成を示す平面図である。図19は、複数の入射開口202a、202b、202cを有する入射面204をビーム進行方向(z方向)の上流側から見た図を示す。複数の入射開口202a~202cは、測定範囲DにおいてスキャンビームSBのスキャン方向に直交する方向(x方向)に並んで配置される。複数の入射開口202a~202cが設けられるx方向の開口範囲D1、D2、D3は、x方向に隙間なく連続し、かつ、x方向おいて重ならないように設定される。複数の入射開口202a~202cは、入射面204を有する前面板216を貫通するように形成される。 Figures 19 and 20 are plan views showing the schematic configuration of an angle measurement device 200 according to the second embodiment. Figure 19 shows an incident surface 204 having multiple incident apertures 202a, 202b, and 202c, viewed from the upstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction). The multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c are arranged side by side in the direction (x direction) perpendicular to the scanning direction of the scan beam SB in the measurement range D. The x-direction aperture ranges D1, D2, and D3 in which the multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c are provided are set to be continuous with no gaps in the x direction and not overlap in the x direction. The multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c are formed to penetrate a front panel 216 having the incident surface 204.

 複数の入射開口202a~202cは、スキャン方向(y方向)に対して斜めであるp方向の開口幅w1a、w1b、w1cが短く、p方向に直交するq方向の開口幅w2a、w2b、w2cが長いスリット形状を有する。複数の入射開口202a~202cのスリット幅方向(つまり、p方向)の開口幅w1a~w1cは、互いに共通である。複数の入射開口202a~202cのスリット長方向(q方向)の開口幅w2a、w2b、w2cは、互いに共通であってもよいし、異なってもよい。図19の例では、中央に配置される第2入射開口202bのスリット長方向の開口幅w2bは、左右に配置される第1入射開口202aおよび第3入射開口202cのスリット長方向の開口幅w2a、w2cよりも長い。 The multiple incident apertures 202a-202c have a slit shape with short aperture widths w1a, w1b, and w1c in the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction), and long aperture widths w2a, w2b, and w2c in the q direction, which is perpendicular to the p direction. The multiple incident apertures 202a-202c have the same aperture widths w1a-w1c in the slit width direction (i.e., p direction). The multiple incident apertures 202a-202c have the same aperture widths w2a, w2b, and w2c in the slit length direction (q direction) as the multiple incident apertures 202a-202c. In the example of Figure 19, the aperture width w2b in the slit length direction of the second incident aperture 202b located in the center is longer than the aperture widths w2a and w2c in the slit length direction of the first and third incident apertures 202a and 202c located on either side of them.

 図20は、複数の出射開口206a、206b、206cを有する出射面208をビーム進行方向(z方向)の下流側から見た図を示す。複数の出射開口206a~206cは、対応する入射開口202a~202cと同様の形状およびサイズを有することができる。複数の出射開口206a~206cは、スキャンビームSBの進行方向に直交するx方向およびy方向の位置が対応する入射開口202a~202cと一致するように配置される。複数の出射開口206a~206cのスリット幅方向の開口幅w3a、w3b、w3cは、対応する入射開口202a~202cのスリット幅方向の開口幅w1a~w1cと同じであってもよい。複数の出射開口206a~206cのスリット長方向の開口幅w4a、w4b、w4cは、対応する入射開口202a~202cのスリット長方向の開口幅w2a~w2cと同じであってもよい。 Figure 20 shows an exit surface 208 having multiple exit apertures 206a, 206b, and 206c, viewed from the downstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction). The multiple exit apertures 206a-206c can have the same shape and size as the corresponding entrance apertures 202a-202c. The multiple exit apertures 206a-206c are arranged so that their positions in the x and y directions perpendicular to the propagation direction of the scan beam SB coincide with the corresponding entrance apertures 202a-202c. The opening widths w3a, w3b, and w3c in the slit width direction of the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c may be the same as the opening widths w1a-w1c in the slit width direction of the corresponding entrance apertures 202a-202c. The opening widths w4a, w4b, and w4c in the slit length direction of the multiple exit openings 206a to 206c may be the same as the opening widths w2a to w2c in the slit length direction of the corresponding entrance openings 202a to 202c.

 図19および図20に示す例では、角度測定装置200は、三つの入射開口202a~202cおよび三つの出射開口206a~206cを備える。すなわち、角度測定装置200は、入射面204に設けられる第1入射開口202a、第2入射開口202bおよび第3入射開口202cを備え、出射面208に設けられる第1出射開口206a、第2出射開口206bおよび第3出射開口206cを備える。なお、角度測定装置200が備える複数の入射開口および複数の出射開口のそれぞれの個数は3個に限られず、2個であってもよいし、4個以上であってもよい。 In the example shown in Figures 19 and 20, the angle measurement device 200 has three entrance openings 202a-202c and three exit openings 206a-206c. That is, the angle measurement device 200 has a first entrance opening 202a, a second entrance opening 202b, and a third entrance opening 202c provided on the entrance surface 204, and a first exit opening 206a, a second exit opening 206b, and a third exit opening 206c provided on the exit surface 208. Note that the number of each of the multiple entrance openings and multiple exit openings provided in the angle measurement device 200 is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.

 図19および図20に示す例において、複数の入射開口202a~202cおよび複数の出射開口206a~206cのスリット幅方向(p方向)とスキャン方向(y方向)の間の角度θ1は、45度である。なお、スリット幅方向(p方向)とスキャン方向(y方向)の間の角度θ1は特に限られず、例えば5度以上、15度以上または30度以上であってもよく、例えば85度以下、75度以下または60度以下であってもよい。 In the example shown in Figures 19 and 20, the angle θ1 between the slit width direction (p direction) and the scanning direction (y direction) of the multiple entrance apertures 202a-202c and the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c is 45 degrees. Note that the angle θ1 between the slit width direction (p direction) and the scanning direction (y direction) is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 5 degrees or more, 15 degrees or more, or 30 degrees or more, or may be, for example, 85 degrees or less, 75 degrees or less, or 60 degrees or less.

 図21は、第2の実施の形態に係る電極アセンブリ210の概略構成を示す断面図である。電極アセンブリ210は、入射面204と出射面208の間に配置される。図21は、上述の図15とは異なり、スキャンビームSBの進行方向(z方向)に直交する断面視を示す。図21では、複数の入射開口202a~202cの位置を破線で示している。 Figure 21 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 210 according to the second embodiment. The electrode assembly 210 is disposed between the incident surface 204 and the exit surface 208. Unlike Figure 15 described above, Figure 21 shows a cross-sectional view perpendicular to the direction of travel (z direction) of the scan beam SB. In Figure 21, the positions of multiple entrance apertures 202a-202c are indicated by dashed lines.

 電極アセンブリ210は、第1電極面222aと、第2電極面224aと、第3電極面224bと、第4電極面222bと、第5電極面222cと、第6電極面224cとを有する。第1電極面222aおよび第2電極面224aは、第1入射開口202aから第1出射開口206aに向かうイオンビームを挟んで第1方向に第1距離d1で対向する。第1方向は、第1入射開口202aのスリット幅方向(p方向)と平行である。第3電極面224bおよび第4電極面222bは、第2入射開口202bから第2出射開口206bに向かうイオンビームを挟んで第2方向に第2距離d2で対向する。第2方向は、第2入射開口202bのスリット幅方向(p方向)と平行である。第5電極面222cおよび第6電極面224cは、第3入射開口202cから第3出射開口206cに向かうイオンビームを挟んで第3方向に第3距離d3で対向する。第3方向は、第3入射開口202cのスリット幅方向(p方向)と平行である。したがって、図21に示す例において、第1方向、第2方向および第3方向は、互いに平行である。また、第1距離d1、第2距離d2および第3距離d3は、互いに同じである。 The electrode assembly 210 has a first electrode surface 222a, a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, a fourth electrode surface 222b, a fifth electrode surface 222c, and a sixth electrode surface 224c. The first electrode surface 222a and the second electrode surface 224a face each other at a first distance d1 in a first direction across the ion beam traveling from the first entrance aperture 202a to the first exit aperture 206a. The first direction is parallel to the slit width direction (p direction) of the first entrance aperture 202a. The third electrode surface 224b and the fourth electrode surface 222b face each other at a second distance d2 in a second direction across the ion beam traveling from the second entrance aperture 202b to the second exit aperture 206b. The second direction is parallel to the slit width direction (p direction) of the second entrance aperture 202b. The fifth electrode surface 222c and the sixth electrode surface 224c face each other at a third distance d3 in the third direction, across the ion beam traveling from the third entrance aperture 202c to the third exit aperture 206c. The third direction is parallel to the slit width direction (direction p) of the third entrance aperture 202c. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 21 , the first direction, second direction, and third direction are parallel to one another. Furthermore, the first distance d1, second distance d2, and third distance d3 are the same.

 電極アセンブリ210には、電源112が接続される。電源112は、第1の実施の形態と同様に構成される。電源112は、互いに対向する二つの電極面の間に電位差を生じさせる。電源112は、第1電極面222aおよび第2電極面224aの間に第1電位差を生じさせ、第3電極面224bおよび第4電極面222bの間に第2電位差を生じさせ、第5電極面222cおよび第6電極面224cの間に第3電位差を生じさせる。 A power supply 112 is connected to the electrode assembly 210. The power supply 112 is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The power supply 112 generates a potential difference between two opposing electrode surfaces. The power supply 112 generates a first potential difference between the first electrode surface 222a and the second electrode surface 224a, a second potential difference between the third electrode surface 224b and the fourth electrode surface 222b, and a third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 222c and the sixth electrode surface 224c.

 電極アセンブリ210は、第1電極体226と、第2電極体228とを備える。第1電極体226は、第1電極面222a、第4電極面222bおよび第5電極面222cを有する。第2電極体228は、第2電極面224a、第3電極面224bおよび第6電極面224cを有する。第1電極体226には第1電源130が結合され、第2電極体228には第2電源132が結合される。この場合、第1電位差、第2電位差および第3電位差の大きさは同じである。しかしながら、対向する二つの電極面の間に生じる電界の方向は異なりうる。第1電極面222aおよび第2電極面224aの間の第1電位差に基づく第1電界Eaの方向は、第5電極面222cおよび第6電極面224cの間の第3電位差に基づく第3電界Ecの方向と同じであるが、第3電極面224bおよび第4電極面222bの間の第2電位差に基づく第2電界Ebの方向と反対(または反平行)である。 The electrode assembly 210 comprises a first electrode body 226 and a second electrode body 228. The first electrode body 226 has a first electrode surface 222a, a fourth electrode surface 222b, and a fifth electrode surface 222c. The second electrode body 228 has a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, and a sixth electrode surface 224c. A first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 226, and a second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 228. In this case, the magnitudes of the first potential difference, the second potential difference, and the third potential difference are the same. However, the direction of the electric field generated between the two opposing electrode surfaces may be different. The direction of the first electric field Ea based on the first potential difference between the first electrode surface 222a and the second electrode surface 224a is the same as the direction of the third electric field Ec based on the third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 222c and the sixth electrode surface 224c, but is opposite (or antiparallel to) the direction of the second electric field Eb based on the second potential difference between the third electrode surface 224b and the fourth electrode surface 222b.

 電極アセンブリ210の周囲には、第1電極体226および第2電極体228を包囲するための側板220を設けることができる。側板220は、前面板216から背面板218に向けて筒状に延びるように構成できる。前面板216、背面板218および側板220は、電極アセンブリ210を収容する筐体を構成することができる。前面板216、背面板218および側板220は、接地されてグランド電位を有することができる。 A side plate 220 may be provided around the electrode assembly 210 to enclose the first electrode body 226 and the second electrode body 228. The side plate 220 may be configured to extend cylindrically from the front plate 216 toward the rear plate 218. The front plate 216, rear plate 218, and side plate 220 may form a housing that houses the electrode assembly 210. The front plate 216, rear plate 218, and side plate 220 may be grounded and have a ground potential.

 図22は、第2の実施の形態に係る電流測定器214の概略構成を示す平面図である。電流測定器214は、複数の電流測定器214a、214b、214cを備える。複数の電流測定器214a~214cは、対応する出射開口206a~206cを通過したイオンビームを検出してビーム電流値を測定するように構成される。図21では、複数の出射開口206a~206cの位置を破線で示している。 Figure 22 is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of the current measuring device 214 according to the second embodiment. The current measuring device 214 comprises multiple current measuring devices 214a, 214b, and 214c. The multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c are configured to detect ion beams that have passed through the corresponding exit apertures 206a-206c and measure the beam current values. In Figure 21, the positions of the multiple exit apertures 206a-206c are indicated by dashed lines.

 電流測定器214は、第1電流測定器214aと、第2電流測定器214bと、第3電流測定器214cとを備えることができる。第1電流測定器214aは、第1出射開口206aから出射するイオンビームを検出して第1ビーム電流値を測定する。第2電流測定器214bは、第2出射開口206bから出射するイオンビームを検出して第2ビーム電流値を測定する。第3電流測定器214cは、第3出射開口206cから出射するイオンビームを検出して第3ビーム電流値を測定する。 The current measuring device 214 may include a first current measuring device 214a, a second current measuring device 214b, and a third current measuring device 214c. The first current measuring device 214a detects the ion beam emitted from the first exit aperture 206a and measures the first beam current value. The second current measuring device 214b detects the ion beam emitted from the second exit aperture 206b and measures the second beam current value. The third current measuring device 214c detects the ion beam emitted from the third exit aperture 206c and measures the third beam current value.

 複数の電流測定器214a~214cのそれぞれは、上述の第1の実施の形態に係る電流測定器114と同様に構成されることができる。複数の電流測定器214a~214cのそれぞれは、ファラデーカップと、ファラデーカップに結合される電流計236a~236cと、通過開口242a、242b、242cを有するサプレッション電極と、サプレッション電極に結合されるサプレッション電源とを備えることができる。 Each of the multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c can be configured similarly to the current measuring device 114 according to the first embodiment described above. Each of the multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c can include a Faraday cup, an ammeter 236a-236c coupled to the Faraday cup, a suppression electrode having passage openings 242a, 242b, 242c, and a suppression power supply coupled to the suppression electrode.

 角度測定装置200は、測定制御装置244(図21参照)をさらに備えることができる。測定制御装置244は、プロセッサ244aと、メモリ244bとを備える。測定制御装置244は、上述の第1の実施の形態に係る測定制御装置144と同様に構成されることができる。測定制御装置244は、電極アセンブリ210に可変電圧を印加するための指令値を出力し、対向する二つの電極面の間の電位差ΔVを時間変化させる。 The angle measurement device 200 may further include a measurement control device 244 (see FIG. 21). The measurement control device 244 includes a processor 244a and a memory 244b. The measurement control device 244 may be configured similarly to the measurement control device 144 according to the first embodiment described above. The measurement control device 244 outputs a command value for applying a variable voltage to the electrode assembly 210, thereby varying the potential difference ΔV between the two opposing electrode surfaces over time.

 測定制御装置244は、複数の電流測定器214a~214cにて測定されるビーム電流値を取得し、取得したビーム電流値を用いて角度情報を算出する。測定制御装置244は、例えば、特定の電位差ΔViの値に対して測定される第1ビーム電流値Ii1、第2ビーム電流値Ii2および第3ビーム電流値Ii3を合計し、合計したビーム電流値Ii(=Ii1+Ii2+Ii3)を用いて角度成分の強度を算出できる。測定制御装置244は、電位差ΔViをp方向の角度θpiに変換することにより、角度θpiに対応するビーム電流値Iiを得ることができる。これにより、スキャン方向(y方向)に対して斜めであるp方向の角度情報を得ることができる。 The measurement control device 244 acquires beam current values measured by multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c and calculates angular information using the acquired beam current values. For example, the measurement control device 244 can sum the first beam current value Ii1, second beam current value Ii2, and third beam current value Ii3 measured for a specific potential difference ΔVi, and calculate the intensity of the angular component using the summed beam current value Ii (= Ii1 + Ii2 + Ii3). The measurement control device 244 converts the potential difference ΔVi into an angle θpi in the p direction, thereby obtaining the beam current value Ii corresponding to the angle θpi. This makes it possible to obtain angular information in the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction).

 なお、第2の実施の形態において、電流測定器214は、複数の電流測定器214a~214cを備える代わりに、単一の電流測定器のみで構成されてもよい。この場合、電流測定器214は、複数の出射開口206a~206cのそれぞれから出射される複数のイオンビームを合計して検出する単一のファラデーカップを備えてもよい。つまり、単一のファラデーカップは、第1出射開口206aから出射するイオンビーム、第2出射開口206bから出射するイオンビーム、および第3出射開口206cから出射するイオンビームの全てを合わせたイオンビーム群を検出するよう構成される。この場合、単一のファラデーカップを用いて、上述の第1ビーム電流値Ii1、第2ビーム電流値Ii2および第3ビーム電流値Ii3の合計値Ii(=Ii1+Ii2+Ii3)を測定できる。 In the second embodiment, the current measuring device 214 may be configured with only a single current measuring device instead of multiple current measuring devices 214a-214c. In this case, the current measuring device 214 may be configured with a single Faraday cup that detects the total of multiple ion beams emitted from each of the multiple emission apertures 206a-206c. In other words, the single Faraday cup is configured to detect the combined ion beam group including the ion beam emitted from the first emission aperture 206a, the ion beam emitted from the second emission aperture 206b, and the ion beam emitted from the third emission aperture 206c. In this case, the single Faraday cup can be used to measure the total value Ii (= Ii1 + Ii2 + Ii3) of the first beam current value Ii1, the second beam current value Ii2, and the third beam current value Ii3.

 本実施の形態によれば、複数の入射開口202a~202cおよび複数の出射開口206a~206cを設ける場合に、印加電圧が共通する複数の電極面を一体化した電極体を用いることにより、電極アセンブリの構成を単純化できる。 According to this embodiment, when multiple entrance openings 202a-202c and multiple exit openings 206a-206c are provided, the configuration of the electrode assembly can be simplified by using an electrode body that integrates multiple electrode surfaces to which a common applied voltage is applied.

 図23は、変形例に係る電極アセンブリ210Aの概略構成を示す断面図である。電極アセンブリ210Aは、上述の図21に示される電極アセンブリ210と同様に、第1電極面222aと、第2電極面224aと、第3電極面224bと、第4電極面222bと、第5電極面222cと、第6電極面224cとを有する。 Figure 23 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 210A according to a modified example. Similar to the electrode assembly 210 shown in Figure 21 above, the electrode assembly 210A has a first electrode surface 222a, a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, a fourth electrode surface 222b, a fifth electrode surface 222c, and a sixth electrode surface 224c.

 電極アセンブリ210Aは、第1電極体226Aと、第2電極体228と、第3電極体230とを備える。第1電極体226Aは、第1電極面222aを有する。第2電極体228は、第2電極面224aと、第3電極面224bと、第6電極面224cとを有する。第3電極体230は、第4電極面222bと、第5電極面222cとを有する。第1電源130は、第1電極体226Aおよび第3電極体230と結合される。第2電源132は、第2電極体228と結合される。 The electrode assembly 210A comprises a first electrode body 226A, a second electrode body 228, and a third electrode body 230. The first electrode body 226A has a first electrode surface 222a. The second electrode body 228 has a second electrode surface 224a, a third electrode surface 224b, and a sixth electrode surface 224c. The third electrode body 230 has a fourth electrode surface 222b and a fifth electrode surface 222c. The first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 226A and the third electrode body 230. The second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 228.

 本変形例に係る電極アセンブリ210Aを用いる場合であっても、上述の第2の実施の形態と同様の効果を奏することができる。 Even when using the electrode assembly 210A according to this modified example, the same effects as those of the second embodiment described above can be achieved.

(第3の実施の形態)
 図24は、第3の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置300の入射面304の概略構成を示す平面図である。第3の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置300は、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向(y方向)の角度情報と、スキャンビームSBのスキャン方向に直交する方向(x方向)の角度情報とを測定できるように構成される。以下、第3の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置300について、上述の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点については説明を適宜省略する。
(Third embodiment)
24 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of an incident surface 304 of an angle measurement device 300 according to the third embodiment. The angle measurement device 300 according to the third embodiment is configured to be able to measure angle information in the scan direction (y direction) of the scan beam SB and angle information in a direction (x direction) perpendicular to the scan direction of the scan beam SB. The angle measurement device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on differences from the above-mentioned embodiments, and description of commonalities will be omitted as appropriate.

 図24は、複数の入射開口302a~302dを有する入射面304をビーム進行方向(z方向)の上流側から見た図を示す。入射面304には、複数の入射開口302a、302b、302c、302dが形成される。第1入射開口302a、第2入射開口302bおよび第3入射開口302cは、上述の第2の実施の形態に係る複数の入射開口202a~202cと同様に構成されることができる。第1入射開口302a、第2入射開口302bおよび第3入射開口302cのスリット幅方向は、スキャン方向(y方向)に対して斜めであるp方向である。第4入射開口302dは、第1入射開口302a、第2入射開口302bおよび第3入射開口302cが形成される測定範囲Dに配置され、第1入射開口302a、第2入射開口302bおよび第3入射開口302cからスキャン方向(y方向)に離れた位置に配置される。第4入射開口302dのスリット幅方向は、スキャン方向(y方向)と平行である。第4入射開口302dのスリット長方向の開口幅w2dは、例えば、測定範囲Dに一致する。複数の入射開口302a、302b、302c、302dのスリット幅方向の開口幅w1a、w1b、w1cおよびw1dは、互いに共通である。複数の入射開口302a~302dは、入射面304を有する前面板316を貫通するように形成される。 Figure 24 shows an incident surface 304 having multiple incident apertures 302a to 302d viewed from the upstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction). Multiple incident apertures 302a, 302b, 302c, and 302d are formed on the incident surface 304. The first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c can be configured in the same manner as the multiple incident apertures 202a to 202c in the second embodiment described above. The slit width direction of the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c is the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction). The fourth incident aperture 302d is positioned in measurement range D, where the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c are formed, and is positioned away from the first incident aperture 302a, the second incident aperture 302b, and the third incident aperture 302c in the scanning direction (y direction). The slit width direction of the fourth incident aperture 302d is parallel to the scanning direction (y direction). The opening width w2d in the slit length direction of the fourth incident aperture 302d, for example, coincides with the measurement range D. The opening widths w1a, w1b, w1c, and w1d in the slit width direction of the multiple incident apertures 302a, 302b, 302c, and 302d are common to each other. The multiple incident apertures 302a-302d are formed to penetrate a front plate 316 having an incident surface 304.

 図25は、第3の実施の形態に係る角度測定装置300の出射面308の概略構成を示す平面図である。図25は、複数の出射開口306a~306dを有する入射面204をビーム進行方向(z方向)の下流側から見た図を示す。出射面308には、複数の出射開口306a~306dが形成される。複数の出射開口306a~306dは、対応する入射開口302a~302dと同様の形状およびサイズを有することができる。複数の出射開口306a~306dは、スキャンビームSBの進行方向に直交するx方向およびy方向の位置が対応する入射開口302a~302dと一致するように配置される。複数の出射開口306a~306dのスリット幅方向の開口幅w3a、w3b、w3c、w3dは、対応する入射開口302a~302dのスリット幅方向の開口幅w1a~w1dと同じであってもよい。複数の出射開口306a~306dのスリット長方向の開口幅w4a、w4b、w4cは、対応する入射開口302a~302dのスリット長方向の開口幅w2a~w2dと同じであってもよい。 Figure 25 is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of the exit surface 308 of the angle measurement device 300 relating to the third embodiment. Figure 25 shows the entrance surface 204 having multiple exit openings 306a to 306d as viewed from the downstream side in the beam propagation direction (z direction). Multiple exit openings 306a to 306d are formed in the exit surface 308. The multiple exit openings 306a to 306d can have the same shape and size as the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d. The multiple exit openings 306a to 306d are positioned so that their positions in the x and y directions perpendicular to the propagation direction of the scan beam SB coincide with the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d. The opening widths w3a, w3b, w3c, and w3d in the slit width direction of the multiple exit openings 306a to 306d may be the same as the opening widths w1a to w1d in the slit width direction of the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d. The opening widths w4a, w4b, and w4c in the slit length direction of the multiple exit openings 306a to 306d may be the same as the opening widths w2a to w2d in the slit length direction of the corresponding entrance openings 302a to 302d.

 図26は、第3の実施の形態に係る電極アセンブリ310の概略構成を示す断面図である。電極アセンブリ310は、入射面304と出射面308の間に配置される。図26において、複数の入射開口302a~302dの位置を破線で示している。 Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 310 according to the third embodiment. The electrode assembly 310 is disposed between the incident surface 304 and the exit surface 308. In Figure 26, the positions of multiple incident openings 302a-302d are indicated by dashed lines.

 電極アセンブリ310は、第1電極面322aと、第2電極面324aと、第3電極面324bと、第4電極面322bと、第5電極面322cと、第6電極面324cと、第7電極面324dと、第8電極面322dとを有する。第1電極面322aから第6電極面324cは、上述の図21に示される第1電極面222aから第6電極面224cと同様に構成されることができる。第7電極面324dおよび第8電極面322dは、第4入射開口302dから第4出射開口306dに向かうイオンビームを挟んで第4方向に第4距離d4で対向する。第4方向は、第4入射開口302dのスリット幅方向(y方向)と平行である。図26に示す例において、第4方向は、第1方向、第2方向および第3方向に対して斜めである。第4距離d4は、第1距離d1、第2距離d2および第3距離d3と同じである。 The electrode assembly 310 has a first electrode surface 322a, a second electrode surface 324a, a third electrode surface 324b, a fourth electrode surface 322b, a fifth electrode surface 322c, a sixth electrode surface 324c, a seventh electrode surface 324d, and an eighth electrode surface 322d. The first electrode surface 322a to the sixth electrode surface 324c can be configured similarly to the first electrode surface 222a to the sixth electrode surface 224c shown in FIG. 21 above. The seventh electrode surface 324d and the eighth electrode surface 322d face each other at a fourth distance d4 in the fourth direction across the ion beam traveling from the fourth entrance aperture 302d to the fourth exit aperture 306d. The fourth direction is parallel to the slit width direction (y direction) of the fourth entrance aperture 302d. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the fourth direction is oblique to the first, second, and third directions. The fourth distance d4 is the same as the first distance d1, the second distance d2, and the third distance d3.

 電極アセンブリ310には、電源112が接続される。電源112は、上述の実施の形態と同様に構成される。電源112は、互いに対向する二つの電極面の間に電位差を生じさせる。電源112は、第1電極面322aおよび第2電極面324aの間に第1電位差を生じさせ、第3電極面324bおよび第4電極面322bの間に第2電位差を生じさせ、第5電極面322cおよび第6電極面324cの間に第3電位差を生じさせ、第7電極面324dおよび第8電極面322dの間に第4電位差を生じさせる。 A power supply 112 is connected to the electrode assembly 310. The power supply 112 is configured in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. The power supply 112 generates a potential difference between two opposing electrode surfaces. The power supply 112 generates a first potential difference between the first electrode surface 322a and the second electrode surface 324a, a second potential difference between the third electrode surface 324b and the fourth electrode surface 322b, a third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 322c and the sixth electrode surface 324c, and a fourth potential difference between the seventh electrode surface 324d and the eighth electrode surface 322d.

 電極アセンブリ310は、第1電極体326と、第2電極体328と、第3電極体330とを備える。第1電極体326は、第1電極面322a、第4電極面322bおよび第5電極面322cを有する。第2電極体328は、第2電極面324a、第3電極面324b、第6電極面324cおよび第7電極面324dを有する。第3電極体330は、第8電極面322dを有する。第1電極体326および第3電極体330には第1電源130が結合され、第2電極体328には第2電源132が結合される。この場合、第1電位差、第2電位差、第3電位差および第4電位差の大きさは同じである。しかしながら、対向する二つの電極面の間に生じる電界の方向は異なりうる。第1電極面322aおよび第2電極面324aの間の第1電位差に基づく第1電界Eaの方向は、第5電極面322cおよび第6電極面324cの間の第3電位差に基づく第3電界Ecの方向と同じであるが、第3電極面324bおよび第4電極面322bの間の第2電位差に基づく第2電界Ebの方向と反対(または反平行)である。第7電極面324dおよび第8電極面322dの間の第4電位差に基づく第4電界Edの方向は、第1電界Ea、第2電界Ebおよび第3電界Ecの方向に対して斜めである。 The electrode assembly 310 comprises a first electrode body 326, a second electrode body 328, and a third electrode body 330. The first electrode body 326 has a first electrode surface 322a, a fourth electrode surface 322b, and a fifth electrode surface 322c. The second electrode body 328 has a second electrode surface 324a, a third electrode surface 324b, a sixth electrode surface 324c, and a seventh electrode surface 324d. The third electrode body 330 has an eighth electrode surface 322d. A first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 326 and the third electrode body 330, and a second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 328. In this case, the magnitudes of the first potential difference, the second potential difference, the third potential difference, and the fourth potential difference are the same. However, the direction of the electric field generated between the two opposing electrode surfaces may be different. The direction of the first electric field Ea based on the first potential difference between the first electrode surface 322a and the second electrode surface 324a is the same as the direction of the third electric field Ec based on the third potential difference between the fifth electrode surface 322c and the sixth electrode surface 324c, but is opposite (or antiparallel to) the direction of the second electric field Eb based on the second potential difference between the third electrode surface 324b and the fourth electrode surface 322b. The direction of the fourth electric field Ed based on the fourth potential difference between the seventh electrode surface 324d and the eighth electrode surface 322d is oblique to the directions of the first electric field Ea, the second electric field Eb, and the third electric field Ec.

 電極アセンブリ310の周囲には、第1電極体326、第2電極体328および第3電極体330を包囲するための側板320を設けることができる。側板320は、前面板316から背面板318に向けて筒状に延びるように構成できる。前面板316、背面板318および側板320は、電極アセンブリ310を収容する筐体を構成することができる。前面板316、背面板318および側板320は、接地されてグランド電位を有することができる。 A side plate 320 may be provided around the electrode assembly 310 to enclose the first electrode body 326, the second electrode body 328, and the third electrode body 330. The side plate 320 may be configured to extend cylindrically from the front plate 316 toward the rear plate 318. The front plate 316, the rear plate 318, and the side plate 320 may form a housing that houses the electrode assembly 310. The front plate 316, the rear plate 318, and the side plate 320 may be grounded and have a ground potential.

 図27は、第3の実施の形態に係る電流測定器314の概略構成を示す平面図である。電流測定器314は、複数の電流測定器314a、314b、314c、314dを備える。複数の電流測定器314a~314dは、対応する出射開口306a~306dを通過したイオンビームを検出してビーム電流値を測定するように構成される。図27では、複数の出射開口306a~306dの位置を破線で示している。 Figure 27 is a plan view showing the schematic configuration of the current measuring device 314 according to the third embodiment. The current measuring device 314 comprises multiple current measuring devices 314a, 314b, 314c, and 314d. The multiple current measuring devices 314a to 314d are configured to detect ion beams that have passed through the corresponding exit apertures 306a to 306d and measure the beam current values. In Figure 27, the positions of the multiple exit apertures 306a to 306d are indicated by dashed lines.

 電流測定器314は、第1電流測定器314aと、第2電流測定器314bと、第3電流測定器314cと、第4電流測定器314dとを備えることができる。第1電流測定器314aは、第1出射開口306aから出射するイオンビームを検出して第1ビーム電流値を測定する。第2電流測定器314bは、第2出射開口306bから出射するイオンビームを検出して第2ビーム電流値を測定する。第3電流測定器314cは、第3出射開口306cから出射するイオンビームを検出して第3ビーム電流値を測定する。第4電流測定器314dは、第4出射開口306dから出射するイオンビームを検出して第4ビーム電流値を測定する。 The current measuring device 314 may include a first current measuring device 314a, a second current measuring device 314b, a third current measuring device 314c, and a fourth current measuring device 314d. The first current measuring device 314a detects the ion beam emitted from the first exit aperture 306a and measures the first beam current value. The second current measuring device 314b detects the ion beam emitted from the second exit aperture 306b and measures the second beam current value. The third current measuring device 314c detects the ion beam emitted from the third exit aperture 306c and measures the third beam current value. The fourth current measuring device 314d detects the ion beam emitted from the fourth exit aperture 306d and measures the fourth beam current value.

 複数の電流測定器314a~314dのそれぞれは、上述の第1の実施の形態に係る電流測定器114と同様に構成されることができる。複数の電流測定器314a~314dのそれぞれは、ファラデーカップと、ファラデーカップに結合される電流計と、通過開口342a、342b、342c、342dを有するサプレッション電極と、サプレッション電極に結合されるサプレッション電源とを備えることができる。 Each of the multiple current measuring devices 314a-314d can be configured similarly to the current measuring device 114 according to the first embodiment described above. Each of the multiple current measuring devices 314a-314d can include a Faraday cup, an ammeter coupled to the Faraday cup, a suppression electrode having passage openings 342a, 342b, 342c, and 342d, and a suppression power supply coupled to the suppression electrode.

 角度測定装置300は、測定制御装置344(図26参照)をさらに備えることができる。測定制御装置344は、プロセッサ344aと、メモリ344bとを備える。測定制御装置344は、上述の第1の実施の形態に係る測定制御装置144と同様に構成されることができる。測定制御装置344は、電極アセンブリ310に可変電圧を印加するための指令値を出力し、対向する二つの電極面の間の電位差ΔVを時間変化させる。 The angle measurement device 300 may further include a measurement control device 344 (see FIG. 26). The measurement control device 344 includes a processor 344a and a memory 344b. The measurement control device 344 may be configured similarly to the measurement control device 144 according to the first embodiment described above. The measurement control device 344 outputs a command value for applying a variable voltage to the electrode assembly 310, thereby varying the potential difference ΔV between the two opposing electrode surfaces over time.

 測定制御装置344は、複数の電流測定器314a~314dにて測定されるビーム電流値を取得し、取得したビーム電流値を用いて角度情報を算出する。測定制御装置344は、例えば、特定の電位差ΔViの値に対して測定される第1ビーム電流値Ii1、第2ビーム電流値Ii2および第3ビーム電流値Ii3を合計し、合計したビーム電流値Ii(=Ii1+Ii2+Ii3)を用いてp方向の角度成分の強度を算出する。測定制御装置344は、電位差ΔViをp方向の角度θpiに変換することにより、角度θpiにおけるビーム電流値Iiを得ることができる。これにより、スキャン方向(y方向)に対して斜めであるp方向の角度情報を得ることができる。 The measurement control device 344 acquires beam current values measured by multiple current measuring devices 314a-314d and calculates angular information using the acquired beam current values. For example, the measurement control device 344 sums the first beam current value Ii1, second beam current value Ii2, and third beam current value Ii3 measured for a specific potential difference ΔVi, and calculates the intensity of the angular component in the p direction using the summed beam current value Ii (= Ii1 + Ii2 + Ii3). The measurement control device 344 converts the potential difference ΔVi into an angle θpi in the p direction, thereby obtaining the beam current value Ii at the angle θpi. This makes it possible to obtain angular information in the p direction, which is oblique to the scan direction (y direction).

 測定制御装置344は、特定の電位差ΔViの値に対して測定される第4ビーム電流値Ii4を取得し、第4ビーム電流値Ii4を用いてy方向の角度成分の強度を算出する。測定制御装置344は、電位差ΔViを角度θyiに変換することにより、角度θyiにおけるビーム電流値Ii4を得ることができる。これにより、スキャン方向(y方向)の角度情報を得ることができる。 The measurement control device 344 acquires the fourth beam current value Ii4 measured for a specific potential difference ΔVi, and calculates the intensity of the angular component in the y direction using the fourth beam current value Ii4. The measurement control device 344 converts the potential difference ΔVi into an angle θyi to obtain the beam current value Ii4 at the angle θyi. This makes it possible to obtain angle information in the scan direction (y direction).

 測定制御装置344は、スキャン方向(y方向)の角度情報と、スキャン方向(y方向)に対して斜めであるp方向の角度情報とを用いて、スキャン方向に直交する方向(x方向)の角度情報を算出する。スキャン方向に直交する方向(x方向)の角度情報の算出方法として、例えば、特開2019-169407号に記載される公知の方法を用いることができる。 The measurement control device 344 calculates angle information in the direction perpendicular to the scanning direction (x direction) using angle information in the scanning direction (y direction) and angle information in the p direction, which is oblique to the scanning direction (y direction). A known method for calculating angle information in the direction perpendicular to the scanning direction (x direction), for example, can be used, such as the method described in JP 2019-169407 A.

 なお、第3の実施の形態において、電流測定器314は、第1電流測定器314aから第3電流測定器314cの代わりに、単一の電流測定器を用いてもよい。この場合、電流測定器314は、第1出射開口306aから第3出射開口306cのそれぞれから出射される複数のイオンビームを合計して検出して第1ビーム電流値を測定する第1電流測定器と、第4出射開口306dから出射されるイオンビームを検出して第2ビーム電流値を測定する第2電流測定器とを備えてもよい。第1電流測定器は、第1出射開口306aから出射するイオンビーム、第2出射開口306bから出射するイオンビーム、および第3出射開口306cから出射するイオンビームの全てを合わせたイオンビーム群を検出するよう構成される。この場合、第1電流測定器を用いて、上述の第1ビーム電流値Ii1、第2ビーム電流値Ii2および第3ビーム電流値Ii3の合計値Ii(=Ii1+Ii2+Ii3)を測定することができる。 In the third embodiment, the current measuring device 314 may be a single current measuring device instead of the first to third current measuring devices 314a to 314c. In this case, the current measuring device 314 may include a first current measuring device that detects the sum of multiple ion beams extracted from each of the first to third extraction apertures 306a to 306c to measure a first beam current value, and a second current measuring device that detects the ion beam extracted from the fourth extraction aperture 306d to measure a second beam current value. The first current measuring device is configured to detect a group of ion beams that is a combination of all of the ion beams extracted from the first extraction aperture 306a, the second extraction aperture 306b, and the third extraction aperture 306c. In this case, the first current measuring device can be used to measure the total value Ii (= Ii1 + Ii2 + Ii3) of the first beam current value Ii1, second beam current value Ii2, and third beam current value Ii3.

 図28は、変形例に係る電極アセンブリ310Aの概略構成を示す断面図である。電極アセンブリ310Aは、上述の図26に示される電極アセンブリ310と同様に、第1電極面322aと、第2電極面324aと、第3電極面324bと、第4電極面322bと、第5電極面322cと、第6電極面324cと、第7電極面324dと、第8電極面322dとを有する。 Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view showing the schematic configuration of an electrode assembly 310A according to a modified example. Similar to the electrode assembly 310 shown in Figure 26 above, the electrode assembly 310A has a first electrode surface 322a, a second electrode surface 324a, a third electrode surface 324b, a fourth electrode surface 322b, a fifth electrode surface 322c, a sixth electrode surface 324c, a seventh electrode surface 324d, and an eighth electrode surface 322d.

 電極アセンブリ310Aは、第1電極面322aを有する第1電極体326Aと、第2電極面324aおよび第3電極面324bを有する第2電極体328Aと、第4電極面322bおよび第5電極面322cを有する第3電極体330Aと、第6電極面324cを有する第4電極体332と、第7電極面324dを有する第5電極体334と、第8電極面322dを有する第6電極体336とを備える。第1電極体326A、第3電極体330Aおよび第6電極体336には第1電源130が結合される。第2電極体328A、第4電極体332および第5電極体334には第2電源132が結合される。なお、第5電極体334および第6電極体336のそれぞれに結合される電源を逆にしてもよく、第5電極体334に第1電源130を結合し、第6電極体336に第2電源132を結合してもよい。 The electrode assembly 310A comprises a first electrode body 326A having a first electrode surface 322a, a second electrode body 328A having a second electrode surface 324a and a third electrode surface 324b, a third electrode body 330A having a fourth electrode surface 322b and a fifth electrode surface 322c, a fourth electrode body 332 having a sixth electrode surface 324c, a fifth electrode body 334 having a seventh electrode surface 324d, and a sixth electrode body 336 having an eighth electrode surface 322d. A first power source 130 is coupled to the first electrode body 326A, the third electrode body 330A, and the sixth electrode body 336. A second power source 132 is coupled to the second electrode body 328A, the fourth electrode body 332, and the fifth electrode body 334. The power supplies coupled to the fifth electrode body 334 and the sixth electrode body 336 may be reversed, with the first power supply 130 coupled to the fifth electrode body 334 and the second power supply 132 coupled to the sixth electrode body 336.

 電極アセンブリ310Aは、第7電極体338をさらに備える。第7電極体338は、第1電極体326A、第2電極体328A、第3電極体330Aおよび第4電極体332を備える電極群と、第5電極体334との間に配置される。第7電極体338は、接地されてグランド電位を有する。 The electrode assembly 310A further includes a seventh electrode body 338. The seventh electrode body 338 is disposed between the electrode group including the first electrode body 326A, the second electrode body 328A, the third electrode body 330A, and the fourth electrode body 332, and the fifth electrode body 334. The seventh electrode body 338 is grounded and has a ground potential.

 本変形例に係る電極アセンブリ310Aを用いる場合であっても、上述の第3の実施の形態と同様の効果を奏することができる。 Even when using the electrode assembly 310A according to this modified example, the same effects as those of the third embodiment described above can be achieved.

 続いて、イオンビームを生成するイオン引出装置について説明する。図29は、第1実施形態に係るイオン引出装置の模式図である。イオン引出装置は、所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源20と、イオン源20またはアークチャンバ20aから、所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームIBを生成する引出部22を備える。 Next, we will explain the ion extraction device that generates the ion beam. Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of the ion extraction device according to the first embodiment. The ion extraction device includes an ion source 20 that generates plasma containing desired ions, and an extraction unit 22 that extracts a group of ions containing the desired ions from the ion source 20 or the arc chamber 20a to generate an ion beam IB.

 図1等に関して前述されたように、イオン源20の下流に設けられる引出部22は、イオン源20における内部空間20bからフロントスリット20cを通じてイオン群を引き出してイオンビームIBを生成する。以下では、イオンビームIBを構成する所望イオンを含むイオン群が引き出されるフロントスリット20cの開口が、第1開口OP1と表される。図1等に関して前述されたように、フロントスリット20cの第1開口OP1は、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、第1開口OP1の水平方向の開口幅は、第1開口OP1の鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。 As described above with reference to Figure 1 etc., the extraction section 22 provided downstream of the ion source 20 extracts a group of ions from the internal space 20b of the ion source 20 through the front slit 20c to generate an ion beam IB. Hereinafter, the opening of the front slit 20c from which a group of ions including the desired ions that make up the ion beam IB is extracted will be referred to as the first opening OP1. As described above with reference to Figure 1 etc., the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the opening width of the first opening OP1 in the horizontal direction is larger than the opening width of the first opening OP1 in the vertical direction.

 引出部22は、イオンビームIBの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって(図29における右から左に向かって)、基準電極22bと、サプレッション電極22aと、可動導体22eを備える。 The extraction section 22 comprises, from downstream to upstream in the direction of travel of the ion beam IB (from right to left in Figure 29), a reference electrode 22b, a suppression electrode 22a, and a movable conductor 22e.

 図1等においては第2引出電極22bと表された基準電極22bは、イオンビームIBが通過する第2開口OP2を備え、グランド電位Vgnd等の基準電位が印加される。以下では、グランド電位Vgndまたは基準電位が、便宜的に零(0)であるものとする。このような基準電位Vgnd(=0)より高い電位は正の電位と便宜的に表され、このような基準電位Vgnd(=0)より低い電位は負の電位と便宜的に表される。図1等においては第2引出開口22dと表された第2開口OP2は、フロントスリット20cと同様、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、第2開口OP2の水平方向の開口幅は、第2開口OP2の鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。 The reference electrode 22b, represented as the second extraction electrode 22b in FIG. 1 and other figures, has a second opening OP2 through which the ion beam IB passes, and a reference potential such as ground potential V gnd is applied to it. Hereinafter, for convenience, the ground potential V gnd or reference potential is assumed to be zero (0). A potential higher than such a reference potential V gnd (=0) is conveniently referred to as a positive potential, and a potential lower than such a reference potential V gnd (=0) is conveniently referred to as a negative potential. The second opening OP2, represented as the second extraction opening 22d in FIG. 1 and other figures, has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction), similar to the front slit 20c. In other words, the opening width of the second opening OP2 in the horizontal direction is larger than the opening width of the second opening OP2 in the vertical direction.

 図1等においては第1引出電極22aと表されたサプレッション電極22aは、イオンビームIBが通過する第3開口OP3を備え、基準電位Vgndより低い負のサプレッション電位Vsupが印加される。図1等においては第1引出開口22cと表された第3開口OP3は、フロントスリット20cと同様、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、第3開口OP3の水平方向の開口幅は、第3開口OP3の鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。サプレッション電極22aは、上流側の後述される可動導体22eと、下流側の基準電極22bの間に挟まれて配置される。 The suppression electrode 22a, represented as the first extraction electrode 22a in FIG. 1 and other figures, has a third opening OP3 through which the ion beam IB passes, and is applied with a negative suppression potential Vsup lower than the reference potential Vgnd . The third opening OP3, represented as the first extraction opening 22c in FIG. 1 and other figures, has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction), similar to the front slit 20c. In other words, the opening width of the third opening OP3 in the horizontal direction is larger than the opening width of the third opening OP3 in the vertical direction. The suppression electrode 22a is disposed between a movable conductor 22e (described later) on the upstream side and a reference electrode 22b on the downstream side.

 なお、イオン源20のフロントスリット20cおよび/またはアークチャンバ20aには、基準電位Vgndより高い正の引出電位Vextが印加される。 A positive extraction potential V ext higher than the reference potential V gnd is applied to the front slit 20 c and/or the arc chamber 20 a of the ion source 20 .

 可動導体22eは、上流側のフロントスリット20cと、下流側のサプレッション電極22aの間に挟まれて配置される。可動導体22eは、イオンビームIBが通過する第4開口OP4を備える。第4開口OP4は、フロントスリット20cと同様、水平方向(x1方向)の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向(y方向)の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有する。つまり、第4開口OP4の水平方向の開口幅は、第4開口OP4の鉛直方向の開口幅よりも大きい。第4開口OP4のサイズは、第1開口OP1のサイズより大きいのが好ましい。 The movable conductor 22e is sandwiched between the upstream front slit 20c and the downstream suppression electrode 22a. The movable conductor 22e has a fourth opening OP4 through which the ion beam IB passes. Similar to the front slit 20c, the fourth opening OP4 has a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction (x1 direction) and a short opening width in the vertical direction (y direction). In other words, the horizontal opening width of the fourth opening OP4 is larger than the vertical opening width of the fourth opening OP4. It is preferable that the size of the fourth opening OP4 be larger than the size of the first opening OP1.

 図示の例では、可動導体22eに、正の引出電位Vextと零の基準電位Vgndの間の正の電位である制御電位Vctlが印加される。制御電位Vctlは、引出電位Vextと反対向きに直列に接続される追加電位Vaddによって実現されてもよい。具体的には、追加電位Vaddの絶対値は引出電位Vextの絶対値より小さく、制御電位Vctlは「Vext-Vadd」(>0)と表される。なお、可動導体22eは、基準電位Vgnd、引出電位Vext、追加電位Vadd、サプレッション電位Vsup、不図示の定電位等の特定の電位から絶縁された構成でもよい。あるいは、導体を介して可動導体22eをフロントスリット20cに導通させることで、可動導体22eにフロントスリット20c(イオン源20)と同じ正の引出電位Vextを印加してもよい(例えば、図29において、追加電位Vaddを零にする)。 In the illustrated example, a control potential Vctl, which is a positive potential between a positive extraction potential Vext and a zero reference potential Vgnd , is applied to the movable conductor 22e. The control potential Vctl may be realized by an additional potential Vadd connected in series in the opposite direction to the extraction potential Vext . Specifically, the absolute value of the additional potential Vadd is smaller than the absolute value of the extraction potential Vext , and the control potential Vctl is expressed as " Vext - Vadd "(>0). Note that the movable conductor 22e may be configured to be insulated from specific potentials such as the reference potential Vgnd , the extraction potential Vext , the additional potential Vadd , the suppression potential Vsup , and a constant potential (not shown). Alternatively, the same positive extraction potential V ext as that of the front slit 20 c (ion source 20) may be applied to the movable conductor 22 e by electrically connecting the movable conductor 22 e to the front slit 20 c via a conductor (for example, in FIG. 29 , the additional potential V add is set to zero).

 フロントスリット20cの第1開口OP1、基準電極22bの第2開口OP2、サプレッション電極22aの第3開口OP3、可動導体22eの第4開口OP4は、同様のx1方向に長尺のスリットである(図29では、短尺方向であるy方向における各スリットが模式的に示されている)。このような引出部22によってイオン源20から引き出されたイオンビームIBは、フロントスリット20cの第1開口OP1、可動導体22eの第4開口OP4、サプレッション電極22aの第3開口OP3、基準電極22bの第2開口OP2の順に通過する。 The first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c, the second opening OP2 of the reference electrode 22b, the third opening OP3 of the suppression electrode 22a, and the fourth opening OP4 of the movable conductor 22e are all similar slits that are long in the x1 direction (in Figure 29, each slit is shown schematically in the y direction, which is the short direction). The ion beam IB extracted from the ion source 20 by this extraction section 22 passes through the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c, the fourth opening OP4 of the movable conductor 22e, the third opening OP3 of the suppression electrode 22a, and the second opening OP2 of the reference electrode 22b, in that order.

 引出部22における下流側の二つの電極、すなわち、サプレッション電極22aおよび基準電極22bは、一体的な電極ユニットとして構成されてもよい。この場合、イオンビームIBの進行方向(図29におけるz1方向)におけるサプレッション電極22aと基準電極22bの距離は一定または不変である。換言すれば、サプレッション電極22aの第3開口OP3と、基準電極22bの第2開口OP2の進行方向に沿った中心間距離は一定または不変である。 The two downstream electrodes in the extraction section 22, i.e., the suppression electrode 22a and the reference electrode 22b, may be configured as an integrated electrode unit. In this case, the distance between the suppression electrode 22a and the reference electrode 22b in the direction of travel of the ion beam IB (the z1 direction in Figure 29) is constant or unchanging. In other words, the center-to-center distance along the direction of travel between the third opening OP3 of the suppression electrode 22a and the second opening OP2 of the reference electrode 22b is constant or unchanging.

 一方、サプレッション電極22aおよび基準電極22bによって一体的に構成される電極ユニットの全体は、イオン源20に対してイオンビームIBの進行方向に沿って移動可能に設けられてもよい。図示の例では、イオン源20(厳密には、フロントスリット20c)と電極ユニット(厳密には、サプレッション電極22a)の進行方向に沿った距離が、後述される第1距離Gapおよび第2距離Gapの和として表される。後述されるように、本実施形態ではフロントスリット20cと可動導体22eの間の進行方向における第1距離Gapが可変であるが、電極ユニットを進行方向に沿って移動させることによって、可動導体22eとサプレッション電極22aの間の進行方向における第2距離Gapも可変である。 On the other hand, the entire electrode unit integrally formed by the suppression electrode 22a and the reference electrode 22b may be provided so as to be movable along the traveling direction of the ion beam IB relative to the ion source 20. In the illustrated example, the distance along the traveling direction between the ion source 20 (strictly, the front slit 20c) and the electrode unit (strictly, the suppression electrode 22a) is expressed as the sum of a first distance Gap 1 and a second distance Gap 2, which will be described later. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the first distance Gap 1 in the traveling direction between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e is variable, and by moving the electrode unit along the traveling direction, the second distance Gap 2 in the traveling direction between the movable conductor 22e and the suppression electrode 22a is also variable.

 可動導体22e(および/または、その第4開口OP4)は、フロントスリット20c(および/または、その第1開口OP1)とのイオンビームIBの進行方向における第1距離Gapが可変である。図30に模式的に示されるように、可動導体22eは、進行方向に沿って伸縮可能な伸縮機構22fによって、イオン源20および/またはフロントスリット20cと連結されてもよい。伸縮機構22fの伸縮に応じて、フロントスリット20c(第1開口OP1)および可動導体22e(第4開口OP4)の間の第1距離Gapが増減する。 The movable conductor 22e (and/or its fourth opening OP4) has a variable first distance Gap1 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB between it and the front slit 20c (and/or its first opening OP1). As schematically shown in FIG. 30 , the movable conductor 22e may be connected to the ion source 20 and/or the front slit 20c by an extension/contraction mechanism 22f that is extendable and contractible along the traveling direction. The first distance Gap1 between the front slit 20c (first opening OP1) and the movable conductor 22e (fourth opening OP4) increases and decreases depending on the extension and contraction of the extension/contraction mechanism 22f .

 伸縮機構22fは、絶縁材料によって構成されて、絶縁性を備えるのが好ましい。この場合、図29に関して前述されたように、イオン源20(フロントスリット20c)の引出電位Vextと異なる制御電位Vctl(すなわち、Vext-Vadd)を可動導体22eに印加できる。なお、図30の例では、追加電位Vaddと同じ向きに直列に接続されるダイオードDと、追加電位Vaddに並列に接続される帰還抵抗Rが設けられている。一方、伸縮機構22fは、導電材料によって構成されて、導電性を備えてもよい。この場合、可動導体22eには、イオン源20(フロントスリット20c)と同じ引出電位Vextが印加される(追加電位Vadd、ダイオードD、帰還抵抗Rは設けられない)。 The extension mechanism 22f is preferably made of an insulating material and has insulating properties. In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 29 , a control potential V ctl (i.e., V ext −V add ) different from the extraction potential V ext of the ion source 20 (front slit 20c) can be applied to the movable conductor 22e. In the example of FIG. 30 , a diode D connected in series in the same direction as the additional potential V add and a feedback resistor R connected in parallel to the additional potential V add are provided. On the other hand, the extension mechanism 22f may be made of a conductive material and have conductivity. In this case, the same extraction potential V ext as that of the ion source 20 (front slit 20c) is applied to the movable conductor 22e (the additional potential V add , diode D, and feedback resistor R are not provided).

 以上のような構成の本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置は、様々なパラメータを利用して、イオンビームIBを構成するイオン群がイオン源20から引き出される態様を適切に制御できる。イオン引出装置が制御可能なパラメータとしては、基準電位Vgnd(典型的には一定)、サプレッション電位Vsup、引出電位Vext、制御電位Vctl(または、追加電位Vadd)等の電位パラメータ群と、フロントスリット20cと可動導体22eの第1距離Gap、可動導体22eとサプレッション電極22aの第2距離Gap、フロントスリット20cとサプレッション電極22aの距離Gap′等の距離パラメータ群が例示される。 The ion extraction device according to this embodiment configured as described above can use various parameters to appropriately control how ions constituting the ion beam IB are extracted from the ion source 20. Examples of parameters that can be controlled by the ion extraction device include a group of potential parameters such as a reference potential V gnd (typically constant), a suppression potential V sup , an extraction potential V ext , and a control potential V ctl (or an additional potential V add ), and a group of distance parameters such as a first distance Gap 1 between the front slit 20 c and the movable conductor 22 e, a second distance Gap 2 between the movable conductor 22 e and the suppression electrode 22 a, and a distance Gap 2 ′ between the front slit 20 c and the suppression electrode 22 a.

 上記の通り、基準電位Vgnd、サプレッション電位Vsup、引出電位Vext、制御電位Vctl等の各電位パラメータが可変制御または適応制御されてもよいが、以下の実施例では、当該各電位パラメータが実質的に固定された状態で、主に二つの距離パラメータGap、Gapが可変制御または適応制御される。各電位パラメータの値は任意に設定可能であるが、例えば、基準電位Vgndは「0V」であり、サプレッション電位Vsupは「-2kV」であり、引出電位Vextは「+40kV」であり、制御電位Vctlは「+30kV」である。 As described above, each potential parameter such as the reference potential V gnd , the suppression potential V sup , the extraction potential V ext , and the control potential V ctl may be variably or adaptively controlled, but in the following example, each potential parameter is substantially fixed, and mainly two distance parameters Gap 1 and Gap 2 are variably or adaptively controlled. The values of each potential parameter can be set arbitrarily, but for example, the reference potential V gnd is "0 V," the suppression potential V sup is "-2 kV," the extraction potential V ext is "+40 kV," and the control potential V ctl is "+30 kV."

 本実施例に係る二つの距離パラメータGap、Gapの可変制御の意義を明らかにするために、一つの距離パラメータGap′の可変制御を伴う比較例について図31を参照しながら説明する。本比較例は、可動導体22eを備えないという点を除いて、図29や図30に示される実施例と実質的に同じである。すなわち、図29や図30に示される実施例が、四つの電極または導体20c、22e、22a、22bを備えるのに対し、図31に示される比較例は、三つの電極20c、22a、22bを備える。これらの各電極20c、22a、22bには、図29や図30に示される実施例と同様に、それぞれ「+40kV」(引出電位Vext)、「-2kV」(サプレッション電位Vsup)、「0V」(基準電位Vgnd)が印加されている。各電極20c、22a、22bの間には等電位線が模式的に示されている。 To clarify the significance of variable control of the two distance parameters Gap 1 and Gap 2 in this embodiment, a comparative example involving variable control of one distance parameter, Gap 2 ′, will be described with reference to FIG. 31 . This comparative example is substantially the same as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 except that it does not include a movable conductor 22e. That is, while the embodiments shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 include four electrodes or conductors 20c, 22e, 22a, and 22b, the comparative example shown in FIG. 31 includes three electrodes 20c, 22a, and 22b. As with the embodiment shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 , "+40 kV" (extraction potential V ext ), "-2 kV" (suppression potential V sup ), and "0 V" (reference potential V gnd ) are applied to these electrodes 20c, 22a, and 22b, respectively. Equipotential lines are schematically shown between the electrodes 20c, 22a, and 22b.

 図31(a)の左側の図は、各電極20c、22a、22bのスリット形状の第1開口OP1、第3開口OP3、第2開口OP2を短手方向(y方向)において示し、図31(b)の左側の図は、各電極20c、22a、22bのスリット形状の第1開口OP1、第3開口OP3、第2開口OP2を長手方向(x1方向)において示す。本比較例においては、フロントスリット20cとサプレッション電極22aの、イオンビームIBの進行方向(z1方向)に沿った距離Gap′のみが実質的に可変である。 31(a) shows the slit-shaped first opening OP1, third opening OP3, and second opening OP2 of each electrode 20c, 22a, and 22b in the short direction (y direction), and the left diagram of Fig. 31(b) shows the slit-shaped first opening OP1, third opening OP3, and second opening OP2 of each electrode 20c, 22a, and 22b in the long direction (x1 direction). In this comparative example, only the distance Gap 2 ' between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a along the traveling direction of the ion beam IB (z1 direction) is substantially variable.

 図31(a)の右側の図は、左側の図に示される観測位置(基準電極22bと質量分析磁石装置24aの入口に配置されるディファイニングアパチャー24gの間の所定のz1方向位置)における、イオンビームIBの短手方向(y方向)の位置yと、進行方向(z1方向)に対する傾斜角度y′の二次元プロットを示す。図31(b)の右側の図は、左側の図に示される観測位置における、イオンビームIBの長手方向(x1方向)の位置x1と、進行方向に対する傾斜角度x1′の二次元プロットを示す。このようなイオンビームIBの位置(yまたはx1)および傾斜角度(y′またはx1′)の二次元分布は、イオンビームIBの位相空間分布と表される。すなわち、図31(a)の右側の図は、イオンビームIBのy方向(短手方向)位相空間分布を表し、図31(b)の右側の図は、イオンビームIBのx1方向(長手方向)位相空間分布を表す。 The diagram on the right side of Figure 31(a) shows a two-dimensional plot of the position y in the short direction (y direction) of the ion beam IB and the tilt angle y' with respect to the propagation direction (z1 direction) at the observation position shown in the diagram on the left side (a predetermined z1 direction position between the reference electrode 22b and the defining aperture 24g located at the entrance of the mass analysis magnet device 24a).The diagram on the right side of Figure 31(b) shows a two-dimensional plot of the position x1 in the long direction (x1 direction) of the ion beam IB and the tilt angle x1' with respect to the propagation direction at the observation position shown in the diagram on the left side.Such a two-dimensional distribution of the position (y or x1) and tilt angle (y' or x1') of the ion beam IB is expressed as the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB. That is, the diagram on the right side of Figure 31(a) shows the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB in the y direction (short direction), and the diagram on the right side of Figure 31(b) shows the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB in the x1 direction (longitudinal direction).

 各方向の位相空間分布において、黒丸によるプロットは観測位置において実測されたデータを表し、白丸によるプロットは理想的なデータを表す。短手方向における図31(a)では、実測による位相空間分布が、理想的な位相空間分布に対して、y方向およびy′方向に広がってしまっていることが分かる。長手方向における図31(b)では、実測による位相空間分布が、x1′軸(横軸)に沿った略直線状の理想的な位相空間分布に対して、S字状に歪んでしまっていることが分かる。図31(a)における位相空間分布の望ましくない広がり、および、図31(b)における位相空間分布のS字状に歪みは、距離Gap′を大きくすることによって(すなわち、サプレッション電極22aをフロントスリット20cから離すことによって)低減可能である。しかし、距離Gap′には装置構成上の上限があり、現に図31における実測データは、現装置における最大の距離Gap′の下で得られたものである。距離Gap′の最大値を大きくすることも可能であるが、イオン引出装置ひいてはイオン注入装置10の望ましくない大型化に繋がる。 In the phase space distribution in each direction, the plots with black circles represent data measured at the observation position, and the plots with white circles represent ideal data. In the lateral direction of FIG. 31( a), it can be seen that the measured phase space distribution is spread in the y and y′ directions relative to the ideal phase space distribution. In the longitudinal direction of FIG. 31( b), it can be seen that the measured phase space distribution is distorted in an S-shape relative to the ideal phase space distribution, which is approximately linear along the x1′ axis (horizontal axis). The undesirable spread of the phase space distribution in FIG. 31( a) and the S-shape distortion of the phase space distribution in FIG. 31( b) can be reduced by increasing the distance Gap 2 ′ (i.e., by moving the suppression electrode 22 a away from the front slit 20 c). However, there is an upper limit to the distance Gap 2 ′ due to the device configuration, and the measured data in FIG. 31 were actually obtained at the maximum distance Gap 2 ′ of the current device. Although it is possible to increase the maximum value of the distance Gap 2 ', this would lead to an undesirable increase in the size of the ion extractor and therefore the ion implanter 10 .

 図31に示されるような望ましくない位相空間分布は、特に、イオンビームIBの引出電流Iextが小さい場合に生じやすい。例えば、図31(a)におけるフロントスリット20cの第1開口OP1の直後に等電位線が大きく歪み、イオンビームIBが局所的に過収束状態になっていることが、望ましくない位相空間分布の一つの原因であると考えられる。 The undesirable phase space distribution as shown in Fig. 31 is likely to occur particularly when the extraction current Iext of the ion beam IB is small. For example, one of the causes of the undesirable phase space distribution is thought to be that the equipotential lines are significantly distorted immediately after the first opening OP1 of the front slit 20c in Fig. 31(a), causing the ion beam IB to be in a locally over-focused state.

 本実施例に係る可動導体22eによれば、以上のような引出電流Iextが小さい低電流条件下でのイオンビームIBの過収束およびその後の発散を緩和でき、図31における白丸によるプロットのような望ましい位相空間分布を実現できる。図32(a)は、図31(a)と同様に可動導体22eが設けられない比較例において、イオンビームIBが過収束および発散している様子を示す。本図における引出電流Iextは、比較的低い「1mA」である。これに対して、図32(b)は、引出電流Iextが同じ「1mA」の場合に、可動導体22eがイオンビームIBの過収束および発散を緩和している様子を示す。この例では、伸縮機構22fが導体(例えば、グラファイト、タングステン、モリブデン)によって構成されているため、可動導体22eはフロントスリット20cと同電位(引出電位Vext)である。 The movable conductor 22e according to this embodiment can mitigate the overfocusing and subsequent divergence of the ion beam IB under low-current conditions where the extraction current Iext is small, thereby achieving a desirable phase space distribution as shown by the white circles in FIG. 31 . FIG. 32(a) shows the overfocusing and divergence of the ion beam IB in a comparative example in which the movable conductor 22e is not provided, similar to FIG. 31(a). The extraction current Iext in this figure is relatively low at 1 mA. In contrast, FIG. 32(b) shows how the movable conductor 22e mitigate the overfocusing and divergence of the ion beam IB when the extraction current Iext is the same at 1 mA. In this example, the extension mechanism 22f is made of a conductor (e.g., graphite, tungsten, or molybdenum), so the movable conductor 22e is at the same potential (extraction potential Vext ) as the front slit 20c.

 図32(b)においても、イオンビームIBはフロントスリット20cの第1開口OP1の下流で収束しているが、その位置は可動導体22eの第4開口OP4の近傍となり、図32(a)より第1開口OP1から下流側に離れている。更に、イオンビームIBの収束の程度も、図32(b)では図32(a)より大幅に緩和されている。この結果、図32(b)では、「1mA」のような低電流条件下であっても、望ましい位相空間分布のイオンビームIBを実現できる。なお、図32(a)および図32(b)では、フロントスリット20cとサプレッション電極22aの距離が実質的に同じである。このように、図32(b)の実施例によれば、図32(a)の比較例からフロントスリット20cとサプレッション電極22aの距離を増加させることなく(すなわち、装置の大型化を招くことなく)、望ましい位相空間分布のイオンビームIBを実現できる。 In Figure 32(b), the ion beam IB also converges downstream of the first opening OP1 in the front slit 20c, but the position is near the fourth opening OP4 in the movable conductor 22e, which is further downstream from the first opening OP1 than in Figure 32(a). Furthermore, the degree of convergence of the ion beam IB is significantly reduced in Figure 32(b) than in Figure 32(a). As a result, in Figure 32(b), an ion beam IB with a desirable phase spatial distribution can be achieved even under low current conditions such as 1 mA. Note that the distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a is substantially the same in Figures 32(a) and 32(b). Thus, according to the embodiment of Figure 32(b), an ion beam IB with a desirable phase spatial distribution can be achieved without increasing the distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a compared to the comparative example of Figure 32(a) (i.e., without increasing the size of the device).

 以上のように、可動導体22eは、引出電位Vextと異なる制御電位Vctl(すなわち、Vext-Vadd)が印加されなくても、フロントスリット20cの下流側に配置されるだけで、イオンビームIBの位相空間分布や発散を調整する効果をもたらす。この効果は、フロントスリット20cと可動導体22eの距離(Gap)を、引出電流Iext等の条件に合わせて調整することで最適化されうる。また、可動導体22eに任意の制御電位Vctlを印加できる場合は、当該制御電位Vctlおよび/または第1距離Gapを引出電流Iext等の条件に合わせて調整することで、最適な位相空間分布や発散を有するイオンビームIBを実現できる。このように、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置では、可動導体22eに、第2開口OP2から出射されるイオンビームIBの位相空間分布を制御するために、引出電位Vextと基準電位Vgndの間の電位である制御電位Vctlが印加されてもよい。 As described above, even if the movable conductor 22e is not applied with a control potential V ctl (i.e., V ext -V add ) different from the extraction potential V ext , simply by being disposed downstream of the front slit 20c, the effect of adjusting the phase space distribution and divergence of the ion beam IB can be achieved. This effect can be optimized by adjusting the distance (Gap 1 ) between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e in accordance with conditions such as the extraction current I ext . Furthermore, when an arbitrary control potential V ctl can be applied to the movable conductor 22e, an ion beam IB having an optimal phase space distribution and divergence can be achieved by adjusting the control potential V ctl and/or the first distance Gap 1 in accordance with conditions such as the extraction current I ext . As described above, in the ion extraction device according to this embodiment, a control potential Vctl, which is a potential between the extraction potential Vext and the reference potential Vgnd, may be applied to the movable conductor 22e in order to control the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB extracted from the second opening OP2.

 図33は、図32(b)より引出電流Iextが大きい状態を表す。具体的には、図33(a)は、引出電流Iextが「2mA」の状態を示し、図33(b)は、引出電流Iextが「4mA」の状態を示す。引出電流Iextが「1mA」の図32(b)、引出電流Iextが「2mA」の図33(a)、引出電流Iextが「4mA」の図33(b)から理解されるように、引出電流Iextが大きくなるにつれて、フロントスリット20cと可動導体22eの第1距離Gapを小さく調整することで、与えられた引出電流Iextの条件に対してイオンビームIBの位相空間分布や発散を最適化できる。なお、図33(b)では、第1距離Gapが零であり、フロントスリット20cと可動導体22eが互いに密着し、実質的に一つの電極または導体になっている。 Fig. 33 shows a state where the extraction current Iext is larger than that shown in Fig. 32(b). Specifically, Fig. 33(a) shows a state where the extraction current Iext is 2 mA, and Fig. 33(b) shows a state where the extraction current Iext is 4 mA. As can be seen from Fig. 32(b) where the extraction current Iext is 1 mA, Fig. 33(a) where the extraction current Iext is 2 mA, and Fig. 33(b) where the extraction current Iext is 4 mA, the phase space distribution and divergence of the ion beam IB can be optimized for a given extraction current Iext by reducing the first distance Gap1 between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e as the extraction current Iext increases. In FIG. 33(b), the first distance Gap 1 is zero, and the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e are in close contact with each other, essentially forming one electrode or conductor.

 以上のように、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置では、第1開口OP1と第4開口OP4の間の第1距離Gapが、イオンビームIBがウェハに照射される際に所望の位相空間分布を有するように制御される。 As described above, in the ion extraction device according to this embodiment, the first distance Gap1 between the first opening OP1 and the fourth opening OP4 is controlled so that the ion beam IB has a desired phase space distribution when it is irradiated onto the wafer.

 図34は、引出電流Iextに応じた第1距離Gapおよび第2距離Gapの第1制御例を示す。図34(a)は、引出電流Iextに応じたフロントスリット20cとサプレッション電極22aの間の総距離(図29や図30に示されるように、厳密には可動導体22eの厚さも考慮する必要があるが、便宜的に第1距離Gapおよび第2距離Gapの和「Gap+Gap」として表される)の制御態様を表し、図34(b)は、引出電流Iextに応じたフロントスリット20cと可動導体22eの間の第1距離Gapの制御態様を表す。 Fig. 34 shows a first control example of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 in accordance with the extract current I ext . Fig. 34(a) shows a control mode of the total distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a in accordance with the extract current I ext (as shown in Figs. 29 and 30, strictly speaking, the thickness of the movable conductor 22e must also be taken into consideration, but for convenience, this is expressed as the sum of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 , "Gap 1 + Gap 2 "). Fig. 34(b) shows a control mode of the first distance Gap 1 between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e in accordance with the extract current I ext .

 図32および図33に関して前述されたように、引出電流Iextが小さいほど第1距離Gapは大きくなるように制御される。このため、第1距離Gapは、引出電流Iextが最小値である「0」の時に最大値Gとなるように制御される。以降、引出電流Iextが後述される閾値電流Ithに達するまでの間、総距離「Gap+Gap」は一定値Gに保たれる。これは、サプレッション電極22aをフロントスリット20cに対して固定することを意味する。引出電流Iextが「0」から閾値電流Ithに増加するまでの間は、図32および図33に関して前述されたように、第1距離Gapが漸減制御されることで、最適なイオンビームIBが実現される。 As described above with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 , the first distance Gap 1 is controlled to increase as the extraction current I ext decreases. Therefore, the first distance Gap 1 is controlled to reach a maximum value G 0 when the extraction current I ext is at its minimum value of "0." Thereafter, until the extraction current I ext reaches a threshold current I th (described below), the total distance "Gap 1 + Gap 2 " is maintained at a constant value G c . This means that the suppression electrode 22 a is fixed with respect to the front slit 20 c. Until the extraction current I ext increases from "0" to the threshold current I th , the first distance Gap 1 is controlled to gradually decrease, as described above with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 , thereby achieving an optimal ion beam IB.

 閾値電流Ithは、一定の総距離Gの下での最適な第1距離Gapが「0」になる引出電流Iextである。この時、図33(b)に示されるように、フロントスリット20cと可動導体22eが互いに密着している。引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithより大きい領域では、第1距離Gapを「0」より小さくすることができないため、当該第1距離Gapが「0」の状態で、第2距離Gapが漸減制御される。この結果、引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithより大きい領域では、総距離「Gap(=0)+Gap」が一定値Gから漸減する。以上のように、図34の例では、閾値電流Ith以下の引出電流Iextに対しては第1距離Gapが適応制御され、閾値電流Ith以上の引出電流Iextに対しては第2距離Gapが適応制御される。このため、広範囲の引出電流Iextに対して、適切な位相空間分布や発散を有するイオンビームIBが実現される。 The threshold current Ith is the extract current Iext at which the optimal first distance Gap1 becomes "0" under a constant total distance Gc . At this time, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e are in close contact with each other. In a region where the extract current Iext is larger than the threshold current Ith , the first distance Gap1 cannot be made smaller than "0", so the second distance Gap2 is controlled to gradually decrease while the first distance Gap1 is "0". As a result, in a region where the extract current Iext is larger than the threshold current Ith , the total distance " Gap1 (=0) + Gap2 " gradually decreases from the constant value Gc . 34, the first distance Gap 1 is adaptively controlled for the extraction current I ext that is equal to or less than the threshold current I th , and the second distance Gap 2 is adaptively controlled for the extraction current I ext that is equal to or greater than the threshold current I th . Therefore, an ion beam IB having an appropriate phase space distribution and divergence is realized for a wide range of extraction current I ext .

 図35は、引出電流Iextに応じた第1距離Gapおよび第2距離Gapの第2制御例を示す。図35(a)は、引出電流Iextに応じたフロントスリット20cとサプレッション電極22aの間の総距離(図29や図30に示されるように、厳密には可動導体22eの厚さも考慮する必要があるが、便宜的に第1距離Gapおよび第2距離Gapの和「Gap+Gap」として表される)の制御態様を表し、図35(b)は、引出電流Iextに応じたフロントスリット20cと可動導体22eの間の第1距離Gapの制御態様を表す。 Fig. 35 shows a second control example of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 in accordance with the extract current I ext . Fig. 35(a) shows a control mode of the total distance between the front slit 20c and the suppression electrode 22a in accordance with the extract current I ext (as shown in Figs. 29 and 30, strictly speaking, the thickness of the movable conductor 22e must also be taken into consideration, but for convenience, this is expressed as the sum of the first distance Gap 1 and the second distance Gap 2 , "Gap 1 + Gap 2 "). Fig. 35(b) shows a control mode of the first distance Gap 1 between the front slit 20c and the movable conductor 22e in accordance with the extract current I ext .

 図34(b)に示されるように、第1距離Gapが連続的に制御可能だった第1制御例に対して、図35(b)に示される第2制御例では、第1距離Gapが段階的または非連続的に制御される。例えば、引出電流Iextが「0」と第1電流Iの間では、第1距離Gapが第1値Gに固定され、引出電流Iextが第1電流Iと第2電流Iの間では、第1距離Gapが第1値Gより小さい第2値Gに固定され、引出電流Iextが第2電流Iと閾値電流Ithの間では、第1距離Gapが第2値Gより小さい第3値Gに固定される。第1制御例と同様に、引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ith以上の場合、第1距離Gapが「0」に固定される。 34(b), in contrast to the first control example in which the first distance Gap 1 could be continuously controlled, in the second control example shown in Fig. 35(b), the first distance Gap 1 is controlled in a stepwise or discontinuous manner. For example, when the extraction current Iext is between "0" and the first current I1 , the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to a first value G1 , when the extraction current Iext is between the first current I1 and the second current I2 , the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to a second value G2 that is smaller than the first value G1 , and when the extraction current Iext is between the second current I2 and the threshold current Ith , the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to a third value G3 that is smaller than the second value G2 . As in the first control example, when the extracted current I ext is equal to or greater than the threshold current I th , the first distance Gap 1 is fixed to “0”.

 このように段階的に制御される第1距離Gapに対して、第2距離Gapが連続的に制御される。具体的には、第2距離Gapは、引出電流Iextが「0」付近の最小値である時に最大値または極大値に制御される。この時、総距離「Gap+Gap」は最大値Gmaxを取る。以降、引出電流Iextが第1電流Iに達するまでの間、第2距離Gapおよび総距離「Gap(=G)+Gap」が漸減制御される。引出電流Iextが第1電流Iに達すると、総距離「Gap(=G)+Gap」が最小値または極小値になる。 The second distance Gap2 is continuously controlled relative to the first distance Gap1 , which is controlled in stages in this manner. Specifically, the second distance Gap2 is controlled to a maximum or local maximum value when the extraction current Iext is at a minimum value near "0." At this time, the total distance " Gap1 + Gap2 " reaches a maximum value Gmax . Thereafter, the second distance Gap2 and the total distance " Gap1 (= G1 ) + Gap2 " are gradually decreased until the extraction current Iext reaches the first current I1 . When the extraction current Iext reaches the first current I1 , the total distance " Gap1 (= G1 ) + Gap2 " reaches a minimum or local minimum value.

 また、引出電流Iextが第1電流Iに達すると、前述のように、第1距離Gapは第2値Gに下げられる。一方、第2距離Gapは、最大値または極大値に上げられる。この時、総距離「Gap+Gap」は再び最大値Gmaxを取る。以降、引出電流Iextが第2電流Iに達するまでの間、第2距離Gapおよび総距離「Gap(=G)+Gap」が漸減制御される。引出電流Iextが第2電流Iに達すると、総距離「Gap(=G)+Gap」が最小値または極小値になる。 Furthermore, when the extraction current Iext reaches the first current I1 , as described above, the first distance Gap1 is reduced to the second value G2 . Meanwhile, the second distance Gap2 is increased to a maximum or local maximum value. At this time, the total distance " Gap1 + Gap2 " again reaches the maximum value Gmax . Thereafter, the second distance Gap2 and the total distance " Gap1 (= G2 ) + Gap2 " are gradually reduced until the extraction current Iext reaches the second current I2 . When the extraction current Iext reaches the second current I2 , the total distance " Gap1 (= G2 ) + Gap2 " becomes a minimum or local minimum value.

 また、引出電流Iextが第2電流Iに達すると、前述のように、第1距離Gapは第3値Gに下げられる。一方、第2距離Gapは、最大値または極大値に上げられる。この時、総距離「Gap+Gap」は再び最大値Gmaxを取る。以降、引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithに達するまでの間、第2距離Gapおよび総距離「Gap(=G)+Gap」が漸減制御される。引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithに達すると、総距離「Gap(=G)+Gap」が最小値または極小値になる。 Furthermore, when the extraction current Iext reaches the second current I2 , as described above, the first distance Gap1 is reduced to the third value G3 . Meanwhile, the second distance Gap2 is increased to the maximum value or local maximum value. At this time, the total distance " Gap1 + Gap2 " again reaches the maximum value Gmax . Thereafter, the second distance Gap2 and the total distance " Gap1 (= G3 ) + Gap2 " are gradually reduced until the extraction current Iext reaches the threshold current Ith . When the extraction current Iext reaches the threshold current Ith , the total distance " Gap1 (= G3 ) + Gap2 " becomes the minimum value or local minimum value.

 また、引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithに達すると、前述のように、第1距離Gapは最小値「0」に下げられる。一方、第2距離Gapは、最大値または極大値に上げられる。この時、総距離「Gap+Gap」は再び最大値Gmaxを取る。以降、引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithから増加すると、第2距離Gapおよび総距離「Gap(=0)+Gap」が漸減制御される。この結果、引出電流Iextが閾値電流Ithより大きい領域では、総距離「Gap(=0)+Gap」が最大値Gmaxから漸減する。以上のように、図35の例では、閾値電流Ith以下の引出電流Iextに対しては、第1距離Gapが段階的に適応制御されると共に、第2距離Gapが連続的に適応制御され、閾値電流Ith以上の引出電流Iextに対しては第2距離Gapが連続的に適応制御される。このため、広範囲の引出電流Iextに対して、適切な位相空間分布や発散を有するイオンビームIBが実現される。 Furthermore, when the extraction current Iext reaches the threshold current Ith , as described above, the first distance Gap1 is reduced to the minimum value "0". Meanwhile, the second distance Gap2 is increased to the maximum or local maximum value. At this time, the total distance " Gap1 + Gap2 " again takes on the maximum value Gmax . Thereafter, as the extraction current Iext increases from the threshold current Ith , the second distance Gap2 and the total distance " Gap1 (=0) + Gap2 " are gradually reduced. As a result, in the region where the extraction current Iext is greater than the threshold current Ith , the total distance " Gap1 (=0) + Gap2 " gradually decreases from the maximum value Gmax . 35 , for an extraction current I ext equal to or less than the threshold current I th , the first distance Gap 1 is adaptively controlled in a stepwise manner, and the second distance Gap 2 is adaptively controlled continuously, while for an extraction current I ext equal to or greater than the threshold current I th, the second distance Gap 2 is adaptively controlled continuously. Therefore, an ion beam IB having an appropriate phase space distribution and divergence is realized for a wide range of extraction current I ext .

 続いて、図29を参照して、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置における様々なパラメータの設定例について説明する。但し、各パラメータの設定方法は任意であり、以下で例示するものに限定されない。 Next, with reference to Figure 29, we will explain examples of setting various parameters in the ion extraction device according to this embodiment. However, the method for setting each parameter is arbitrary and is not limited to the examples given below.

 第1ステップとして、所望のエネルギーのイオンビームIBが得られるように、引出電位Vext(先の例では「+40kV」)およびサプレッション電位Vsup(先の例では「-2kV」)が設定される。 In the first step, the extraction potential V ext (+40 kV in the previous example) and the suppression potential V sup (−2 kV in the previous example) are set so as to obtain an ion beam IB with a desired energy.

 第2ステップとして、所望の引出電流Iextが得られるように、イオン源20の状態を反映する様々な装置パラメータが設定される。ここで、装置パラメータとしては、イオン源20のパラメータとして設定されるガス種、ガス流量、ベーパライザ温度、アーク電流Iarc、アーク電圧、ソースマグネット電流、イオン源20から引き出される所望イオンを含むイオン群が単位時間当たりに運ぶ電荷の総量である実効引出電流、ウェハに照射されるイオンビームIBのビーム電流、の少なくともいずれかが例示される。このように第2ステップにおいて設定された様々な装置パラメータの少なくともいずれかは、イオン源状態取得部401によって取得可能である。また、実効引出電流や、イオン源20に印加される引出電位Vextと可動導体22eに印加される制御電位Vctlの電位差である追加電位Vaddは、電気情報取得部402によって取得可能である。 In a second step, various apparatus parameters reflecting the state of the ion source 20 are set so as to obtain a desired extraction current Iext . Examples of the apparatus parameters include at least one of the following: the gas species, gas flow rate, vaporizer temperature, arc current Iarc , arc voltage, source magnet current, an effective extraction current which is the total amount of charge carried per unit time by an ion group including desired ions extracted from the ion source 20; and the beam current of the ion beam IB irradiated onto the wafer, all of which are set as parameters of the ion source 20. At least one of the various apparatus parameters set in this way in the second step can be acquired by the ion source state acquisition unit 401. Furthermore, the effective extraction current and the additional potential Vadd which is the potential difference between the extraction potential Vext applied to the ion source 20 and the control potential Vctl applied to the movable conductor 22e can be acquired by the electrical information acquisition unit 402.

 第3ステップとして、第2ステップにおいて設定された装置パラメータの下で、所望の引出電流Iextが得られるように、追加電位Vadd(すなわち、制御電位Vctl)が調整される。ここで、装置パラメータによって定まるイオン種の分子量をmとして、引出電流Iextがm-1/2・Vadd 3/2に略比例するという関係式が利用される。このように、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置では、イオン源状態取得部401によって取得された装置パラメータに応じて、可動導体22eに印加される制御電位Vctlが制御されてもよい。また、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置では、電気情報取得部402によって取得された追加電位Vaddおよび実効引出電流に応じて、可動導体22eに印加される制御電位Vctlが制御されてもよい。 In a third step, the additional potential V add (i.e., the control potential V ctl ) is adjusted so as to obtain a desired extraction current I ext under the apparatus parameters set in the second step. Here, the relational expression that the extraction current I ext is approximately proportional to m −½ ·V add 3/2, where m is the molecular weight of the ion species determined by the apparatus parameters, is utilized. In this manner, in the ion extraction apparatus according to this embodiment, the control potential V ctl applied to the movable conductor 22 e may be controlled in accordance with the apparatus parameters acquired by the ion source status acquisition unit 401. Furthermore, in the ion extraction apparatus according to this embodiment, the control potential V ctl applied to the movable conductor 22 e may be controlled in accordance with the additional potential V add and the effective extraction current acquired by the electrical information acquisition unit 402.

 第4ステップとして、x1方向の位相空間分布(図31(b)参照)における傾斜角度x1′がビームラインAの設計範囲内に収まるように第2距離Gapが調整される。ここで、引出電流Iextがm-1/2・Vext 3/2・Gap -2に略比例するという関係式が利用される。 In the fourth step, the second distance Gap 2 is adjusted so that the tilt angle x1′ in the phase space distribution in the x1 direction (see FIG. 31(b)) falls within the design range of the beamline A. Here, the relational expression that the extraction current I ext is approximately proportional to m −1/2 ·V ext 3/2 ·Gap 2 −2 is utilized.

 第5ステップとして、サプレッション電極22a等の位置、姿勢、開口形状等の調整を通じて、イオンビームIBの軌道軸が調整される。この調整では、位相空間分布の重心が変化するが、その形状は変化しない。 In the fifth step, the orbital axis of the ion beam IB is adjusted by adjusting the position, attitude, aperture shape, etc. of the suppression electrode 22a, etc. This adjustment changes the center of gravity of the phase space distribution, but does not change its shape.

 第6ステップとして、図34(b)に関して前述されたように、第1距離Gapが調整される。このように、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置では、イオンビームIBの進行方向における第1開口OP1と第4開口OP4の間の第1距離Gapが、イオン源状態取得部401によって取得可能なイオン源20の状態に応じて、イオンビームIBがウェハに照射される際に所望の位相空間分布を有するように制御されてもよい。また、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置では、電気情報取得部402によって取得された追加電位Vaddおよび実効引出電流に応じて、イオンビームIBの進行方向における第1開口OP1と第4開口OP4の間の第1距離Gapが制御されてもよい。 34( b ), the first distance Gap1 is adjusted. In this manner, in the ion extraction apparatus according to this embodiment, the first distance Gap1 between the first opening OP1 and the fourth opening OP4 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB may be controlled in accordance with the state of the ion source 20 obtainable by the ion source state obtaining unit 401 so that the ion beam IB has a desired phase space distribution when irradiated onto a wafer. In addition, in the ion extraction apparatus according to this embodiment, the first distance Gap1 between the first opening OP1 and the fourth opening OP4 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB may be controlled in accordance with the additional potential V add and the effective extraction current obtained by the electrical information obtaining unit 402.

 なお、イオン源20が生成するプラズマの密度によっては、第1距離Gapを調整しなくても、所望のイオンビームIBが得られる場合がある。特に、プラズマが濃い場合には、例えば、第1距離Gapを零に固定して(図33(b)参照)可動導体22eを実質的に無効化してもよい。このように、イオン源20が生成するプラズマの密度に応じて、可動導体22eの使用有無が選択されてもよい。 Depending on the density of the plasma generated by the ion source 20, a desired ion beam IB may be obtained without adjusting the first distance Gap 1. In particular, when the plasma is dense, the first distance Gap 1 may be fixed to zero (see FIG. 33(b)), for example, to substantially disable the movable conductor 22e. In this way, whether or not to use the movable conductor 22e may be selected depending on the density of the plasma generated by the ion source 20.

 本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置は、前述のビームプロファイラ46に設けられる角度測定装置を利用して、前述の様々なパラメータを適応的に制御してもよい。この場合の角度測定装置は、基準電極22bの下流において、イオンビームIBの位相空間分布を測定する位相空間分布測定器を構成する。このような位相空間分布測定器によって測定されたイオンビームIBの位相空間分布に応じて、当該イオンビームIBの進行方向における第1開口OP1と第4開口OP4の間の第1距離Gap、および、可動導体22eに印加される制御電位Vctl(すなわち、追加電位Vadd)の少なくともいずれかが制御されてもよい。 The ion extraction system according to this embodiment may adaptively control the various parameters described above by utilizing an angle measurement device provided in the beam profiler 46. In this case, the angle measurement device constitutes a phase space distribution measurement device that measures the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB downstream of the reference electrode 22 b. At least one of the first distance Gap 1 between the first aperture OP1 and the fourth aperture OP4 in the traveling direction of the ion beam IB and the control potential V ctl (i.e., additional potential V add ) applied to the movable conductor 22 e may be controlled according to the phase space distribution of the ion beam IB measured by such a phase space distribution measurement device.

 図36は、第2実施形態に係るイオン引出装置の模式図である。イオン引出装置は、所望イオンDIを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源20と、イオン源20またはアークチャンバ20aから、所望イオンDIを含むイオン群を引き出して第1イオンビームIB1を生成する引出部22と、磁界または磁場を印加することによって第1イオンビームIB1を偏向する第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aと、質量分析磁石装置24aによって偏向された第1イオンビームIB1に含まれる所望イオンDIを通過させる第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24b(図1等)と、引出部22の出口と質量分析磁石装置24aの入口の間の少なくとも一部である第1領域R1と、質量分析磁石装置24aの入口と出口の間の少なくとも一部である第2領域R2に、電位差を設ける電位差設定部403を備える。第1イオンビームIB1は、質量分析スリット24bを通過する際に、後述されるように変成イオンMIが低減され、所望イオンDIを多く含む第2イオンビームとなる。この第2イオンビームは、注入処理室14においてウェハに照射される。 36 is a schematic diagram of an ion extraction device according to a second embodiment. The ion extraction device includes an ion source 20 that generates plasma containing desired ions DI, an extraction unit 22 that extracts ions containing the desired ions DI from the ion source 20 or the arc chamber 20a to generate a first ion beam IB1, a mass analysis magnet 24a serving as a first beam deflection device that deflects the first ion beam IB1 by applying a magnetic field or magnetic field, a mass analysis slit 24b (see FIG. 1, etc.) serving as a first separation opening that passes the desired ions DI contained in the first ion beam IB1 deflected by the mass analysis magnet 24a, and a potential difference setting unit 403 that sets a potential difference between a first region R1, which is at least a portion of the region between the outlet of the extraction unit 22 and the entrance of the mass analysis magnet 24a, and a second region R2, which is at least a portion of the region between the entrance and exit of the mass analysis magnet 24a. When the first ion beam IB1 passes through the mass analysis slit 24b, the metamorphic ions MI are reduced as described below, and it becomes a second ion beam containing a large amount of desired ions DI. This second ion beam is irradiated onto the wafer in the implantation processing chamber 14.

 図36の第1領域R1において模式的に示されているように、引出部22によってイオン源20から引き出された第1イオンビームIB1は、所望イオンDIの他に非所望イオンOIを含みうる。例えば、所望イオンDIが二価イオンである場合、非所望イオンOIは一価のダイマーイオンである。所望イオンDIとしての二価イオンは、便宜的にX2+と表される。ここで、「X」は質量Mを有する単位原子または単位分子を表し、「2+」はイオンの電荷(正の二価)を表し、単位電荷をeとして総電荷が2eであることを表す。非所望イオンOIとしてのダイマーイオンは、便宜的にX と表される。ここで、「X」は質量Mを有する単位原子または単位分子が二つあることを表し(従って、総質量は2M)、「+」はイオンの電荷(正の一価)を表し、単位電荷をeとして総電荷がeであることを表す。なお、所望イオンDIは、正または負の一価イオンでもよいし、負の二価イオンでもよいし、正または負の三価以上の多価イオンでもよい。 As schematically shown in the first region R1 of FIG. 36 , the first ion beam IB1 extracted from the ion source 20 by the extraction unit 22 may include undesired ions OI in addition to desired ions DI. For example, if the desired ions DI are divalent ions, the undesired ions OI are singly charged dimer ions. A divalent ion serving as a desired ion DI is conveniently represented as X 2+ . Here, "X" represents a unit atom or unit molecule having a mass M, "2+" represents the charge of the ion (positive divalent), and indicates that the total charge is 2e, where e is the unit charge. A dimer ion serving as an undesired ion OI is conveniently represented as X 2+ . Here, "X 2 " represents two unit atoms or unit molecules having a mass M (hence, the total mass is 2M), "+" represents the charge of the ion (positive monovalent), and indicates that the total charge is e, where e is the unit charge. The desired ions DI may be positive or negative monovalent ions, negative divalent ions, or positive or negative trivalent or higher polyvalent ions.

 以上のように、質量Mおよび電荷2eの所望イオンDIと、質量2Mおよび電荷eの非所望イオンOIは、そのまま質量分析磁石装置24aに入ると、印加される磁界によって異なる中心軌道に偏向されるため、後段の質量分析スリット24b等によって適切に分離できる(すなわち、非所望イオンOIが適切に除去される)。これは、磁界中の回転運動の半径であるラーモア半径が、所望イオンDIと非所望イオンOIで異なるためである。 As described above, when desired ions DI with mass M and charge 2e and undesired ions OI with mass 2M and charge e enter the mass analysis magnet device 24a as is, they are deflected to different central orbits by the applied magnetic field, allowing them to be properly separated by the subsequent mass analysis slit 24b, etc. (i.e., undesired ions OI are properly removed). This is because the Larmor radii, which are the radii of rotational motion in the magnetic field, are different for desired ions DI and undesired ions OI.

 具体的には、ラーモア半径rは、r=(2mE)1/2/(qB)と表される。ここで、mはイオンの質量、Eはイオンのエネルギー、qはイオンの電荷、Bは質量分析磁石装置24aで印加される磁束密度をそれぞれ表す。所望イオンDIおよび非所望イオンOIは、引出部22における引出電位Vextによって、それぞれ2eVextおよびeVextのエネルギーを持つ。この場合、所望イオンDIのラーモア半径は、(2・M・2eVext1/2/(2eB)=(MVext1/2/(e1/2B)であり、非所望イオンOIのラーモア半径は、(2・2M・eVext1/2/(eB)=2(MVext1/2/(e1/2B)である。このように、非所望イオンOIのラーモア半径は、所望イオンDIのラーモア半径の2倍であり、質量分析磁石装置24aを通じて両イオンDI、OIが適切に分離される。なお、ここでは電位差設定部403によって設けられる電位差を便宜的に零とした。 Specifically, the Larmor radius r is expressed as r = (2mE) 1/2 /(qB), where m is the mass of the ion, E is the energy of the ion, q is the charge of the ion, and B is the magnetic flux density applied by the mass analysis magnet device 24a. The desired ions DI and undesired ions OI have energies of 2 eV ext and eV ext , respectively, due to the extraction potential V ext in the extraction section 22. In this case, the Larmor radius of the desired ion DI is (2·M·2 eV ext ) 1/2 /(2 eB) = (MV ext ) 1/2 /(e 1/2 B), and the Larmor radius of the undesired ion OI is (2·2M·eV ext ) 1/2 /(eB) = 2(MV ext ) 1/2 /(e 1/2 B). In this way, the Larmor radius of the undesired ion OI is twice the Larmor radius of the desired ion DI, and both ions DI and OI are appropriately separated through the mass analysis magnet device 24a. Note that here, the potential difference provided by the potential difference setting unit 403 is set to zero for convenience.

 しかし、非所望イオンOIの一部は、第1領域R1を通過する際に分解および荷電変換の少なくともいずれかを被ることによって変成イオンMIに変わりうる。非所望イオンOIがダイマーイオンX である場合、質量Mおよび電荷eのXが変成イオンMIとして生成しうる。例えば、第1領域R1と第2領域R2の境界付近で変成イオンMIが生成したとする。この場合、変成イオンMIに分解される前の非所望イオンOIのエネルギーは、前述の通りeVextである。この非所望イオンOIが、変成イオンMIと中性の原子または分子Nに二分されるため、変成イオンMIのエネルギーはeVext/2である。この変成イオンMIのラーモア半径は、(2・M・eVext/2)1/2/(eB)=(MVext1/2/(e1/2B)である。これは、前述の所望イオンDIのラーモア半径と略等しい。 However, some of the undesired ions OI may be transformed into modified ions MI by undergoing at least one of decomposition and charge conversion when passing through the first region R1. If the undesired ions OI are dimer ions X2 + , X + with mass M and charge e may be generated as modified ions MI. For example, suppose modified ions MI are generated near the boundary between the first region R1 and the second region R2. In this case, the energy of the undesired ions OI before being decomposed into modified ions MI is eVext , as described above. Because the undesired ions OI are split into modified ions MI and neutral atoms or molecules N, the energy of the modified ions MI is eVext /2. The Larmor radius of the modified ions MI is (2·M· eVext /2) 1/2 /(eB)=( MVext ) 1/2 /(e1 /2B ). This is approximately equal to the Larmor radius of the desired ion DI mentioned above.

 このため、質量分析磁石装置24aおよび質量分析スリット24bだけでは、変成イオンMIを所望イオンDIから分離することができない。なお、変成イオンMIは、この例に限定されず、所望イオンDIと実質的に同等の中心軌道またはラーモア半径を有する(すなわち、質量分析磁石装置24aおよび質量分析スリット24bだけでは所望イオンDIから実質的に分離できない)任意のイオンでよい。このように変成イオンMIが混入した第2イオンビームを、注入処理室14においてウェハに照射することは望ましくない。 For this reason, the modified ions MI cannot be separated from the desired ions DI using only the mass analysis magnet device 24a and mass analysis slit 24b. Note that the modified ions MI are not limited to this example, and may be any ions that have a central orbit or Larmor radius substantially equivalent to that of the desired ions DI (i.e., ions that cannot be substantially separated from the desired ions DI using only the mass analysis magnet device 24a and mass analysis slit 24b). It is undesirable to irradiate a wafer in the implantation processing chamber 14 with a second ion beam that contains modified ions MI in this way.

 そこで、本実施形態では、電位差設定部403が設けられる。電位差設定部403によって設けられる電位差は、第1領域R1を通過する第1イオンビームIB1中のイオン群の一部(例えば、非所望イオンOI)が分解および荷電変換の少なくともいずれかを被ることによって生成した変成イオンMIと所望イオンDIが第2領域R2において互いに異なる中心軌道を持ち、変成イオンMIの少なくとも一部が質量分析スリット24bを通過できないように設定されている。 Therefore, in this embodiment, a potential difference setting unit 403 is provided. The potential difference set by the potential difference setting unit 403 is set so that the modified ions MI and desired ions DI, which are generated when some of the ions in the first ion beam IB1 passing through the first region R1 (for example, undesired ions OI) undergo at least one of decomposition and charge conversion, have different central orbits in the second region R2, and at least some of the modified ions MI cannot pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.

 例えば、電位差設定部403は、第1領域R1に第1基準電位Vr1を印加し、第2領域R2に第1基準電位Vr1と異なる第1バイアス電位Vb1を印加する。第1基準電位Vr1は、基準電極22bに印加される第3基準電位としてのグランド電位Vgndと等しくてもよく、以下では便宜的に零(0)であるものとする。このような第1基準電位Vr1(=0)より高い電位は正の電位と便宜的に表され、このような第1基準電位Vr1(=0)より低い電位は負の電位と便宜的に表される。 For example, the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a first reference potential Vr1 to the first region R1, and applies a first bias potential Vb1 , which is different from the first reference potential Vr1 , to the second region R2. The first reference potential Vr1 may be equal to the ground potential Vgnd , which serves as a third reference potential applied to the reference electrode 22b, and will be assumed to be zero (0) below for convenience. A potential higher than this first reference potential Vr1 (= 0) is conveniently referred to as a positive potential, and a potential lower than this first reference potential Vr1 (= 0) is conveniently referred to as a negative potential.

 また、質量分析磁石装置24aの入口および出口の少なくともいずれかに、第1イオンビームIB1が通過する第5開口OP5を備え、第2領域R2の電位Vb1より低い第2サプレッション電位Vsup2が印加される第2サプレッション電極24e(入口側)および/または24f(出口側)が設けられてもよい。第5開口OP5は、フロントスリット20c(図29等)と同様、水平方向の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有してもよい。なお、第5開口OP5は、第2サプレッション電極24eおよび/または24fと別部材として設けられてもよい。 Furthermore, a fifth opening OP5 through which the first ion beam IB1 passes may be provided at at least one of the entrance and exit of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, and second suppression electrodes 24e (entrance side) and/or 24f (exit side) to which a second suppression potential Vsup2 lower than the potential Vb1 of the second region R2 is applied may be provided. The fifth opening OP5 may have a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction and a short opening width in the vertical direction, similar to the front slit 20c ( FIG. 29 , etc.). Note that the fifth opening OP5 may be provided as a separate member from the second suppression electrodes 24e and/or 24f.

 図36の例では、電位差設定部403が、第1領域R1に零の第1基準電位Vr1を印加し(不図示)、第2領域R2に負の第1バイアス電位Vb1を印加する。第1バイアス電位Vb1は、例えば、質量分析磁石装置24aの筐体に印加されてもよい。 36, the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero first reference potential Vr1 (not shown) to the first region R1 and applies a negative first bias potential Vb1 to the second region R2. The first bias potential Vb1 may be applied to the housing of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, for example.

 図37は、第1領域R1および第2領域R2に亘る、第1イオンビームIBの進行方向に沿った電位の変化例を模式的に示す。第1領域R1の開始位置に設けられるフロントスリット20cにおける電位は、引出電位Vext(例えば、「+40kV」)である。フロントスリット20cからサプレッション電極22aにかけて(本実施例では可動導体22eが設けられない)、電位は略線型に減少する。サプレッション電極22aにおける電位は、前述のサプレッション電位Vsup(例えば、「-2kV」)である。その下流側の領域では、基準電極22b等によって電位が零の第1基準電位Vr1に保たれる。 37 schematically shows an example of the change in potential along the traveling direction of the first ion beam IB across the first region R1 and the second region R2. The potential at the front slit 20c provided at the start position of the first region R1 is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., +40 kV). The potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided). The potential at the suppression electrode 22a is the aforementioned suppression potential V sup (e.g., −2 kV). In the region downstream thereof, the potential is maintained at a first reference potential V r1 of zero by the reference electrode 22b and the like.

 続いて、質量分析磁石装置24aおよび/または第2領域R2の入口に差し掛かると、前段の第2サプレッション電極24eによって、電位が第2サプレッション電位Vsup2に局所的に低下する。図示されるように、第2サプレッション電位Vsup2は、第1サプレッション電位Vsupおよび第1基準電位Vr1より低い。続く質量分析磁石装置24aの本体には負の第1バイアス電位Vb1が印加されている。この第1バイアス電位Vb1は、第2サプレッション電位Vsup2より高く、第1基準電位Vr1より低い。質量分析磁石装置24aおよび/または第2領域R2の出口では、後段の第2サプレッション電極24fによって、電位が第2サプレッション電位Vsup2に局所的に低下する。 Next, when the mass analysis magnet 24a and/or the entrance to the second region R2 are approached, the potential is locally lowered to a second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24e at the upstream stage. As shown in the figure, the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the first suppression potential Vsup and the first reference potential Vr1 . A negative first bias potential Vb1 is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet 24a. This first bias potential Vb1 is higher than the second suppression potential Vsup2 and lower than the first reference potential Vr1 . At the exit of the mass analysis magnet 24a and/or the second region R2, the potential is locally lowered to the second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24f at the downstream stage.

 ダイマーイオンとしての非所望イオンOIの変成によって生成する変成イオンMIは、第1領域R1と第2領域R2の境界付近で、引出電位Vextによる前述のエネルギーeVext/2と、第1バイアス電位Vb1によるエネルギー-eVb1を有する。このため、変成イオンMIの総エネルギーは、e(Vext/2-Vb1)と表される。一方、二価の所望イオンDIは、引出電位Vextによるエネルギー2eVextと、第1バイアス電位Vb1によるエネルギー-2eVb1を有する。このため、所望イオンDIの総エネルギーは、2e(Vext-Vb1)と表される。 The modified ions MI generated by the transformation of the undesired ions OI as dimer ions have the aforementioned energy eV ext /2 due to the extraction potential V ext and energy −eV b1 due to the first bias potential V b1 near the boundary between the first region R1 and the second region R2. Therefore, the total energy of the modified ions MI is expressed as e(V ext /2−V b1 ). On the other hand, the divalent desired ions DI have energy 2 eV ext due to the extraction potential V ext and energy −2 eV b1 due to the first bias potential V b1 . Therefore, the total energy of the desired ions DI is expressed as 2e(V ext −V b1 ).

 以上のような第1バイアス電位Vb1によってもたらされるエネルギーの変化のために、質量分析磁石装置24aまたは第2領域R2における変成イオンMIの中心軌道またはラーモア半径が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道またはラーモア半径からずれる。具体的には、所望イオンDIのラーモア半径が(2・M・2e(Vext-Vb1))1/2/(2eB)=(M(Vext-Vb1))1/2/(e1/2B)であるのに対し、変成イオンMIのラーモア半径は(2・M・e(Vext/2-Vb1))1/2/(eB)=(M(Vext-2Vb1))1/2/(e1/2B)である。図36において点線によって模式的に示されるように、第2領域R2に印加される負の第1バイアス電位Vb1によって、変成イオンMIの中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道(実線)より外側に逸れる。このように外側に逸れた変成イオンMIは、後段の第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24b等によって遮断される。 Due to the change in energy brought about by the first bias potential V b1 as described above, the central orbit or Larmor radius of the deformed ions MI in the mass analysis magnet 24a or the second region R2 deviates from the central orbit or Larmor radius of the desired ions DI. Specifically, the Larmor radius of the desired ions DI is (2·M·2e(V ext −V b1 )) 1/2 /(2eB)=(M(V ext −V b1 )) 1/2 /(e 1/2 B), while the Larmor radius of the deformed ions MI is (2·M·e(V ext /2−V b1 )) 1/2 /(eB)=(M(V ext −2V b1 )) 1/2 /(e 1/2 B). 36, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI is deviated outward from the central orbit (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the negative first bias potential Vb1 applied to the second region R2. The deformed ion MI deviated outward in this manner is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.

 図38は、第1イオンビームIBの引出方向を基準とした様々なイオンの中心軌道の具体例を示す。「++」は正の二価の所望イオンDIの中心軌道を表し、「Dimer」は一価のダイマーイオンとしての非所望イオンOIの中心軌道を表し、「P1」は図36における位置P1(質量分析磁石装置24aに入る直前)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P2」は図36における位置P2(質量分析磁石装置24aに入った直後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P3」は図36における位置P3(位置P2より更に後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表す。 Figure 38 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB. "++" represents the central trajectory of the positively doubly charged desired ion DI, "Dimer" represents the central trajectory of the undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion, "P1" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 36 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), "P2" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 36 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), and "P3" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 36 (even later than position P2).

 図38における部分拡大図における矢印によって模式的に示されるように、変成イオンMIの中心軌道は、生成位置P1、P2、P3に応じて変動する。ここで、変成イオンMIの生成位置が上流側のP1から下流側のP2に変わった場合、当該位置P2で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道は、所望イオンDIの中心軌道に近づくものの一致することはない。そして、変成イオンMIの生成位置が更に下流側のP3に変わった場合、当該位置P3で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道は所望イオンDIの中心軌道から離れる。このように、第2領域R2および/または質量分析磁石装置24aに負の第1バイアス電位Vb1が印加される図36~図38の実施例では、変成イオンMIの生成位置によらず、その中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道と干渉することを効果的に防止できる。従って、第2領域R2および/または質量分析磁石装置24aに印加される第1バイアス電位Vb1は負であるのが好ましい。 As shown by the arrows in the enlarged partial view of FIG. 38 , the central orbit of the deformed ion MI varies depending on the generation position P1, P2, or P3. Here, when the generation position of the deformed ion MI changes from the upstream P1 to the downstream P2, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P2 approaches but does not coincide with the central orbit of the desired ion DI. Furthermore, when the generation position of the deformed ion MI changes further downstream to P3, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P3 moves away from the central orbit of the desired ion DI. Thus, in the examples of FIGS. 36 to 38 , in which a negative first bias potential V b1 is applied to the second region R2 and/or the mass analysis magnet device 24 a, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI can be effectively prevented from interfering with the central orbit of the desired ion DI, regardless of the generation position of the deformed ion MI. Therefore, it is preferable that the first bias potential V b1 applied to the second region R2 and/or the mass analysis magnet device 24 a be negative.

 図39は、電位差設定部403が、第1領域R1に零の第1基準電位Vr1を印加し(不図示)、第2領域R2に正の第1バイアス電位Vb1を印加する例を示す。第1バイアス電位Vb1は、例えば、質量分析磁石装置24aの筐体に印加されてもよい。 39 shows an example in which the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero first reference potential Vr1 (not shown) to the first region R1 and a positive first bias potential Vb1 to the second region R2. The first bias potential Vb1 may be applied to the housing of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, for example.

 図40は、第1領域R1および第2領域R2に亘る、第1イオンビームIBの進行方向に沿った電位の変化例を模式的に示す。フロントスリット20cにおける電位は、引出電位Vext(例えば、「+40kV」)である。フロントスリット20cからサプレッション電極22aにかけて(本実施例では可動導体22eが設けられない)、電位は略線型に減少する。サプレッション電極22aにおける電位は、前述のサプレッション電位Vsup(例えば、「-2kV」)である。その下流側の領域では、第1領域R1の開始位置に設けられる基準電極22b等によって電位が零の第1基準電位Vr1に保たれる。 40 schematically shows an example of the change in potential along the traveling direction of the first ion beam IB across the first region R1 and the second region R2. The potential at the front slit 20c is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., +40 kV). The potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided). The potential at the suppression electrode 22a is the aforementioned suppression potential V sup (e.g., −2 kV). In the downstream region, the potential is maintained at a first reference potential V r1 of zero by the reference electrode 22b and the like provided at the start position of the first region R1.

 続いて、質量分析磁石装置24aおよび/または第2領域R2の入口に差し掛かると、前段の第2サプレッション電極24eによって、電位が第2サプレッション電位Vsup2に局所的に低下する。図示されるように、第2サプレッション電位Vsup2は、第1サプレッション電位Vsupおよび第1基準電位Vr1より低い。続く質量分析磁石装置24aの本体には正の第1バイアス電位Vb1が印加されている。この第1バイアス電位Vb1は、第1基準電位Vr1より高い。質量分析磁石装置24aおよび/または第2領域R2の出口では、後段の第2サプレッション電極24fによって、電位が第2サプレッション電位Vsup2に局所的に低下する。 Next, when the mass analysis magnet 24a and/or the entrance to the second region R2 are approached, the potential is locally lowered to a second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24e at the upstream stage. As shown in the figure, the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the first suppression potential Vsup and the first reference potential Vr1 . A positive first bias potential Vb1 is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet 24a. This first bias potential Vb1 is higher than the first reference potential Vr1 . At the exit of the mass analysis magnet 24a and/or the second region R2, the potential is locally lowered to the second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24f at the downstream stage.

 図39において点線によって模式的に示されるように、第2領域R2に印加される正の第1バイアス電位Vb1によって、変成イオンMIの中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道(実線)より内側に逸れる。このように内側に逸れた変成イオンMIは、後段の第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24b等によって遮断される。 39, the central orbit of the modified ion MI is deviated inward from the central orbit (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the first positive bias potential Vb1 applied to the second region R2. The modified ion MI deviated inward in this manner is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.

 図41は、第1イオンビームIBの引出方向を基準とした様々なイオンの中心軌道の具体例を示す。「++」は正の二価の所望イオンDIの中心軌道を表し、「Dimer」は一価のダイマーイオンとしての非所望イオンOIの中心軌道を表し、「P1」は図39における位置P1(質量分析磁石装置24aに入る直前)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P2」は図39における位置P2(質量分析磁石装置24aに入った直後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P3」は図39における位置P3(位置P2より更に後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表す。 Figure 41 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB. "++" represents the central trajectory of a positively doubly charged desired ion DI, "Dimer" represents the central trajectory of an undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion, "P1" represents the central trajectory of a modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 39 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), "P2" represents the central trajectory of a modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 39 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), and "P3" represents the central trajectory of a modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 39 (even later than position P2).

 図41における部分拡大図における矢印によって模式的に示されるように、変成イオンMIの中心軌道は、生成位置P1、P2、P3に応じて変動する。ここで、上流側の位置P1で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道の左側にあるのに対し、下流側の位置P2で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道の右側にある。これは、P1とP2の間(特に、P2の近傍)で生成する変成イオンMIの中心軌道が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道と干渉して区別できなくなってしまうことを意味する。このように、第2領域R2および/または質量分析磁石装置24aに正の第1バイアス電位Vb1が印加される図39~図41の実施例では、変成イオンMIの生成位置によっては、その中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道と干渉してしまう。従って、前述されたように、第2領域R2および/または質量分析磁石装置24aに印加される第1バイアス電位Vb1は負であるのが好ましい。 As shown by the arrows in the enlarged partial view of FIG. 41 , the central orbit of the modified ion MI varies depending on the generation positions P1, P2, and P3. Here, the central orbit of the modified ion MI generated at the upstream position P1 is to the left of the central orbit of the desired ion DI, whereas the central orbit of the modified ion MI generated at the downstream position P2 is to the right of the central orbit of the desired ion DI. This means that the central orbit of the modified ion MI generated between P1 and P2 (particularly near P2) interferes with the central orbit of the desired ion DI, making them indistinguishable. Thus, in the examples of FIGS. 39 to 41 in which a positive first bias potential V b1 is applied to the second region R2 and/or the mass analysis magnet device 24 a, the central orbit of the modified ion MI may interfere with the central orbit of the desired ion DI depending on the generation position of the ion. Therefore, as described above, it is preferable that the first bias potential V b1 applied to the second region R2 and/or the mass analysis magnet device 24 a is negative.

 図42は、第3実施形態に係るイオン引出装置の模式図である。図36等における第2実施形態と同様の構成要素には同じ符号が付され、重複する説明が省略される。 FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of an ion extraction device according to the third embodiment. Components similar to those of the second embodiment in FIG. 36 and elsewhere are designated by the same reference numerals, and redundant explanations will be omitted.

 本実施形態では、電位差設定部403が、第2領域R2に第2基準電位Vr2を印加し、第1領域R1に第2基準電位Vr2と異なる第2バイアス電位Vb2を印加する。第2基準電位Vr2は、基準電極22bに印加される第3基準電位としてのグランド電位Vgndと等しくてもよく、以下では便宜的に零(0)であるものとする。このような第2基準電位Vr2(=0)より高い電位は正の電位と便宜的に表され、このような第2基準電位Vr2(=0)より低い電位は負の電位と便宜的に表される。 In this embodiment, the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a second reference potential Vr2 to the second region R2 and a second bias potential Vb2, which is different from the second reference potential Vr2 , to the first region R1 . The second reference potential Vr2 may be equal to the ground potential Vgnd , which serves as a third reference potential applied to the reference electrode 22b, and will be assumed to be zero (0) below for convenience. A potential higher than this second reference potential Vr2 (= 0) is conveniently referred to as a positive potential, and a potential lower than this second reference potential Vr2 (= 0) is conveniently referred to as a negative potential.

 また、質量分析磁石装置24aの入口に、第1イオンビームIB1が通過する第5開口OP5を備え、第2領域R2の電位Vr2より低い負の第2サプレッション電位Vsup2が印加される第2サプレッション電極24eが設けられてもよい。第5開口OP5は、フロントスリット20c(図29等)と同様、水平方向の開口幅が長く、鉛直方向の開口幅が短いスリット形状を有してもよい。なお、第5開口OP5は、第2サプレッション電極24eと別部材として設けられてもよい。 Furthermore, a fifth opening OP5 through which the first ion beam IB1 passes may be provided at the entrance of the mass analysis magnet device 24a, and a second suppression electrode 24e to which a negative second suppression potential Vsup2 lower than the potential Vr2 of the second region R2 is applied may be provided. The fifth opening OP5 may have a slit shape with a long opening width in the horizontal direction and a short opening width in the vertical direction, similar to the front slit 20c (Figure 29, etc.). Note that the fifth opening OP5 may be provided as a separate member from the second suppression electrode 24e.

 図42の例では、電位差設定部403が、第2領域R2(例えば、質量分析磁石装置24aの筐体)に零の第2基準電位Vr2を印加し、第1領域R1に正の第2バイアス電位Vb2を印加する。第2バイアス電位Vb2は、例えば、第1領域R1の大部分を囲む筐体22gに印加されてもよい。 42, the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero second reference potential Vr2 to the second region R2 (e.g., the housing of the mass analysis magnet device 24a) and applies a positive second bias potential Vb2 to the first region R1. The second bias potential Vb2 may be applied to, for example, the housing 22g that surrounds most of the first region R1.

 図43は、第1領域R1および第2領域R2に亘る、第1イオンビームIBの進行方向に沿った電位の変化例を模式的に示す。フロントスリット20cにおける電位は、引出電位Vext(例えば、「+40kV」)である。フロントスリット20cからサプレッション電極22aにかけて(本実施例では可動導体22eが設けられない)、電位は略線型に減少する。サプレッション電極22aにおける電位は、前述のサプレッション電位Vsup(例えば、「-2kV」)である。その下流側の領域では、第1領域R1の開始位置に設けられる基準電極22bや筐体22g等によって電位が正の第2バイアス電位Vb2に保たれる。 43 schematically shows an example of the change in potential along the traveling direction of the first ion beam IB across the first region R1 and the second region R2. The potential at the front slit 20c is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., +40 kV). The potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided). The potential at the suppression electrode 22a is the aforementioned suppression potential V sup (e.g., −2 kV). In the downstream region, the potential is maintained at a positive second bias potential V b2 by the reference electrode 22b and the housing 22g provided at the start position of the first region R1.

 続いて、質量分析磁石装置24aおよび/または第2領域R2の入口に差し掛かると、第2サプレッション電極24eによって、電位が第2サプレッション電位Vsup2に局所的に低下する。図示されるように、第2サプレッション電位Vsup2は、第1サプレッション電位Vsupおよび第2バイアス電位Vb2より低い。続く質量分析磁石装置24aの本体には零の第2基準電位Vr2が印加されている。 Next, when the sample approaches the entrance to the mass analysis magnet device 24a and/or the second region R2, the potential is locally reduced to a second suppression potential Vsup2 by the second suppression electrode 24e. As shown in the figure, the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the first suppression potential Vsup and the second bias potential Vb2 . A second reference potential Vr2 of zero is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet device 24a.

 図42において点線によって模式的に示されるように、第1領域R1に印加される正の第2バイアス電位Vb2によって、変成イオンMIの中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道(実線)より外側に逸れる。このように外側に逸れた変成イオンMIは、後段の第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24b等によって遮断される。 42, the central trajectory of the deformed ion MI is deviated outward from the central trajectory (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the second positive bias potential Vb2 applied to the first region R1. The deformed ion MI deviated outward is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.

 図44は、第1イオンビームIBの引出方向を基準とした様々なイオンの中心軌道の具体例を示す。「++」は正の二価の所望イオンDIの中心軌道を表し、「Dimer」は一価のダイマーイオンとしての非所望イオンOIの中心軌道を表し、「P1」は図42における位置P1(質量分析磁石装置24aに入る直前)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P2」は図42における位置P2(質量分析磁石装置24aに入った直後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P3」は図42における位置P3(位置P2より更に後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表す。 Figure 44 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB. "++" represents the central trajectory of the positively doubly charged desired ion DI, "Dimer" represents the central trajectory of the undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion, "P1" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 42 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), "P2" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 42 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), and "P3" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 42 (even later than position P2).

 図44における部分拡大図における矢印によって模式的に示されるように、変成イオンMIの中心軌道は、生成位置P1、P2、P3に応じて変動する。ここで、変成イオンMIの生成位置が上流側のP1から下流側のP2に変わった場合、当該位置P2で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道は、所望イオンDIの中心軌道に近づくものの一致することはない。そして、変成イオンMIの生成位置が更に下流側のP3に変わった場合、当該位置P3で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道は所望イオンDIの中心軌道から離れる。このように、第1領域R1および/または筐体22gに正の第2バイアス電位Vb2が印加される図42~図44の実施例では、変成イオンMIの生成位置によらず、その中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道と干渉することを効果的に防止できる。従って、第1領域R1および/または筐体22gに印加される第2バイアス電位Vb2は正であるのが好ましい。 As shown by the arrows in the enlarged partial view of FIG. 44 , the central orbit of the deformed ion MI varies depending on the generation position P1, P2, or P3. Here, when the generation position of the deformed ion MI changes from the upstream P1 to the downstream P2, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P2 approaches but does not coincide with the central orbit of the desired ion DI. When the generation position of the deformed ion MI changes further downstream to P3, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the position P3 moves away from the central orbit of the desired ion DI. Thus, in the examples of FIGS. 42 to 44 in which a positive second bias potential V b2 is applied to the first region R1 and/or the housing 22g, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI can be effectively prevented from interfering with the central orbit of the desired ion DI, regardless of the generation position of the deformed ion MI. Therefore, it is preferable that the second bias potential V b2 applied to the first region R1 and/or the housing 22g be positive.

 図45は、電位差設定部403が、第2領域R2に零の第2基準電位Vr2を印加し、第1領域R1に負の第2バイアス電位Vb2を印加する例を示す。第2バイアス電位Vb2は、例えば、第1領域R1の大部分を囲む筐体22gに印加されてもよい。 45 shows an example in which the potential difference setting unit 403 applies a zero second reference potential Vr2 to the second region R2 and a negative second bias potential Vb2 to the first region R1. The second bias potential Vb2 may be applied to, for example, a housing 22g that surrounds most of the first region R1.

 図46は、第1領域R1および第2領域R2に亘る、第1イオンビームIBの進行方向に沿った電位の変化例を模式的に示す。フロントスリット20cにおける電位は、引出電位Vext(例えば、「+40kV」)である。フロントスリット20cからサプレッション電極22aにかけて(本実施例では可動導体22eが設けられない)、電位は略線型に減少する。サプレッション電極22aにおける電位は、後述される第2サプレッション電位Vsup2と同等である。その下流側の領域では、第1領域R1の開始位置に設けられる基準電極22bや筐体22g等によって電位が負の第2バイアス電位Vb2に保たれる。 46 schematically shows an example of the change in potential along the traveling direction of the first ion beam IB across the first region R1 and the second region R2. The potential at the front slit 20c is the extraction potential V ext (e.g., "+40 kV"). The potential decreases approximately linearly from the front slit 20c to the suppression electrode 22a (in this embodiment, the movable conductor 22e is not provided). The potential at the suppression electrode 22a is equivalent to a second suppression potential V sup2 , which will be described later. In the downstream region, the potential is maintained at a negative second bias potential V b2 by the reference electrode 22b, the housing 22g, and the like, which are provided at the start position of the first region R1.

 続いて、質量分析磁石装置24aおよび/または第2領域R2の入口に差し掛かると、第2サプレッション電極24eによって、電位が第2サプレッション電位Vsup2に局所的に低下する。図示されるように、第2サプレッション電位Vsup2は、第2基準電位Vr2および第2バイアス電位Vb2より低い。続く質量分析磁石装置24aの本体には零の第2基準電位Vr2が印加されている。 Next, when the mass analysis magnet 24a and/or the entrance to the second region R2 are approached, the second suppression electrode 24e locally reduces the potential to a second suppression potential Vsup2 . As shown in the figure, the second suppression potential Vsup2 is lower than the second reference potential Vr2 and the second bias potential Vb2 . The second reference potential Vr2 , which is zero, is applied to the main body of the subsequent mass analysis magnet 24a.

 図45において点線によって模式的に示されるように、第1領域R1に印加される負の第2バイアス電位Vb2によって、変成イオンMIの中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道(実線)より内側に逸れる。このように内側に逸れた変成イオンMIは、後段の第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24b等によって遮断される。 45, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI is deviated inward from the central orbit (solid line) of the desired ion DI by the second negative bias potential Vb2 applied to the first region R1. The deformed ion MI deviated inward in this manner is blocked by the mass analysis slit 24b or the like serving as the first separation aperture in the subsequent stage.

 図47は、第1イオンビームIBの引出方向を基準とした様々なイオンの中心軌道の具体例を示す。「++」は正の二価の所望イオンDIの中心軌道を表し、「Dimer」は一価のダイマーイオンとしての非所望イオンOIの中心軌道を表し、「P1」は図45における位置P1(質量分析磁石装置24aに入る直前)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P2」は図45における位置P2(質量分析磁石装置24aに入った直後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表し、「P3」は図45における位置P3(位置P2より更に後)で生成した変成イオンMIの中心軌道を表す。 Figure 47 shows specific examples of central trajectories of various ions based on the extraction direction of the first ion beam IB. "++" represents the central trajectory of the positively doubly charged desired ion DI, "Dimer" represents the central trajectory of the undesired ion OI as a singly charged dimer ion, "P1" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P1 in Figure 45 (just before entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), "P2" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P2 in Figure 45 (just after entering the mass analysis magnet device 24a), and "P3" represents the central trajectory of the modified ion MI generated at position P3 in Figure 45 (even later than position P2).

 図47における部分拡大図における矢印によって模式的に示されるように、変成イオンMIの中心軌道は、生成位置P1、P2、P3に応じて変動する。ここで、上流側の位置P1で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道の左側にあるのに対し、下流側の位置P2で生成された変成イオンMIの中心軌道が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道の右側にある。これは、P1とP2の間(特に、P2の近傍)で生成する変成イオンMIの中心軌道が、所望イオンDIの中心軌道と干渉して区別できなくなってしまうことを意味する。このように、第1領域R1および/または筐体22gに負の第2バイアス電位Vb2が印加される図45~図47の実施例では、変成イオンMIの生成位置によっては、その中心軌道が所望イオンDIの中心軌道と干渉してしまう。従って、前述されたように、第1領域R1および/または筐体22gに印加される第2バイアス電位Vb2は正であるのが好ましい。 As shown by the arrows in the enlarged partial view of FIG. 47 , the central orbit of the deformed ion MI varies depending on the generation positions P1, P2, and P3. Here, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the upstream position P1 is to the left of the central orbit of the desired ion DI, whereas the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated at the downstream position P2 is to the right of the central orbit of the desired ion DI. This means that the central orbit of the deformed ion MI generated between P1 and P2 (particularly near P2) interferes with the central orbit of the desired ion DI and becomes indistinguishable. Thus, in the examples of FIGS. 45 to 47 in which a negative second bias potential V b2 is applied to the first region R1 and/or the housing 22g, the central orbit of the deformed ion MI may interfere with the central orbit of the desired ion DI depending on the generation position. Therefore, as described above, it is preferable that the second bias potential V b2 applied to the first region R1 and/or the housing 22g is positive.

 図36に模式的に示されるように(同様の図39、図42、図45では図示が省略される)、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置は、電位差設定部403によって設定される電位差に基づいて、所望イオンDI(実線)および変成イオンMI(点線)のそれぞれの中心軌道を演算する軌道演算部404を備えてもよい。軌道演算部404における演算では、前述のラーモア半径や変成イオンMIの生成位置P1、P2、P3が考慮される。軌道演算部404は、例えば、第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24b(図1等)の位置において、第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aによる偏向方向(x方向)における所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIの中心軌道の差を演算する。 As shown schematically in FIG. 36 (not shown in similar FIGS. 39, 42, and 45), the ion extraction device according to this embodiment may include a trajectory calculation unit 404 that calculates the central trajectories of the desired ions DI (solid lines) and the modified ions MI (dotted lines) based on the potential difference set by the potential difference setting unit 403. The calculations in the trajectory calculation unit 404 take into account the Larmor radius and the generation positions P1, P2, and P3 of the modified ions MI. The trajectory calculation unit 404 calculates, for example, the difference between the central trajectories of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI in the deflection direction (x direction) by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b (see FIG. 1, etc.) serving as the first separation aperture.

 また、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置は、質量分析スリット24bの位置において、質量分析磁石装置24aによる偏向方向における第1イオンビームIB1のサイズまたは幅を調整するビームサイズ調整部405を備えてもよい。ビームサイズ調整部405は、例えば、軌道演算部404によって演算された所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIの中心軌道に基づいて、質量分析スリット24bの位置における第1イオンビームIB1のサイズまたは幅を調整してもよい。具体的には、ビームサイズ調整部405は、所望イオンDIの大半が質量分析スリット24bを通過でき、変成イオンMIの大半が質量分析スリット24bを通過できないように、第1イオンビームIB1のサイズまたは幅を調整する。 The ion extraction device according to this embodiment may also include a beam size adjustment unit 405 that adjusts the size or width of the first ion beam IB1 in the direction of deflection by the mass analysis magnet device 24a at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b. The beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam IB1 at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b, for example, based on the central trajectories of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI calculated by the trajectory calculation unit 404. Specifically, the beam size adjustment unit 405 adjusts the size or width of the first ion beam IB1 so that most of the desired ions DI can pass through the mass analysis slit 24b and most of the modified ions MI cannot pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.

 ビームサイズ調整部405は、第1ビーム電流測定装置406によって測定されるイオンビームのサイズまたは幅を参照しながら、質量分析部24を出る当該イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整してもよい。第1ビーム電流測定装置406としては、図1等に関して前述されたインジェクタファラデーカップ24cが例示される。このインジェクタファラデーカップ24cは、図1等のように質量分析スリット24bの下流に設けられてもよいし、質量分析磁石装置24aの下流かつ質量分析スリット24bの上流に設けられてもよい。 The beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the ion beam exiting the mass analysis unit 24 by referring to the size or width of the ion beam measured by the first beam current measurement device 406. An example of the first beam current measurement device 406 is the injector Faraday cup 24c described above with reference to Figure 1, etc. This injector Faraday cup 24c may be located downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b as in Figure 1, etc., or may be located downstream of the mass analysis magnet device 24a and upstream of the mass analysis slit 24b.

 このような第1ビーム電流測定装置406は、第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aによる偏向方向(x方向)におけるイオンビームのサイズまたは幅を測定する。質量分析スリット24bの下流に設けられる場合の第1ビーム電流測定装置406は、質量分析磁石装置24aによって印加する磁界を変化させながら、第2イオンビームのビーム電流を測定することで、偏向方向における第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を測定してもよい。質量分析スリット24bの上流に設けられる場合の第1ビーム電流測定装置406は、偏向方向に移動しながら(例えば、第1ビーム電流測定装置406としてのインジェクタファラデーカップ24cを、インジェクタ駆動部24dによって駆動しながら)第1イオンビームのビーム電流を測定することで、偏向方向における当該第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を測定してもよい。 Such a first beam current measuring device 406 measures the size or width of the ion beam in the deflection direction (x direction) by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device. When provided downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b, the first beam current measuring device 406 may measure the size or width of the first ion beam in the deflection direction by measuring the beam current of the second ion beam while changing the magnetic field applied by the mass analysis magnet device 24a. When provided upstream of the mass analysis slit 24b, the first beam current measuring device 406 may measure the size or width of the first ion beam in the deflection direction by measuring the beam current of the first ion beam while moving in the deflection direction (for example, while the injector Faraday cup 24c serving as the first beam current measuring device 406 is driven by the injector driver 24d).

 ビームサイズ調整部405は、イオン源20から第1イオンビームが引き出される第1開口OP1の近傍における引出電界分布を調整してイオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整するために、イオン源20における第1開口OP1と第1サプレッション電極としてのサプレッション電極22aの距離(例えば、図29等における第1距離Gapおよび第2距離Gapの和)を調整してもよい。前述のように、第1サプレッション電極としてのサプレッション電極22aは、第1イオンビームが通過する第3開口OP3を備え、基準電極22bに印加される第3基準電位Vgndより低い第1サプレッション電位Vsupが印加される。 The beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the distance (for example, the sum of the first distance Gap1 and the second distance Gap2 in FIG. 29 etc.) between the first opening OP1 in the ion source 20 and the suppression electrode 22a serving as the first suppression electrode in order to adjust the size or width of the ion beam by adjusting the extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of the first opening OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20. As described above, the suppression electrode 22a serving as the first suppression electrode has a third opening OP3 through which the first ion beam passes, and a first suppression potential Vsup lower than the third reference potential Vgnd applied to the reference electrode 22b is applied to the suppression electrode 22a.

 ビームサイズ調整部405は、イオン源20から第1イオンビームが引き出される第1開口OP1の近傍における引出電界分布を調整してイオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整するために、イオン源20における第1開口OPと可動導体22eの距離(例えば、図29等における第1距離Gap)を調整してもよい。前述のように、可動導体22eは、第1イオンビームが通過する第4開口OP4を備え、イオン源20から第1イオンビームが引き出される第1開口OP1との距離が可変である。 The beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the distance between the first opening OP in the ion source 20 and the movable conductor 22e (for example, the first distance Gap 1 in FIG. 29 etc.) in order to adjust the size or width of the ion beam by adjusting the extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of the first opening OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20. As described above, the movable conductor 22e has a fourth opening OP4 through which the first ion beam passes, and the distance from the first opening OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20 is variable.

 ビームサイズ調整部405は、イオン源20から第1イオンビームが引き出される第1開口OP1の近傍における引出電界分布を調整してイオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整するために、可動導体22eに印加される制御電位Vctl(または、追加電位Vadd)を調整してもよい。前述のように、可動導体22eには、第3基準電位Vgndより高い制御電位Vctlが印加される。 The beam size adjusting unit 405 may adjust the control potential V ctl (or the additional potential V add ) applied to the movable conductor 22e in order to adjust the size or width of the ion beam by adjusting the extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of the first aperture OP1 through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source 20. As described above, the control potential V ctl higher than the third reference potential V gnd is applied to the movable conductor 22e.

 ビームサイズ調整部405は、イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整するために、第2サプレッション電極24eおよび/または24fに印加される第2サプレッション電位Vsup2を調整してもよい。 The beam size adjusting unit 405 may adjust the second suppression potential V sup2 applied to the second suppression electrodes 24 e and/or 24 f to adjust the size or width of the ion beam.

 ビームサイズ調整部405は、位相空間分布測定器407によって測定される第2イオンビームの位相空間分布に基づいて、第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整してもよい。位相空間分布測定器407としては、前述のビームプロファイラ46に設けられる角度測定装置が例示される。この位相空間分布測定器407は、第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24bの下流において、第2イオンビームの位相空間分布を測定する。なお、位相空間分布測定器407によって測定される第2イオンビームの位相空間分布に基づいて、質量分析スリット24bの位置において偏向方向(x方向)における第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を推定するビームサイズ推定部408が設けられてもよい。この場合、ビームサイズ調整部405は、ビームサイズ推定部408によって推定される第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を参照しながら、当該第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整してもよい。 The beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement unit 407. An example of the phase space distribution measurement unit 407 is the angle measurement device provided in the beam profiler 46 described above. This phase space distribution measurement unit 407 measures the phase space distribution of the second ion beam downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b, which serves as the first separation aperture. A beam size estimation unit 408 may be provided that estimates the size or width of the first ion beam in the deflection direction (x direction) at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement unit 407. In this case, the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam while referring to the size or width of the first ion beam estimated by the beam size estimation unit 408.

 ビームサイズ調整部405に加えてまたは代えて、本実施形態に係るイオン引出装置は、第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aによる偏向方向(x方向)において、第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24bの開口幅を調整する開口幅調整部409を備えてもよい。開口幅調整部409は、例えば、軌道演算部404によって演算された偏向方向における所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIの中心軌道の差と、第1ビーム電流測定装置406によって測定された偏向方向におけるイオンビームのサイズまたは幅に応じて、偏向方向における質量分析スリット24bの開口幅を調整してもよい。具体的には、開口幅調整部409は、所望イオンDIの中心軌道周りのビームが質量分析スリット24bを通過でき、変成イオンMIの中心軌道周りのビームが質量分析スリット24bを通過できないように、質量分析スリット24bの開口幅を調整する。 In addition to or instead of the beam size adjustment unit 405, the ion extraction device according to this embodiment may include an aperture width adjustment unit 409 that adjusts the aperture width of the mass analysis slit 24b, which serves as the first separation aperture, in the deflection direction (x direction) by the mass analysis magnet device 24a, which serves as the first beam deflection device. The aperture width adjustment unit 409 may adjust the aperture width of the mass analysis slit 24b in the deflection direction, for example, in accordance with the difference between the central orbits of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI in the deflection direction calculated by the trajectory calculation unit 404, and the size or width of the ion beam in the deflection direction measured by the first beam current measurement device 406. Specifically, the aperture width adjustment unit 409 adjusts the aperture width of the mass analysis slit 24b so that the beam around the central orbit of the desired ions DI can pass through the mass analysis slit 24b, and so that the beam around the central orbit of the modified ions MI cannot pass through the mass analysis slit 24b.

 第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24bの下流には、電界または磁界を印加することによって第2イオンビームを偏向する第2ビーム偏向装置410が設けられてもよい。第2ビーム偏向装置410としては、前述のビーム走査部28(図2等)やAEF電極対34a、34b(図1等)が例示される。第2ビーム偏向装置410による第2イオンビームの偏向方向は、ビーム走査部28のように、第2イオンビームの進行方向(z方向)および第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aによる第1イオンビームの偏向方向(x方向)と交差してもよいし(y方向)、AEF電極対34a、34bのように、第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aによる第1イオンビームの偏向方向と実質的に同じでもよい(x方向)。第2ビーム偏向装置410は、例えば、軌道演算部404によって演算される所望イオンDIの中心軌道が所望の中心軌道となるように(すなわち、所望イオンDIが所望の軌道を通過するように)、第2イオンビームに印加する電界または磁界を調整する。 A second beam deflection device 410 may be provided downstream of the mass analysis slit 24b serving as the first separation aperture, which deflects the second ion beam by applying an electric field or magnetic field. Examples of the second beam deflection device 410 include the aforementioned beam scanning unit 28 (Figure 2, etc.) and AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b (Figure 1, etc.). The deflection direction of the second ion beam by the second beam deflection device 410 may intersect the direction of travel of the second ion beam (z direction) and the deflection direction of the first ion beam by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device (x direction), as in the beam scanning unit 28, or may be substantially the same as the deflection direction of the first ion beam by the mass analysis magnet device 24a serving as the first beam deflection device (x direction), as in the AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b. The second beam deflection device 410 adjusts the electric field or magnetic field applied to the second ion beam, for example, so that the central trajectory of the desired ions DI calculated by the trajectory calculation unit 404 becomes the desired central trajectory (i.e., so that the desired ions DI pass through the desired trajectory).

 第2ビーム偏向装置410(ビーム走査部28および/またはAEF電極対34a、34b)の下流には、所望イオンDIと変成イオンMIを電界または磁界に応じて分離して通過させる第2分離開口としてのエネルギー分析スリット34c(図1等)が設けられてもよい。そして、エネルギー分析スリット34cの下流には、所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIのそれぞれのビーム電流を測定する第2ビーム電流測定装置411が設けられてもよい。第2ビーム電流測定装置411としては、前述のチューニングカップ38a~38dが例示される。第2ビーム電流測定装置411は、所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIのビーム電流の比を測定してもよい。イオン照射禁止部412は、第2ビーム電流測定装置411によって測定された所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIのビーム電流の比が許容範囲外の場合、第2イオンビームのウェハへの照射を禁止する。 Downstream of the second beam deflection device 410 (beam scanning unit 28 and/or AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b), an energy analysis slit 34c (see FIG. 1, etc.) may be provided as a second separation aperture that separates and passes desired ions DI and modified ions MI in accordance with the electric or magnetic field. A second beam current measurement device 411 that measures the beam currents of the desired ions DI and modified ions MI may be provided downstream of the energy analysis slit 34c. Examples of the second beam current measurement device 411 include the tuning cups 38a to 38d described above. The second beam current measurement device 411 may measure the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions DI and modified ions MI. The ion irradiation prohibition unit 412 prohibits irradiation of the wafer with the second ion beam if the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions DI and modified ions MI measured by the second beam current measurement device 411 is outside the allowable range.

 第2ビーム電流測定装置411によって測定される所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIのビーム電流の比が要調整範囲内の場合、ビームサイズ調整部405は、第1分離開口としての質量分析スリット24bの位置における第1イオンビームのサイズまたは幅を調整してもよい。 If the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI measured by the second beam current measuring device 411 is within the range requiring adjustment, the beam size adjustment unit 405 may adjust the size or width of the first ion beam at the position of the mass analysis slit 24b as the first separation aperture.

 第2ビーム電流測定装置411によって測定される所望イオンDIおよび変成イオンMIのビーム電流の比が要調整範囲内の場合、ビーム成形部26その他の電界印加装置は、イオンビームに対して印加する電界を調整してもよい。この電界印加装置は、電界を印加することによって変成イオンMIの輸送を妨げるように、第1ビーム偏向装置としての質量分析磁石装置24aと、第2ビーム偏向装置410としてのビーム走査部28および/またはAEF電極対34a、34bの間に設けられるのが好ましい。 If the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions DI and the modified ions MI measured by the second beam current measuring device 411 is within the range requiring adjustment, the beam shaping unit 26 or other electric field application device may adjust the electric field applied to the ion beam. This electric field application device is preferably provided between the mass analysis magnet device 24a as the first beam deflection device and the beam scanning unit 28 and/or AEF electrode pair 34a, 34b as the second beam deflection device 410, so as to apply an electric field that prevents the transport of the modified ions MI.

 本開示のある態様は以下の通りである。 Some aspects of the present disclosure are as follows:

(態様1)
 所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源における第1開口から前記所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 前記イオンビームをウェハに照射する注入処理室と、
 を備え、
 前記引出部は、前記イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記基準電位より低いサプレッション電位が印加されるサプレッション電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、前記第1開口との前記進行方向における距離が可変な可動導体と、
 を備える、
 イオン注入装置。
(Aspect 1)
an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions;
an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam;
an implantation processing chamber for irradiating the wafer with the ion beam;
Equipped with
The extraction unit is configured as follows, from downstream to upstream in the traveling direction of the ion beam:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied;
a suppression electrode having a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied;
a movable conductor including a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes, the movable conductor having a variable distance from the first opening in the traveling direction;
Equipped with
Ion implantation equipment.

(態様2)
 前記第1開口、前記第2開口、前記第3開口、前記第4開口は、同じ方向に長尺のスリットである、態様1に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 2)
2. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the first opening, the second opening, the third opening, and the fourth opening are slits elongated in the same direction.

(態様3)
 前記イオンビームは、前記第1開口、前記第4開口、前記第3開口、前記第2開口の順に通過し、
 前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離は、前記イオンビームが前記ウェハに照射される際に所望の位相空間分布を有するように制御される、
 態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 3)
the ion beam passes through the first opening, the fourth opening, the third opening, and the second opening in this order;
a distance between the first opening and the fourth opening is controlled so that the ion beam has a desired phase space distribution when irradiated onto the wafer.
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1 or 2.

(態様4)
 前記イオン源には、前記基準電位より高い引出電位が印加され、
 前記可動導体には、前記第2開口から出射される前記イオンビームの位相空間分布を制御するために、前記引出電位と前記基準電位の間の電位である制御電位が印加される、
 態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 4)
an extraction potential higher than the reference potential is applied to the ion source;
a control potential, which is a potential between the extraction potential and the reference potential, is applied to the movable conductor in order to control a phase space distribution of the ion beam extracted from the second opening.
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1 or 2.

(態様5)
 前記進行方向における前記サプレッション電極と前記基準電極の距離は一定である、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 5)
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 1, wherein the distance between the suppression electrode and the reference electrode in the direction of travel is constant.

(態様6)
 前記進行方向における前記可動導体と前記サプレッション電極の距離は可変である、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 6)
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the distance between the movable conductor and the suppression electrode in the traveling direction is variable.

(態様7)
 前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離は、前記イオン源の状態に応じて、前記イオンビームが前記ウェハに照射される際に所望の位相空間分布を有するように制御される、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 7)
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the traveling direction is controlled in accordance with the state of the ion source so that the ion beam has a desired phase space distribution when irradiated onto the wafer.

(態様8)
 前記基準電極の下流に、前記イオンビームの位相空間分布を測定する位相空間分布測定器が設けられる、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 8)
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a phase space distribution measuring device downstream of the reference electrode for measuring a phase space distribution of the ion beam.

(態様9)
 前記位相空間分布測定器によって測定された前記イオンビームの位相空間分布に応じて、前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離、および、前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の少なくともいずれかが制御される、態様8に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 9)
The ion implantation apparatus of aspect 8, wherein at least one of the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the propagation direction and the control potential applied to the movable conductor is controlled according to the phase space distribution of the ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measuring device.

(態様10)
 前記イオン源の状態を反映する装置パラメータを取得するイオン源状態取得部を備える、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 10)
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 1 or 2, further comprising an ion source status acquisition unit that acquires an apparatus parameter that reflects a status of the ion source.

(態様11)
 前記装置パラメータは、前記イオン源のパラメータとして設定されるガス種、ガス流量、ベーパライザ温度、アーク電流、アーク電圧、ソースマグネット電流、前記イオン源から引き出される前記所望イオンを含む前記イオン群が単位時間当たりに運ぶ電荷の総量である実効引出電流、前記ウェハに照射されるイオンビームのビーム電流、の少なくともいずれかである、態様10に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 11)
11. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 10, wherein the apparatus parameters are at least one of a gas species, a gas flow rate, a vaporizer temperature, an arc current, an arc voltage, a source magnet current, which are set as parameters of the ion source, an effective extraction current which is a total amount of charge carried per unit time by the ion group including the desired ions extracted from the ion source, and a beam current of the ion beam irradiated onto the wafer.

(態様12)
 前記イオン源状態取得部によって取得された前記装置パラメータに応じて、前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離、および、前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の少なくともいずれかが制御される、態様10に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 12)
11. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 10, wherein at least one of the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the traveling direction and the control potential applied to the movable conductor is controlled according to the apparatus parameters acquired by the ion source state acquisition unit.

(態様13)
 前記イオン源に印加される引出電位と前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の電位差、および、前記イオン源から引き出される前記所望イオンを含む前記イオン群が単位時間当たりに運ぶ電荷の総量である実効引出電流を取得する電気情報取得部を備える、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 13)
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising an electrical information acquiring unit that acquires a potential difference between an extraction potential applied to the ion source and a control potential applied to the movable conductor, and an effective extraction current that is the total amount of charge carried per unit time by the group of ions including the desired ions extracted from the ion source.

(態様14)
 前記電気情報取得部によって取得された前記電位差および前記実効引出電流に応じて、前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離、および、前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の少なくともいずれかが制御される、態様13に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 14)
The ion implantation apparatus of aspect 13, wherein at least one of the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the traveling direction and the control potential applied to the movable conductor is controlled according to the potential difference and the effective extraction current acquired by the electrical information acquisition unit.

(態様15)
 前記イオン源および前記可動導体に同じ電位が印加される、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 15)
3. The ion implanter of claim 1, wherein the same potential is applied to the ion source and the movable conductor.

(態様16)
 前記第4開口のサイズは、前記第1開口のサイズより大きい、態様1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 16)
3. The ion implanter according to claim 1, wherein the fourth opening is larger in size than the first opening.

(態様17)
 所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源における第1開口から前記所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 を備え、
 前記引出部は、前記イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記基準電位より低いサプレッション電位が印加されるサプレッション電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、前記第1開口との前記進行方向における距離が可変な可動導体と、
 を備える、
 イオン引出装置。
(Aspect 17)
an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions;
an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam;
Equipped with
The extraction unit is configured as follows, from downstream to upstream in the traveling direction of the ion beam:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied;
a suppression electrode having a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied;
a movable conductor including a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes, the movable conductor having a variable distance from the first opening in the traveling direction;
Equipped with
Ion extraction device.

(態様18)
 所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源から前記所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出して第1イオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 磁界を印加することによって前記第1イオンビームを偏向する第1ビーム偏向装置と、
 前記第1ビーム偏向装置によって偏向された前記第1イオンビームに含まれる前記所望イオンを通過させる第1分離開口と、
 前記引出部の出口と前記第1ビーム偏向装置の入口の間の少なくとも一部である第1領域と、前記第1ビーム偏向装置の入口と出口の間の少なくとも一部である第2領域に、電位差を設ける電位差設定部と、
 前記第1分離開口を通過した前記所望イオンを含む第2イオンビームをウェハに照射する注入処理室と、
 を備え、
 前記電位差は、前記第1領域を通過する前記第1イオンビーム中の前記イオン群の一部が分解および荷電変換の少なくともいずれかを被ることによって生成した変成イオンと前記所望イオンが前記第2領域において互いに異なる中心軌道を持ち、前記変成イオンの少なくとも一部が前記第1分離開口を通過できないように設定されている、
 イオン注入装置。
(Aspect 18)
an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions;
an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from the ion source to generate a first ion beam;
a first beam deflection device that deflects the first ion beam by applying a magnetic field;
a first separation aperture for passing the desired ions included in the first ion beam deflected by the first beam deflection device;
a potential difference setting unit that sets a potential difference between a first region that is at least a part between the outlet of the extraction unit and the inlet of the first beam deflection device, and a second region that is at least a part between the inlet and the outlet of the first beam deflection device;
an implantation processing chamber for irradiating a wafer with a second ion beam containing the desired ions that has passed through the first separation opening;
Equipped with
the potential difference is set so that modified ions generated by at least one of decomposition and charge conversion of a portion of the ions in the first ion beam passing through the first region and the desired ions have different central orbits in the second region, and at least some of the modified ions cannot pass through the first separation opening.
Ion implantation equipment.

(態様19)
 前記電位差設定部は、前記第1領域に第1基準電位を印加し、前記第2領域に前記第1基準電位と異なる第1バイアス電位を印加する、態様18に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 19)
19. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 18, wherein the potential difference setting unit applies a first reference potential to the first region and applies a first bias potential different from the first reference potential to the second region.

(態様20)
 前記電位差設定部は、前記第2領域に第2基準電位を印加し、前記第1領域に前記第2基準電位と異なる第2バイアス電位を印加する、態様18に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 20)
19. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 18, wherein the potential difference setting unit applies a second reference potential to the second region and applies a second bias potential different from the second reference potential to the first region.

(態様21)
 前記第1ビーム偏向装置による偏向方向における前記第1イオンビームのサイズを測定する第1ビーム電流測定装置を備える、態様18から20のいずれかに記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 21)
21. The ion implanter of any one of aspects 18 to 20, further comprising a first beam current measurement device that measures a size of the first ion beam in a direction of deflection by the first beam deflection device.

(態様22)
 前記第1ビーム電流測定装置は、前記第1分離開口の下流に設けられ、前記第1ビーム偏向装置によって印加する磁界を変化させながら、前記第2イオンビームのビーム電流を測定する、態様21に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 22)
22. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 21, wherein the first beam current measurement device is provided downstream of the first separation opening and measures the beam current of the second ion beam while changing the magnetic field applied by the first beam deflection device.

(態様23)
 前記第1ビーム電流測定装置は、前記第1分離開口の上流に設けられ、前記偏向方向に移動しながら前記第1イオンビームのビーム電流を測定する、態様21に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 23)
22. The ion implanter of aspect 21, wherein the first beam current measurement device is provided upstream of the first separation opening and measures the beam current of the first ion beam while moving in the deflection direction.

(態様24)
 前記第1分離開口の前記偏向方向における開口幅は可変である、態様21に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 24)
22. The ion implanter of claim 21, wherein the first separation opening has a variable opening width in the deflection direction.

(態様25)
 前記第1分離開口の位置における、前記第1ビーム偏向装置による偏向方向における前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンの前記中心軌道の差と、前記偏向方向における前記第1イオンビームのサイズに応じて、前記開口幅が調整される、態様24に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 25)
25. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 24, wherein the aperture width is adjusted according to the difference in the central orbits of the desired ions and the modified ions in the direction of deflection by the first beam deflection device at the position of the first separation aperture and the size of the first ion beam in the direction of deflection.

(態様26)
 前記電位差設定部によって設定される前記電位差に基づいて、前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンのそれぞれの前記中心軌道を演算する軌道演算部を備える、態様18から20のいずれかに記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 26)
21. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of aspects 18 to 20, further comprising a trajectory calculation unit that calculates the central trajectories of the desired ions and the modified ions based on the potential difference set by the potential difference setting unit.

(態様27)
 前記軌道演算部は、前記第1分離開口の位置において、前記第1ビーム偏向装置による偏向方向における前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンの前記中心軌道の差を演算する、態様26に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 27)
27. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 26, wherein the trajectory calculation unit calculates a difference between the central trajectories of the desired ions and the modified ions in a deflection direction by the first beam deflector at the position of the first separation opening.

(態様28)
 前記第1分離開口の位置において、前記第1ビーム偏向装置による偏向方向における前記第1イオンビームのサイズを調整するビームサイズ調整部を備える、態様18から20のいずれかに記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 28)
21. The ion implantation apparatus according to any one of aspects 18 to 20, further comprising a beam size adjustment unit that adjusts a size of the first ion beam in a direction of deflection by the first beam deflector at the position of the first separation opening.

(態様29)
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記イオン源から前記第1イオンビームが引き出される第1開口の近傍における引出電界分布を調整する、態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 29)
29. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 28, wherein the beam size adjuster adjusts an extraction electric field distribution in the vicinity of a first opening through which the first ion beam is extracted from the ion source.

(態様30)
 前記偏向方向における前記第1イオンビームのサイズを測定する第1ビーム電流測定装置を備え、
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記第1ビーム電流測定装置によって測定される前記サイズを参照しながら調整する、
 態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 30)
a first beam current measuring device that measures a size of the first ion beam in the deflection direction;
the beam size adjustment unit adjusts the size while referring to the size measured by the first beam current measurement device.
29. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 28.

(態様31)
 前記引出部は、前記第1イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、第3基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記第3基準電位より低い第1サプレッション電位が印加される第1サプレッション電極と、
 を備え、
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記イオン源における前記第1開口と前記第1サプレッション電極の距離を調整する、
 態様29に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 31)
The extraction unit is configured to:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied;
a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied;
Equipped with
the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the distance between the first opening in the ion source and the first suppression electrode.
30. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 29.

(態様32)
 前記引出部は、前記第1イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、第3基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記第3基準電位より低い第1サプレッション電位が印加される第1サプレッション電極と、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、前記イオン源から前記第1イオンビームが引き出される第1開口との距離が可変な導体と、
 を備え、
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記イオン源における前記第1開口と前記導体の距離を調整する、
 態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 32)
The extraction unit is configured to:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied;
a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied;
a conductor having a fourth opening through which the first ion beam passes, the conductor having a variable distance from the ion source to a first opening through which the first ion beam is extracted;
Equipped with
the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the distance between the first opening in the ion source and the conductor.
29. The ion implanter according to aspect 28.

(態様33)
 前記引出部は、前記第1イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、第3基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記第3基準電位より低い第1サプレッション電位が印加される第1サプレッション電極と、
 前記第1イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、前記第3基準電位より高い制御電位が印加される導体と、
 を備え、
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記制御電位を調整する、
 態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 33)
The extraction unit is configured to:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a third reference potential is applied;
a first suppression electrode having a third opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a first suppression potential lower than the third reference potential is applied;
a conductor having a fourth opening through which the first ion beam passes, the conductor having a control potential higher than the third reference potential applied thereto;
Equipped with
The beam size adjustment unit adjusts the control potential.
29. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 28.

(態様34)
 前記第1ビーム偏向装置の入口および出口の少なくともいずれかに、前記第1イオンビームが通過する第5開口を備え、前記第2領域の電位より低い第2サプレッション電位が印加される第2サプレッション電極が設けられ、
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記第2サプレッション電位を調整する、
 態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 34)
a second suppression electrode is provided at at least one of an entrance and an exit of the first beam deflection device, the second suppression electrode having a fifth opening through which the first ion beam passes and to which a second suppression potential lower than the potential of the second region is applied;
the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the second suppression potential.
29. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 28.

(態様35)
 前記第1分離開口の下流には、電界または磁界を印加することによって前記第2イオンビームを偏向する第2ビーム偏向装置が設けられる、態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 35)
29. The ion implanter of aspect 28, further comprising a second beam deflection device downstream of the first separation aperture, the second beam deflection device being configured to deflect the second ion beam by applying an electric or magnetic field thereto.

(態様36)
 前記第2ビーム偏向装置による前記第2イオンビームの偏向方向は、前記第2イオンビームの進行方向および前記第1ビーム偏向装置による前記第1イオンビームの偏向方向と交差する、態様35に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 36)
36. The ion implanter of claim 35, wherein a direction of deflection of the second ion beam by the second beam deflection device intersects a direction of travel of the second ion beam and a direction of deflection of the first ion beam by the first beam deflection device.

(態様37)
 前記所望イオンが所定の軌道を通過するように、前記第2ビーム偏向装置は前記第2イオンビームに印加する電界または磁界を調整する、態様35に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 37)
36. The ion implanter of claim 35, wherein the second beam deflection device adjusts an electric or magnetic field applied to the second ion beam so that the desired ions follow a predetermined trajectory.

(態様38)
 前記第2ビーム偏向装置の下流には、前記所望イオンと前記変成イオンを前記電界または前記磁界に応じて分離して通過させる第2分離開口が設けられ、
 前記第2分離開口の下流には、前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンのそれぞれのビーム電流を測定する第2ビーム電流測定装置が設けられる、
 態様35に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 38)
a second separation opening is provided downstream of the second beam deflection device, which separates the desired ions and the modified ions in accordance with the electric field or the magnetic field and allows them to pass;
a second beam current measuring device is provided downstream of the second separation opening to measure the beam currents of the desired ions and the modified ions;
36. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 35.

(態様39)
 前記第2ビーム電流測定装置によって測定される前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンのビーム電流の比が許容範囲外の場合、前記第2イオンビームの前記ウェハへの照射を禁止するイオン照射禁止部を備える、態様38に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 39)
The ion implantation apparatus of aspect 38 further comprises an ion irradiation prohibition unit that prohibits irradiation of the second ion beam onto the wafer when the ratio of the beam current of the desired ion and the modified ion measured by the second beam current measuring device is outside an acceptable range.

(態様40)
 前記第2ビーム電流測定装置によって測定される前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンのビーム電流の比が要調整範囲内の場合、前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記第1分離開口の位置における前記第1イオンビームのサイズを調整する、態様38に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 40)
An ion implantation apparatus as described in aspect 38, wherein when the ratio of the beam current of the desired ion and the modified ion measured by the second beam current measuring device is within a range requiring adjustment, the beam size adjusting unit adjusts the size of the first ion beam at the position of the first separation opening.

(態様41)
 前記第1ビーム偏向装置と前記第2ビーム偏向装置の間には、電界を印加することによって前記変成イオンの輸送を妨げる電界印加装置が設けられ、
 前記第2ビーム電流測定装置によって測定される前記所望イオンおよび前記変成イオンのビーム電流の比が要調整範囲内の場合、前記電界印加装置は印加する電界を調整する、
 態様38に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 41)
an electric field application device is provided between the first beam deflection device and the second beam deflection device, the electric field application device applying an electric field to hinder the transport of the metamorphic ions;
When the ratio of the beam currents of the desired ions and the modified ions measured by the second beam current measuring device is within a range requiring adjustment, the electric field applying device adjusts the electric field to be applied.
39. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 38.

(態様42)
 前記第1分離開口の下流に、前記第2イオンビームの位相空間分布を測定する位相空間分布測定器が設けられる、態様28に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 42)
29. The ion implanter of aspect 28, further comprising a phase space distribution measurer downstream of the first separation aperture for measuring a phase space distribution of the second ion beam.

(態様43)
 前記位相空間分布測定器によって測定される前記第2イオンビームの位相空間分布に基づいて、前記第1分離開口の位置において前記偏向方向における前記第1イオンビームのサイズを推定するビームサイズ推定部を備える、態様42に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 43)
43. The ion implantation apparatus of claim 42, further comprising a beam size estimation unit that estimates the size of the first ion beam in the deflection direction at the position of the first separation aperture based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement device.

(態様44)
 前記ビームサイズ調整部は、前記位相空間分布測定器によって測定される前記第2イオンビームの位相空間分布に基づいて、前記第1イオンビームのサイズを調整する、態様42に記載のイオン注入装置。
(Aspect 44)
43. The ion implantation apparatus according to aspect 42, wherein the beam size adjuster adjusts the size of the first ion beam based on the phase space distribution of the second ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement device.

(態様45)
 所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源から前記所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出して第1イオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 磁界を印加することによって前記第1イオンビームを偏向する第1ビーム偏向装置と、
 前記第1ビーム偏向装置によって偏向された前記第1イオンビームに含まれる前記所望イオンを通過させる第1分離開口と、
 前記引出部の出口と前記第1ビーム偏向装置の入口の間の少なくとも一部である第1領域と、前記第1ビーム偏向装置の入口と出口の間の少なくとも一部である第2領域に、電位差を設ける電位差設定部と、
 を備え、
 前記電位差は、前記第1領域を通過する前記第1イオンビーム中の前記イオン群の一部が分解および荷電変換の少なくともいずれかを被ることによって生成した変成イオンと前記所望イオンが前記第2領域において互いに異なる中心軌道を持ち、前記変成イオンの少なくとも一部が前記第1分離開口を通過できないように設定されている、
 イオン引出装置。
(Aspect 45)
an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions;
an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from the ion source to generate a first ion beam;
a first beam deflection device that deflects the first ion beam by applying a magnetic field;
a first separation aperture for passing the desired ions included in the first ion beam deflected by the first beam deflection device;
a potential difference setting unit that sets a potential difference between a first region that is at least a part between the outlet of the extraction unit and the inlet of the first beam deflection device, and a second region that is at least a part between the inlet and the outlet of the first beam deflection device;
Equipped with
the potential difference is set so that modified ions generated by at least one of decomposition and charge conversion of a portion of the ions in the first ion beam passing through the first region and the desired ions have different central orbits in the second region, and at least some of the modified ions cannot pass through the first separation opening.
Ion extraction device.

 以上、本開示を上述の各実施の形態を参照して説明したが、本開示は上述の各実施の形態に限定されるものではなく、各実施の形態の構成を適宜組み合わせてもよいし、置換してもよい。また、当業者の知識に基づいて各実施の形態における組み合わせや処理の順番を適宜組み替えることや各種の設計変更等の変形を実施の形態に対して加えることも可能であり、そのような組み替えや変形が加えられた実施の形態も本開示に係るイオン注入装置およびイオン引出装置の範囲に含まれ得る。 The present disclosure has been described above with reference to the above-mentioned embodiments, but the present disclosure is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and the configurations of the embodiments may be combined or substituted as appropriate. Furthermore, based on the knowledge of those skilled in the art, it is possible to rearrange the combinations and processing orders in the embodiments as appropriate, and to make various design changes and other modifications to the embodiments, and embodiments to which such rearrangements and modifications have been made may also be included within the scope of the ion implantation apparatus and ion extraction apparatus according to the present disclosure.

 本開示に係る実施の形態は、本開示に係る方法を記述するコンピュータ読み取り可能な一以上のシーケンスを含むコンピュータプログラムの形態を取ってもよいし、このようなコンピュータプログラムが格納される非一時的かつ有形な記録媒体(例えば、不揮発性メモリ、磁気テープ、磁気ディスクまたは光学ディスク)の形態を取ってもよい。プロセッサは、このようなコンピュータプログラムを実行することにより、本開示に係る方法を実現してもよい。 Embodiments of the present disclosure may take the form of a computer program including one or more computer-readable sequences describing a method of the present disclosure, or may take the form of a non-transitory, tangible recording medium (e.g., non-volatile memory, magnetic tape, magnetic disk, or optical disk) on which such a computer program is stored. A processor may implement a method of the present disclosure by executing such a computer program.

 本開示は、イオン注入装置およびイオン引出装置に関する。 This disclosure relates to an ion implantation device and an ion extraction device.

 10 イオン注入装置、14 注入処理室、20 イオン源、20c フロントスリット、22 引出部、22a サプレッション電極、22b 基準電極、22e 可動導体、22f 伸縮機構、22g 筐体、24 質量分析部、24a 質量分析磁石装置、24b 質量分析スリット、24e 第2サプレッション電極、24f 第2サプレッション電極、34 エネルギー分析部、34c エネルギー分析スリット、38 ビームストッパ 、46 ビームプロファイラ、100 角度測定装置、200 角度測定装置、300 角度測定装置、401 イオン源状態取得部、402 電気情報取得部、403 電位差設定部、404 軌道演算部、405 ビームサイズ調整部、406 第1ビーム電流測定装置、407 位相空間分布測定器、408 ビームサイズ推定部、409 開口幅調整部、410 第2ビーム偏向装置、411 第2ビーム電流測定装置、412 イオン照射禁止部、OP1 第1開口、OP2 第2開口、OP3 第3開口、OP4 第4開口、OP5 第5開口、R1 第1領域、R2 第2領域。 10 ion implantation device, 14 implantation processing chamber, 20 ion source, 20c front slit, 22 extraction section, 22a suppression electrode, 22b reference electrode, 22e movable conductor, 22f extension mechanism, 22g housing, 24 mass analysis section, 24a mass analysis magnet device, 24b mass analysis slit, 24e second suppression electrode, 24f second suppression electrode, 34 energy analysis section, 34c energy analysis slit, 38 beam stopper, 46 beam profiler, 100 angle measurement device, 200 angle measurement measurement device, 300 angle measurement device, 401 ion source status acquisition unit, 402 electrical information acquisition unit, 403 potential difference setting unit, 404 trajectory calculation unit, 405 beam size adjustment unit, 406 first beam current measurement unit, 407 phase space distribution measurement device, 408 beam size estimation unit, 409 aperture width adjustment unit, 410 second beam deflection device, 411 second beam current measurement device, 412 ion irradiation inhibition unit, OP1 first aperture, OP2 second aperture, OP3 third aperture, OP4 fourth aperture, OP5 fifth aperture, R1 first region, R2 second region.

Claims (17)

 所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源における第1開口から前記所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 前記イオンビームをウェハに照射する注入処理室と、
 を備え、
 前記引出部は、前記イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記基準電位より低いサプレッション電位が印加されるサプレッション電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、前記第1開口との前記進行方向における距離が可変な可動導体と、
 を備える、
 イオン注入装置。
an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions;
an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam;
an implantation processing chamber for irradiating the wafer with the ion beam;
Equipped with
The extraction unit is configured as follows, from downstream to upstream in the traveling direction of the ion beam:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied;
a suppression electrode having a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied;
a movable conductor including a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes, the movable conductor having a variable distance from the first opening in the traveling direction;
Equipped with
Ion implantation equipment.
 前記第1開口、前記第2開口、前記第3開口、前記第4開口は、同じ方向に長尺のスリットである、請求項1に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device of claim 1, wherein the first opening, the second opening, the third opening, and the fourth opening are elongated slits extending in the same direction.  前記イオンビームは、前記第1開口、前記第4開口、前記第3開口、前記第2開口の順に通過し、
 前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離は、前記イオンビームが前記ウェハに照射される際に所望の位相空間分布を有するように制御される、
 請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
the ion beam passes through the first opening, the fourth opening, the third opening, and the second opening in this order;
a distance between the first opening and the fourth opening is controlled so that the ion beam has a desired phase space distribution when irradiated onto the wafer.
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1.
 前記イオン源には、前記基準電位より高い引出電位が印加され、
 前記可動導体には、前記第2開口から出射される前記イオンビームの位相空間分布を制御するために、前記引出電位と前記基準電位の間の電位である制御電位が印加される、
 請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。
an extraction potential higher than the reference potential is applied to the ion source;
a control potential, which is a potential between the extraction potential and the reference potential, is applied to the movable conductor in order to control a phase space distribution of the ion beam extracted from the second opening.
3. The ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1.
 前記進行方向における前記サプレッション電極と前記基準電極の距離は一定である、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device of claim 1 or 2, wherein the distance between the suppression electrode and the reference electrode in the direction of travel is constant.  前記進行方向における前記可動導体と前記サプレッション電極の距離は可変である、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device described in claim 1 or 2, wherein the distance between the movable conductor and the suppression electrode in the traveling direction is variable.  前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離は、前記イオン源の状態に応じて、前記イオンビームが前記ウェハに照射される際に所望の位相空間分布を有するように制御される、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 An ion implantation apparatus according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the traveling direction is controlled in accordance with the state of the ion source so that the ion beam has a desired phase space distribution when irradiated onto the wafer.  前記基準電極の下流に、前記イオンビームの位相空間分布を測定する位相空間分布測定器が設けられる、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation apparatus of claim 1 or 2, wherein a phase space distribution measuring device for measuring the phase space distribution of the ion beam is provided downstream of the reference electrode.  前記位相空間分布測定器によって測定された前記イオンビームの位相空間分布に応じて、前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離、および、前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の少なくともいずれかが制御される、請求項8に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device of claim 8, wherein at least one of the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the propagation direction and the control potential applied to the movable conductor is controlled in accordance with the phase space distribution of the ion beam measured by the phase space distribution measurement device.  前記イオン源の状態を反映する装置パラメータを取得するイオン源状態取得部を備える、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an ion source status acquisition unit that acquires device parameters reflecting the status of the ion source.  前記装置パラメータは、前記イオン源のパラメータとして設定されるガス種、ガス流量、ベーパライザ温度、アーク電流、アーク電圧、ソースマグネット電流、前記イオン源から引き出される前記所望イオンを含む前記イオン群が単位時間当たりに運ぶ電荷の総量である実効引出電流、前記ウェハに照射されるイオンビームのビーム電流、の少なくともいずれかである、請求項10に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation apparatus of claim 10, wherein the apparatus parameters are at least one of the gas species, gas flow rate, vaporizer temperature, arc current, arc voltage, source magnet current, which are set as parameters of the ion source, the effective extraction current which is the total amount of charge carried per unit time by the ion group including the desired ions extracted from the ion source, and the beam current of the ion beam irradiated onto the wafer.  前記イオン源状態取得部によって取得された前記装置パラメータに応じて、前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離、および、前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の少なくともいずれかが制御される、請求項10に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device according to claim 10, wherein at least one of the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the traveling direction and the control potential applied to the movable conductor is controlled in accordance with the device parameters acquired by the ion source state acquisition unit.  前記イオン源に印加される引出電位と前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の電位差、および、前記イオン源から引き出される前記所望イオンを含む前記イオン群が単位時間当たりに運ぶ電荷の総量である実効引出電流を取得する電気情報取得部を備える、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an electrical information acquisition unit that acquires the potential difference between the extraction potential applied to the ion source and the control potential applied to the movable conductor, and the effective extraction current, which is the total amount of charge carried per unit time by the group of ions, including the desired ions, extracted from the ion source.  前記電気情報取得部によって取得された前記電位差および前記実効引出電流に応じて、前記進行方向における前記第1開口と前記第4開口の距離、および、前記可動導体に印加される制御電位の少なくともいずれかが制御される、請求項13に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation device of claim 13, wherein at least one of the distance between the first opening and the fourth opening in the traveling direction and the control potential applied to the movable conductor is controlled in accordance with the potential difference and the effective extraction current acquired by the electrical information acquisition unit.  前記イオン源および前記可動導体に同じ電位が印加される、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation apparatus of claim 1 or 2, wherein the same potential is applied to the ion source and the movable conductor.  前記第4開口のサイズは、前記第1開口のサイズより大きい、請求項1または2に記載のイオン注入装置。 The ion implantation apparatus of claim 1 or 2, wherein the size of the fourth opening is larger than the size of the first opening.  所望イオンを含むプラズマを生成するイオン源と、
 前記イオン源における第1開口から前記所望イオンを含むイオン群を引き出してイオンビームを生成する引出部と、
 を備え、
 前記引出部は、前記イオンビームの進行方向の下流から上流に向かって、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第2開口を備え、基準電位が印加される基準電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第3開口を備え、前記基準電位より低いサプレッション電位が印加されるサプレッション電極と、
 前記イオンビームが通過する第4開口を備え、前記第1開口との前記進行方向における距離が可変な可動導体と、
 を備える、
 イオン引出装置。
an ion source for generating a plasma containing desired ions;
an extraction unit that extracts ions including the desired ions from a first opening in the ion source to generate an ion beam;
Equipped with
The extraction unit is configured as follows, from downstream to upstream in the traveling direction of the ion beam:
a reference electrode having a second opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a reference potential is applied;
a suppression electrode having a third opening through which the ion beam passes and to which a suppression potential lower than the reference potential is applied;
a movable conductor including a fourth opening through which the ion beam passes, the movable conductor having a variable distance from the first opening in the traveling direction;
Equipped with
Ion extraction device.
PCT/JP2025/003734 2024-03-06 2025-02-05 Ion implantation apparatus and ion extraction apparatus Pending WO2025187302A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024034308 2024-03-06
JP2024-034308 2024-03-06

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025187302A1 true WO2025187302A1 (en) 2025-09-12
WO2025187302A8 WO2025187302A8 (en) 2025-10-02

Family

ID=96990586

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2025/003734 Pending WO2025187302A1 (en) 2024-03-06 2025-02-05 Ion implantation apparatus and ion extraction apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025187302A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH03263748A (en) * 1989-08-17 1991-11-25 Nissin Electric Co Ltd Ion implanter
US20030146707A1 (en) * 2002-01-11 2003-08-07 Goldberg Richard David Ion beam generator
WO2013122088A1 (en) * 2012-02-14 2013-08-22 日新イオン機器 株式会社 Ion beam irradiation device
WO2019058511A1 (en) * 2017-09-22 2019-03-28 住友重機械工業株式会社 Ion source device
JP2022515025A (en) * 2018-12-20 2022-02-17 アクセリス テクノロジーズ, インコーポレイテッド Tetrode drawer for ion sources

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH03263748A (en) * 1989-08-17 1991-11-25 Nissin Electric Co Ltd Ion implanter
US20030146707A1 (en) * 2002-01-11 2003-08-07 Goldberg Richard David Ion beam generator
WO2013122088A1 (en) * 2012-02-14 2013-08-22 日新イオン機器 株式会社 Ion beam irradiation device
WO2019058511A1 (en) * 2017-09-22 2019-03-28 住友重機械工業株式会社 Ion source device
JP2022515025A (en) * 2018-12-20 2022-02-17 アクセリス テクノロジーズ, インコーポレイテッド Tetrode drawer for ion sources

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2025187302A8 (en) 2025-10-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6662549B2 (en) Ion implantation method and ion implantation apparatus
US8481959B2 (en) Apparatus and method for multi-directionally scanning a beam of charged particles
TWI786261B (en) Ion implantation device and ion implantation method
JP6023170B2 (en) Method and apparatus for improved uniformity control using dynamic beamforming
JP7154236B2 (en) Method and ion implantation system for correcting an implantation angle in an ion implantation system
JP6689544B2 (en) Ion implanting apparatus and ion implanting method
JP5068928B2 (en) Low energy beam enhancement method and beam irradiation apparatus
JP2023066254A (en) Ion implantation method, ion implantation apparatus, and semiconductor device manufacturing method
US8354654B2 (en) Apparatus and method for ion beam implantation using scanning and spot beams with improved high dose beam quality
CN113363128B (en) Ion implantation apparatus and model generation method
US10249477B2 (en) Ion implanter and ion implantation method
JP2025182114A (en) Ion implantation device and ion implantation method
WO2025187302A1 (en) Ion implantation apparatus and ion extraction apparatus
WO2025187303A1 (en) Ion implantation device and ion extraction device
WO2025134644A1 (en) Ion implantation apparatus and angle measurement device
JP4414988B2 (en) Ion beam implantation apparatus and method
JP4468336B2 (en) Ion beam implantation apparatus and method
US20250285829A1 (en) Ion implanter and ion implantation method
US20250279257A1 (en) Ion implanter and ion implantation method
JP2023530880A (en) Minimum Divergence Ion Beam Adjuster
WO2025134645A1 (en) Ion implantation device and beam current measuring apparatus
JPWO2020123063A5 (en)
US20250323015A1 (en) Ion implanter and ion implantation method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25768085

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1